HIGHWAY AND STREET LIGHTING
TERM CONTRACT
1 October 2019 TO 30 September 2027
VOLUME 2
Specification
London Borough of Haringey
Operations - Sustainable Transport
River Park House
225 High Road
Wood Green
London N22 8HQ
www.haringey.gov.uk
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Page left intentionally blank
Page 2 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SPECIFICATION INDEX
Page
Clause
Title
No.
Preamble to the Specification
Appendix
Contract-Specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled
0/1
Clauses, Tables and Figures
Additional Clauses
Series 100 Preliminaries
140AR
Introduction to Service Requirements
18
141AR
Contract Management Personnel Requirements
18
142AR
Contract Meeting Requirements
19
143AR
Contract Reporting Requirements
20
Emergency Attendance and Priority Contract Response
144AR
21
Requirements
145AR
Use of Employer’s CONFIRM Management System
24
146AR
Planning, Commissioning, Completion and Closing Works
25
147AR
Contract Mobilisation
25
148AR
Contractor’s Depot, Stock and Storage
27
149AR
Demobilisation
28
150AR
Interaction with Stakeholders
29
151AR
Considerate Contractors Scheme
30
152AR
Performance Management and Monitoring
30
Roles and Responsibilities under Construction (Design and
153AR
31
Management) Regulations 2015
154AR
London Permit Scheme and Traffic Management Act 2004
33
Normal Working Hours, Working Outside Normal Working Hours
155AR
34
and Restricted Working Hours
156AR
Care and Maintenance of the Employer’s Road Network
34
157AR
Matters Affecting the Public
35
158AR
Avoidance of Nuisance
36
159AR
Protection of Private Property
37
160AR
Safety and Site
37
161AR
Care of the Works
37
Storage of Materials and Plant on Roads
162AR
38
Page 3 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Vehicles Parked on Site and Notification to Residents and
163AR
38
Businesses
164AR
Portable Temporary Traffic Signals
40
165AR
Manual Stop/Go Sign Control
41
166AR
Pelican / Toucan / Pedestrian Crossings
42
167AR
Temporary Footway Crossing
42
168AR
Temporary Variable Message Sign
42
169AR
Environmental Management
43
170AR
Site Waste Management Plan
43
171AR
Prevention of Fly Tipping
44
172AR
Prevention of Mud on Roads
44
173AR
Maintaining Flow in Existing Sewers
45
174AR
Works Affecting Watercourses
45
175AR
Protection of Street Furniture, Fences, etc
45
176AR
Protection of Trees
46
177AR
Traffic Management for Special Events
47
178AR
Emergencies and Civil Emergency
48
179AR
Prime Cost Items
48
180AR
Homelessness Reduction Act
49
Series 200
210AR
Abandoned Pedal Cycles
50
Series 300 Fencing
320AR
Replace Fencing
51
Series 400 Road Restraint Systems (Vehicular and Pedestrian)
420AR
Replacement of Pedestrian Guardrail Panels, Posts, etc
52
Series 500 Drainage and Service Ducts
530AR
Inspection and Proving Existing Ducts
53
531AR
Traffic Signal Pole Retention Sockets
53
Series 590 Sustainable Drainage
590AR
Sustainable Drainage Specification
54
Series 700 Road Pavements General
730AR
Delivery Tickets and Weighing
55
End Performance in Relation to HAPAS Approved and Other
731AR
55
Proprietary Materials and Systems
Page 4 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Series 800 Road Pavements – Unbound, Cement and Other
Hydraulically Bound Mixtures
808AR
Frost Protection for Cement Treated Pavements
56
Series 900 Road Pavements – Bituminous Bound Materials
960AR
Resin Bonded Coloured Surface Treatment
57
961AR
Stress Absorbing Membrane Interlayer (SAMI)
57
962AR
Ironworks and Drainage
58
963AR
Traffic Calming Features
58
Series 1100 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas
1120AR
Granite Kerbs, Channels or Quadrants
59
1122AR
Safety Kerbs
59
1123AR
Granite Setts
59
1124AR
Cutting and Finishing Paving (All Types)
60
1125AR
Tree Pits and Resin Bonded Tree Pit Surfacing
60
1126AR
Traffic Islands
61
1127AR
Footway Crossovers
61
Series 1300 Road Lighting Columns, Brackets and Wall
Mountings
1320AR
Vertical Re-Alignment of Lighting Columns and Traffic Sign Posts
62
1321AR
Lighting Column Retention Sockets
62
Series 1400 Electrical Work for Road Lighting and Traffic Signs
1430AR
Lump Sum Electrical Works
64
1431AR
Lighting Unit Performance Requirements
64
1432AR
Scope of Night Scouting (Lump Sum)
64
1433AR
Scope of Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance (Lump Sum)
64
1434AR
Scope of Cyclic Inspection and Testing (Lump Sum)
65
1435AR
Scope of Reactive Fault Repair (Lump Sum)
66
1436AR
Response Times for Completion of Lighting Unit Fault Repairs
68
1437AR
Street Lighting, Illuminated Sign Inventory and Records
68
1438AR
Emergency Attendance to Lighting Units
69
1439AR
Hazard Safety Bollards
69
Procedures for Isolation, Energisation and Making Safe Existing
1440AR
70
Power Supplies and Cables
1441AR
Replacement of Lighting Unit Components
71
Page 5 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1442AR
Lamp Replacement Procedures
72
1443AR
Lamp Disposal / Recycling
72
1444AR
Cleaning Method and Materials for Lighting Units
72
1445AR
Visual Inspection for Lighting Units
73
1446AR
Electrical Testing for Lighting Units
74
1447AR
Structural Testing for Lighting Units
74
1448AR
Festive Lighting and Permanent Tree Lighting
75
Substitute Clauses
Series 100 Preliminaries
101SR
Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the Employer
77
107SR
Site Extent and Limitations on Use
77
112SR
Setting Out
78
113SR
Program of Works
79
116SR
Privately and Publically Owned Services and Supplies
80
Series 900 Road Pavements – Bituminous Bound Materials
942SR
Thin Surface Course Systems
81
Series 1200 Traffic Signs and Road Markings
1217SR
Traffic Signals
86
Appendix
Contract-Specific Minor Alterations to Existing Clauses and
0/2
Tables included in the Contract
110
Information Boards
88
601
Classification, Definitions and Uses of Earthworks Materials
88
1107
Footways and Paved Areas (Concrete Block Paving)
88
1212
Road Markings
89
Appendix
List of Contract Specified Numbered Appendices Referred to
0/3
in the Specification and Included in the Contract
This Appendix 0/3 is comprised of two lists, A and B, of
numbered Appendices as follows:
List “A” Is a list of the Numbered Appendices referred to in the
Appendix
Specification for Highway Works. Appendix numbers not listed
Number
are not used.
List “B” Gives the list of Contract-specific Numbered Appendices
devised for the Contract.
Appendix numbers not listed are not used.
Page 6 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
List “A”
1/1
Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the Employer
91
1/5
Testing to be carried out by the Operating Company
93
1/7
Site Extent and Limitations on Use
94
1/9
Control of Noise and Vibration
95
1/13
Programme of Work
98
1/14
Payment Applications
100
1/16
Privately and Publicly Owned Services or Supplies
101
1/17
Traffic Safety and Management
103
1/18
Temporary Diversions for Traffic
108
1/19
Routeing of Vehicles
109
1/21
Information Boards
110
1/22
Progress Photographs
111
1/23
Risks to Health and Safety from Materials or Substances
112
1/24
Quality Management System
118
2/3
Retention of Material Arising from Site Clearance
131
2/4
Explosives and Blasting
132
2/5
Hazardous Materials
133
2/6
Site Clearance Environmental Requirements
134
3/1
Fences Gates and Stiles
135
4/1
Pedestrian Guardrails
137
5/1
Drainage Requirements
138
5/2
Service Duct Requirements
143
5/4
Fin Drains and Narrow Filter Drains
145
5/5
Combined Drainage and Kerb Systems
146
5/6
Linear Drainage Channel Systems
147
6/1
Requirements for Acceptability and Testing etc of Earthworks
149
Materials
6/2
Requirements for Dealing with Class U1B and Class U2
153
Unacceptable Materials
6/5
Geotextiles Used to Separate Earthworks Materials
155
6/7
Sub-formation and Capping and Preparation and Surface
156
Treatment of Formation
6/8
Topsoiling
157
6/14
Limiting Values for Pollution of Controlled Waters
160
Page 7 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
6/15
Limiting Values for Harm to Human Health and the Environment
161
7/1
Permitted Pavement Options
162
7/2
Excavation, Trimming and Reinstatement of Existing Surfaces
171
7/4
Bond Coats, Tack Coats and Other Bituminous Sprays
172
7/22
Repairs to Potholes
173
11/1
Kerbs Footways and Paved Areas
176
12/1
Traffic Signs: General
182
12/3
Traffic Signs: Road Markings and Studs
189
12/5
Traffic Signs: Traffic Signals
193
14/1
Site Records
213
14/2
Location of Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars
215
14/4
Electrical Equipment for Road Lighting
216
14/5
Electrical Equipment for Traffic Signs
228
20/1
Waterproofing for Concrete Structures
241
24/1
Brickwork, Blockwork and Stonework
244
30/5
Grass Seeding and Turfing
245
30/10
Maintenance of Established Trees and Shrubs
247
List B
Contract Requirements in Relation to Employer’s CONFIRM
1/30
119
Management System
1/40
Performance Management and Measurement
122
1/41
Quality Promises Register
129
1/42
Depot Availability
130
5/7
Employer’s Gully Asset Management Requirements
148
7/30
High Friction and Resin-Based Coloured Surface Treatments
174
12/10
Cycle Parking
194
13/10
Lighting Columns, Brackets and Mountings
195
Summary of Road Lighting Units included in the Schedule of
13/11
200
Rates
14/6
Cables and Wiring
229
14/7
Liaison with and Instruction of Electricity Suppliers
233
14/8
Summary of Road Lighting and Illuminated Sign Inventory
235
Employer’s Lighting Unit Asset Management System and
14/9
Contractor’s Duties and Responsibilities
236
Page 8 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
19/6
Contract requirements for Protection and Painting of Equipment
237
50/6
Contract requirements for Maintenance Painting of Equipment
248
Appendix
List of Standard Drawings Included in the Contract
0/4
1.
Employer’s Standard Details
100-1
Information Board – Type 1
100-2
Information Board – Type 2
300-1
Chainlink Fence
300-2
Close Boarded Timber Gate
300-3
Close Boarded and Timber Pallisade Fence
300-4
Galvanised Single Barrier Gate & Oak Post & Rail Fence
400-1
Visirail with Sight Gap Guard-Railing
400-2
Fabrikat High Visibility Guard Rail
400-3
Harrington Pedestrian Guardrail
400-4
Stretford Pedestrian Guardrail
400-5
Linx Pedestrian Guardrail
400-6
Wood Green Town Centre - Linx Pedestrian Guard Railing
400-7
Medcraft Post and Rail
500-1
Surface Water Drains - Trench and Bedding
500-2
Filter Drain - Trench & Bedding
500-3
Typical Manhole Details Type A and B
500-4
Typical Manhole Type E and Catchpit
500-5
Typical Road and Footway Gully
500-6
Typical Manhole Details Types C and D
500-7
Brick Drawpits Type A to E
500-8
Service Ducts
500-9
Chute Road Gully & Catch Pit
500-10
Traffic Signal Retention Socket
500-11
Street Lighting & Furniture Retention Socket
500-12
Soakaway and Infiltration Tench
700-1
Sinusoidal Road HRA Hump
700-2
Road Cushions
Page 9 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
700-3
Bus and Loading Bay
700-4
Bituminous Sinusoidal Speed Table
700-5
Typical Block Paving Speed Table
700-6
Typical Granite Sett Speed Table
1100-1
Typical Kerbs Detail
1100-2
Footway Construction Detail 1
1100-3
Footway Construction Detail 2
1100-4
Dropped Crossing with Tactile Paving
1100-5
Recessed Utility Cover
1100-6
Footway Vehicle Crossover Detail 1
1100-7
Footway Vehicle Crossover 2
1100-8
Footway Vehicle Crossover 3
1100-9
Granite Sett Drainage Channel
1100-10
Typical Island with Tactile Paving
1100-11
Tree Pit & Edging Detail
1200-1
Bollard Fixing Detail
1200-2
Gateway Sign, Street Name Plate & Frame Detail
1200-4
Hoop Cycle Stand Detail
1200-5
Sheffield Cycle Stand Detail
1200-6
Reflectorised & Illuninated Sign Post Detail
1300-1
Street Lighting Fixing No 1 Detail
1300-2
Street Lighting Fixing No 2 Detail
1300-3
Street Lighting Fixing No 3 Detail
1300-4
Street Lighting Fixing No 4 Detail
1300-5
Street Lighting Fixing No 5 Detail
1300-6
4m Column and Light Bracket Detail
1300-7
Column Identification Plate Detail
1300-8
Street Lighting & Furniture Retention Socket Detail
1400-1
Lighting Unit Wiring No 1 Detail
1400-2
Lighting Unit Wiring No 2 Detail
1400-3
Lighting Unit Wiring No 3 Detail
1400-4
Lighting Unit Wiring No 4 Detail
1400-5
Lighting Unit Wiring No 5 Detail
Page 10 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1400-6
Lighting Unit Wiring No 6 Detail
1400-7
Lighting Unit Wiring No 7 Detail
2400-1
Flemish Brickwall Detail
2.
Other Contract Drawings
Highway Construction Details at Volume 3 of Manual of Contract
Documents for Highway Works
24 drawings associated with Sustainable Drainage Specification
(Series 590)
Page 11 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
PREAMBLE TO THE SPECIFICATION
1. The Specification referred to in the Tender shall be the ‘Specification for Highway
Works’, published by the Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual
of Contract Documents for Highway Works, as modified and extended by the following
contract specific items:
i)
Appendix 0/1: Contract-Specific Additional, Substitute and Cancelled Clauses,
Tables and Figures;
ii)
Appendix 0/2: Contract-Specific minor alterations to existing Clauses, Tables
and Figures;
iii)
The contract specific Numbered Appendices listed in Appendix 0/3;.
iv)
Appendix 0/4 contains a list of the Drawings.
2. The relevant publication date of each page of the Specification for Highway Works is
given in the Schedule of Pages and Relevant Publication Dates.
3. An Additional Clause as indicated by a suffix 'AR' in Appendix 0/1 is a contract specific
alteration.
4. A Substitute Clause as indicated by a Suffix 'SR' in Appendix 0/1 is a contract specific
alteration.
5. A Cancelled Clause as indicated by a suffix 'CR' in Appendix 0/1 is a contract specific
alteration.
6. Insofar as any of the contract specific Numbered Appendices may conflict or be
inconsistent with any provision of the Specification for Highway Works the Numbered
Appendices shall always prevail.
7. Any reference in the Contract to a Clause number or contract specific Appendix shall
be deemed to refer to the corresponding Substitute Clause number or contract specific
Appendix listed in Appendix 0/1 or 0/2.
8. Where a Clause is altered any original Table/Figure referred to in the Clause shall apply
unless the Table/Figure is also altered. Where a Table/Figure is altered any reference
in a Clause to the original Table/Figure shall apply to the altered Table/Figure.
9. Where a Clause in the Specification relates to work goods or materials which are not
required for the Works it shall be deemed not to apply.
10. Any Appendix referred to in the Specification which is not used shall be deemed not to
apply.
11. For the purposes of this Contract the term Overseeing Organisation where used in the
Specification shall mean the Employer.
12. For the purposes of this Contract the Employer’s role may be delegated to the Engineer
in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Page 12 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
13. Where Standards and other documents are incorporated into the Contract by reference
the respective edition used shall be that which is current on the Contract
Commencement Date.
14. In the Specification “Day” shall mean calendar day unless stated otherwise.
Page 13 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SCHEDULE OF PAGES AND RELEVANT PUBLICATION DATES
Series /
Page Number
Publication Date
Appendix
000
1 to 3
May 2014
000
4 to 7F
February 2016
100
1 to 2, 4 to 9, 12 to 29F, WF1, N2 to N11F
May 2014
100
3, 10 to 11, N1
December 2014
200
1 to 3F
February 2016
300
1
May 2001
300
4
November 2002
300
2 to 3, 5 to 6F
May 2008
400
1 to 6, 8, 10 to 13F
November 2007
400
7.9
November 2008
500
23 to 24, 26
November 2004
500
28F
May 2005
500
3, 22, N1F
May 2006
500
2, 5, 27
November 2006
500
6, 25
November 2007
500
1, 4, 7 to 21
November 2009
600
1 to 77F,S1 to S4F, W1 to W4F, N1 to N5F
February 2016
700
1 to 36F, N1 to N6F
February 2016
800
1 to 31F
February 2016
900
2 to 5, 9 to 22, 24 to 26, 28 to 67F
August 2008
900
1, 6 to 8, S1F
November 2008
900
23, 27
May 2009
1000
1 to 45F
February 2016
1100
1, 4F
November 2004
1100
2, N1F
November 2006
1100
3
August 2008
1200
5
May 2001
1200
2 to 3, W1F
August 2003
1200
1, 14 to 16F
May 2004
1200
4, 9 to 11, 13
May 2005
1200
12
November 2006
1200
6 to 7, N1 to N4F
November 2007
1200
8
May 2008
1300
N2F
November 2003
1300
3 to 4
November 2004
1300
1, 5 to 10, 12F
November 2005
Page 14 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Series /
Page Number
Publication Date
Appendix
1300
2, 11 and N1
May 2006
1400
2, N1F
May 2001
1400
1, 3 to 9F
May 2006
1500
7
May 2001
1500
2
February 2003
1500
3 to 4, 8 to 11, 13
November 2004
1500
1, 5 to 6, 12, 14 to 17F
November 2006
1600
1, 4 to 5, 9, 15, 17 to 18, 24 to 26, 29 to 31, 35, 38, 49F
March 1998
2, 6 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 19, 27 to 28, 32 to 34, 36 to 37,
1600
November 2003
39 to 42, 44 to 48
1600
3, 20 to 23, 43
November 2005
1700
1 to 27F
December 2014
1800
1 to 35F
August 2014
1900
1 to 35F, S1 to S2F
August 2014
2000
1, 3 to 4F
May 2001
2000
2
November 2004
2100
1 to 2F
February 2016
2300
1
March 1998
2300
2 to 3F
May 2001
2400
1, 4, 7F
May 2005
2400
2
May 2006
2400
3, 5 to 6
May 2008
2500
1
May 2001
2500
2, 8, 11F
November 2003
2500
10
November 2004
2500
6 to 7, 9
May 2005
2500
5
May 2006
2500
3 to 4
November 2006
2600
1
March 1998
2600
2 to 4
November 2003
2600
5
November 2004
2600
6
May 2005
2600
7F
November 2006
3000
4 to 7, 10, 12 to 17, 19, 22 to 27F
May 2001
3000
20
November 2004
3000
2 to 3
May 2006
3000
8 to 9, 11, 18, 21
May 2008
5000
1, 4 to 19F, S1F
May 2005
Page 15 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Series /
Page Number
Publication Date
Appendix
5000
2 to 3
November 2008
Appendix A
1 to 4F
May 2014
Appendix B
1 to 3F
May 2014
Appendix C
1 to 2F
May 2014
#Appendix D
1F
May 2014
Appendix E
1F
May 2014
Appendix F
1 to 52F
February 2016
Appendix G
Not used
Appendix H
1
May 2004
Appendix H
2
November 2005
Appendix H
3
November 2006
Appendix H
4 to 9F
November 2008
Page 16 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX: 0/1
CONTRACT-SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL, SUBSTITUTE
AND
CANCELLED CLAUSES, TABLES AND FIGURES
INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
Page 17 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
ADDITIONAL CLAUSES, TABLES & FIGURES
SERIES 100 PRELIMINARIES
140AR Introduction to Service Requirements
1. The Contractor shall, in accordance with the contract, undertake maintenance and
improvement of the Employer’s Road Network, including street lighting and illuminated
assets and other areas falling within the Contract Area as defined in Appendix 1/7.
2. The Contractor will have the ability to programme the vast majority of works required under
the contract but shall also undertake emergency attendance (2 hours) and priority works
(24 hours or 7 days) where instructed by the Employer.
3. Under the contract there is no commitment by the Employer to any particular volume of
works. All works will be instructed by task based Works Orders as required by the
Employer.
4. The Contractor shall in providing the service comply with all requirements of this
Specification and shall provide adequate supervision of the works to ensure they are
completed safely and in a timely fashion in accordance with all specified requirements.
5. Unless indicated otherwise the Contractor shall provide all hardware and software they may
require to comply with ICT requirements of the service. All ICT systems and their use shall
comply with Haringey’s Information Security Manual (ISP001).
141AR Contract Management Personnel Requirements
1. Employer’s Management Team – The Employer shall be responsible for the strategic
management of this contract and may be assisted by nominated representatives as
identified in the Contract. The Employer and their team will work with the contractor’s staff
to deliver work commissioned through this contract, within a collaborative and blame-free
working culture.
2. Contractor’s Management Team – The Contractor’s management structure shall include
key people who shall fulfill the roles and functions stated below. Key people shall be of a
nature and disposition that is compatible with working in a spirit of mutual trust and co-
operation. The Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, ensure that key people
are not frequently changed and shall not, in any event, replace any key people with others
whom, in the opinion of the Employer, is less experienced or otherwise less competent to
undertake the role. The key people are:
• The Contract Manager who shall be a Director or other senior permanent member of
the Contractor’s staff with adequate authority, competence and involvement in the
contract to be able to represent the Contractor at a strategic level management meeting.
The intention is that the Contract Manager will work closely with the Employer, assure
performance and enable innovation and continuous improvement.
Page 18 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• The Contract Supervisor (the Contract’s Agent or Representative under the Contract)
who shall be a permanent member of the Contractor’s staff with adequate authority and
competence to ensure, at an operational management level, that the Contractor
provides the service. The intention is that the Contract Supervisor will work with the
Employer and their team to deliver the required overall operational service. The
Contractor shall ensure that the Contract Supervisor is entirely dedicated to operation
of this contract and that his effectiveness is not diluted by involvement in other activities.
The Contract Supervisor shall (either personally or by establishing cover arrangements
approved by the Employer) be available at all times to deliver requirements with regard
to emergency attendance / works.
3. Both Management Teams shall support collaborative behaviour and address behaviour
which is not collaborative.
142AR Contract Meeting Requirements
1. The Contractor shall in providing the service ensure that he is regularly and properly
represented at a range of meetings as described below:
(a) Monthly Contract Management Meetings – The Employer will arrange in consultation
with the Contractor the date, venue and detailed agenda for monthly contract meetings
throughout the contract period. The Contract Manager, Contract Supervisor and
appropriate assistants shall attend each monthly meeting, or send an appropriate
deputy if necessary. The meetings will consider, but not exclusively, issues such as:
• The Employer’s satisfaction, or otherwise with the Contractor’s overall
performance of the contract
• Review of performance against contract KPIs and annual targets
• Review of quality promise register
• Performance on key projects and tasks
• Emergency Attendance response and Priority Works
• Health, Safety & Welfare matters
• Invoices, payments and budgets
• Operational issues
• Risk and Early Warning Register
• Future Works
• AOB
Every third meeting (Quarterly) will be expanded to cover strategic issues such as
service improvement and innovation in line with Corporate objectives.
(b) Weekly Operational Meetings – The Contract Supervisor shall attend a weekly meeting
at the Employer’s offices to discuss general progress of works being carried out under
the contract, and any related issues. It is intended that this meeting will be between the
Client and Contract Supervisors who shall involve other Employer’s staff or inspectors
as necessary. It may also be attended by the Employer or Employers Representatives’
at their discretion. Operational meetings may be used to engage Contractor’s in the
Page 19 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
design review process and seek Early Contractor Involvement in relation to schemes
they will be asked to construct under the contract.
(c) Project / Programme Traffic Management and Construction Planning Meetings – The
Contract Manager, Contract Supervisor (or assistants) as appropriate shall be
responsible for arranging and attending all stakeholder engagement meetings
necessary to ensure safe, timely and orderly construction of individual projects or
programmes of work, which have been commissioned under the contract.
(d) Ad-hoc Operational Meetings – The Contract Supervisor (or assistants) shall attend ad-
hoc meetings requested by the Employer’s team at the Employer’s offices, on site or at
the Contractor’s depot to develop and complement day to day contact between them
and to deal with matters arising out of work, which have been commissioned under the
contract.
2. Minutes / Records / Action Notes for all meetings shall be prepared by the Contractor unless
otherwise agreed by the Employer.
143AR Contract Reporting Requirements
1. The Contractor shall, where required by the Employer, submit the following written reports:
(a) Quarterly Progress and Performance Report – The Contractor shall submit quarterly
progress reports, at least one week before the Quarterly Strategic Contract
Management Meeting. It shall detail the current status of service delivery. Each report
shall have the content and format agreed with the Employer but shall include the
following:
• Details of the Contractors performance against Employer’s expectations
• Information required from the Contractor to monitor KPIs
• Safety Reports (as detailed below)
• Litigation (defence / settlement of third party claims)
• Praise and complaints from stakeholders
• Suggested improvements, efficiencies and potential for innovation
(b) Safety Reports – The Contractor shall record all accidents and near misses that occur
whilst providing the service. This record shall comply with all relevant legislation,
including:
• The Health and Safety (First Aid) Regulations 1981 (as amended)
• The Social Security (Claims and Payments) Regulations 1987 (as amended)
• The Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations 2013
(RIDDOR)
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer copies of the relevant pages from this
accident record together with copies of all forms submitted to statutory bodies and
related to delivery of services under the contract.
Page 20 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
In addition to undertaking all statutory notifications the Contractor shall notify the
Employer, immediately where practicable but in any case within one hour, of any fatal
accident that occurs in relation to delivery of services under the contract. Details of any
serious injury accidents shall be submitted to the Employer within 5 working days.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer of any Improvement or Prohibition
notices issued to him under health and safety legislation whether or not it relates to
delivery of services under the contract.
(c) Weekly Statement on Key Projects and Tasks – The Contractor shall send to the
Employer by noon each Friday a weekly statement. Weekly statements shall be in a
format agreed with the Employer but shall include the following:
• A summary of progress on key projects / tasks / programmes during the current
week
• A summary of the next weeks programme
• Opportunities arising
• Risks and Threats to delivery
• Any interventions necessary by the Employer
The Employer shall identify key projects or tasks and where they change shall inform
the Contractor by noon each Monday.
144AR Emergency Attendance and Priority Response Requirements
1. Works instructed under the contract shall be completed within 28 days unless they are
associated with Emergency Attendance (2 hours), Priority 1A response (24 hours), Priority
1B response (7 days) or subject to a project specific programme where an alternative
completion date has been agreed (see Appendix 1/13).
2. Emergency Attendance (2 hours)
(a) Emergency Attendance requires a response to make safe within two hours (on a 24-
hour basis and 365 days a year). It will require the contractor to set up an emergency
system and to advise the Employer of the structure of that service, named operatives
including line manager and telephone numbers that allow the Employer to escalate a
call out if required. Performance shall be measured and reported by the Contractor
monthly as set out in the Performance Measurement Requirements (Appendix 1/40).
Failure to achieve timely completion of works on a persistant basis will involve the
contractor in having to review the callout structure and if required the Employer reserves
the right to bring in another emergency response team and to recharge this cost to the
contractor for this service, in accordance with the Contract.
(b) During Normal Working Hours instructions to attend an incident will normally be made by the
Employer. At all other times outside of these hours including weekends and Bank Holidays, the
instruction will normally be given to the Contractor by the Employer’s appointed representative
(Arrangements to be agreed). The Employer shall confirm all telephone instructions in writing
not later than the end of the following working day.
Page 21 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(c) The Contractor shall provide one telephone number and one e-mail address to which
emergency instructions can be transmitted by the Employer. The telephone and facsimile
machine shall be continuously manned during normal working hours by a person able to
receive and communicate instructions to the Contractor’s workforce. The Contractor shall
provide a roster of duty staff including one telephone number to which emergency instructions
can be transmitted by the Employer outside normal working hours. This telephone number
shall not change unless otherwise agreed with the Employer and shall be continuously manned
outside normal working hours, by a person both able to receive and communicate instructions
to the Contractor’s workforce and feedback information on progress to the Employer. At all
times there shall be available competent and trained operatives able to obtain a suitably
equipped vehicle and to be available to respond and make safe emergencies with 2 hours.
(d) Vehicles used shall be painted a conspicuous safety colour and be equipped with hazard
beacons and floodlights capable of being directed to assist operations during the hours of
darkness. The vehicles shall carry a full range of small tools; shovels, brushes, drain rods,
manhole keys, crowbars, chain saw, wooden extension ladder etc. and sufficient traffic signs
and cones so that the team can deal effectively with the incident. The vehicles shall be capable
of carrying, in addition to the above, a reasonable quantity of debris away from an incident.
(e) During emergency attendance the Contractor shall undertake a permanent repair where
possible having regard to permitting etc. Permanent repairs will be measured and
reimbursed on the basis of the Schedule of Rates.
(f) Where a permanent repair is not possible during an emergency attendance it shall be
completed within 28 days (unless otherwise agreed by the Employer) and the contractor
shall make safe the damaged asset and undertake temporary repairs necessary to
reinstate serviceability of the asset. This shall include but not be limited to the following:-
• Temporary filling of potholes or depressions or trips in a manner to allow
continued safe use of the footway or carriageway until a permanent repair is
undertaken
• Removal of guardrails or other street furniture causing obstruction
• Disconnection and making safe electricity supplies
• Other temporary measures as required to restore serviceability
• Maintenance of temporary measures until permanent repair is completed
(g) Where required the Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary guarding, signing
and lighting until a permanent repair is provided but temporary guarding, signing and
lighting shall not be provided as an alternative to a temporary repair that reinstates
serviceability of the asset.
(h) Any equipment removed during emergency attendance shall be left in a safe state.
Columns or signposts shall either be cut to a height of not less than 1m or to ground
level as appropriate. Sharp edges shall be removed or protected and warning tape
indicating the danger of electric shock shall be clearly displayed. The electricity supply
shall be isolated if possible and in any case left in a safe condition. Items cut to ground
level shall be temporarily reinstated.
Page 22 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(i) All operatives undertaking Emergency Attendance shall be trained and competent to
carry out emergency works, recognise any potential hazards and leave the site in a safe
condition. They shall be provided with a communication system through which they may
liaise with the Employer and other stakeholders for the duration of the incident.
(j) The Contractor’s emergency attendance operatives shall take photographs recording
the nature of the hazard on site, on arrival and on completion of works to make safe.
Photographs should clearly show the extent of works carried out in relation to the
surrounding street scene.
(k) No reimbursement shall be made for Emergency Attendance where such attendance is
associated with a failure by the Contractor to maintain equipment or issues arising out
of the Contractor’s activity or failure to undertake works in ordered timescales.
(l) No reimbursement shall be made for Emergency Attendance where such attendance
fails to meet the performance requirements of this clause.
(m)The Contractor shall within 24 hours of completing an Emergency Attendance submit
to the Employer a report identifying
• Time of initial call and caller
• Names of operatives attending
• Registration number of vehicles attending
• Time of arrival on site
• Site location
• Nature of incident
• Assets affected
• Details of any backup equipment utilised
• Details of attendance by DNO
• Summary of action with before / after photos
• Details of recovered reusable materials
• Details of any highway or lighting assets that needs to be replaced. Payment for
replacement assets shall be assessed on the basis of re-measurement using the
Schedule of Rates.
3. Priority 1A Response (24 hours)
(a) The Employer shall at his discretion instruct the Contractor to attend to priority faults,
typically arising out of highway inspections or requests from the police or other
stakeholders. Works ordered as a Priority 1A Response shall be completed within 24
hours.
(b) No reimbursement shall be made for Priority Response where such attendance fails to
meet the performance requirements of this clause.
4. Priority 1B Response (7 days)
Page 23 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(a) The Employer shall at his discretion instruct the Contractor to attend to priority faults,
typically arising out of highway inspections or requests from the police or other
stakeholders. Works ordered as a Priority 1B Response shall be completed within 7
days.
(b) No reimbursement shall be made for Priority Response where such attendance fails to
meet the performance requirements of this clause.
145AR Use of Employer’s CONFIRM Management System
1. Unless the Employer is satisfied that the Contractor can, procure and operate an
Information & Communications Technology (ICT) interface system that is fully compatible
with the Employer’s CONFIRM asset management system from Pitney Bowes, the
Contractor shall use the Employer’s CONFIRM asset management system to deliver the
service.
2. The Employer’s CONFIRM system shall be used for the electronic exchange of works
orders, payment applications, street works permitting, inventory updates and for reporting
and any other processes agreed between the Employer and Contractor. Specific
requirements are provided in Appendix 1/30.
3. Where the Contractor has direct use of the Confirm System: -
a. The Employer will arrange for the Contractor to be licensed for up to 5 concurrent
licenses for the main Confirm system and for other software, such as
ConfirmConnect mobile, as necessary and to be determined, and given access
to parts of the Employer’s ICT systems and network as are necessary to enable
him to provide the service.
b. The Contractor shall nominate at least one person and a deputy from his staff,
who shall be responsible for the Contractor’s use of the Employer’s CONFIRM
system and who shall be the Employer’s point of contact for all matters related
to the system.
c. During the mobilisation period the Contractor’s nominated employees shal
attend a training course, provided by the Employer, at a venue to be agreed. For
subsequent changes of the Contractor’s nominated employees during the
contract period, the Contractor shall provide training for new personnel at his own
expense and to a standard agreed by the Employer.
4. The Contractor shall comply strictly with the Employer’s instructions and policies (such as
Data Protection Compliance and Mapping Agreements) when using the Employer’s ICT
system and shall make no alteration to, or copy of, any software provided to him.
5. All costs for the Contractor’s own activities in operating and maintaining the CONFIRM
Management System shall be included in the general rates, as identified in the Method of
Measurement.
Page 24 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
146AR Planning, Commissioning, Completion and Closing Works 1. Budget allocations shall be set by the Employer for all Works before the start of each of
the Employer’s financial years and these will be issued for guidance purposes only to the
Contractor. These budget allocations shall be revised by the Employer, as necessary,
during each financial year.
2. The Employer will make as much information as possible about each forthcoming Works
Order available to the Contractor as early as possible, through regular contract meetings.
On receipt of details the Contractor shall as early as possible consider health and safety
and buildability issues associated with the works and feedback to the Employer any views
that may affect conclusion of the planning / design stage. If requested, the Contractor shall
also advise the Employer with regard to construction methodology, the time allowed for
construction and health and safety concerns which need to be considered during planning.
3. Works required by the Employer will be commissioned as discrete schemes or
programmes. Works shall not be commenced until the construction stage plan is approved
and the Contractor has received a Works Order. Orders will be issued through the
Employer’s Confirm system.
4. The majority of simple works ordered by the Employer will not require a programme. Where
requested by the Employer, the Contractor shall provide a programme that complies with
Appendix 1/13. Regardless of whether a programme has been produced the Contractor
shall work diligently monitor progress against agreed completion dates and immediately
inform the Employer of any slippage which has occurred and plans for recovery. The
completion date for works which have no programme and are neither Emergency
Attendance nor Priority Response shall be 28 days (or other period agreed by the
Employer) after the date on which the Works Order is raised in Confirm.
5. The Contractor shall register completion of works by updating the relevant order in the
Confirm system within 24 hours of completion and submit a final account in accordance
with the Contract.
6. At the end of the Employer’s financial year, or at other times when reasonably required by
the Employer, the Contractor shall provide promptly and to a timetable supplied by the
Employer sufficient information, so that the Employer may close its accounts in accordance
with its normal accounting practices.
147AR Contract Mobilisation
1. The Contractor shall during the mobilisation period ensure that he is fully ready and able to
commence providing the service on the commencement date. The activities undertaken
during the mobilisation period shall comply with all promises identified in the tender quality
submission and include but not be limited to the following:
• Establishing key persons and wider resources;
• establishing and testing all internal and external communication facilities and systems;
Page 25 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• establishing all administrative systems and scheduling regular meetings;
• preparing all depot accommodation, facilities and Contractor’s equipment;
• developing a working relationship with the Employer and other members of the
Employer’s staff;
• becoming familiar with the Contract Area and all interfaces and boundaries with other
highway authorities and other jurisdictions;
• fully familiarise himself with those areas where heavy on-street parking takes place
and devise preliminary ideas of working in these areas that minimise or avoid delays
due to works;
• fully familiarise himself with key stakeholders associated with delivery of the service;
• appraising works carried out by the outgoing contractor and identifying and notifying
the Employer of matters not adequately completed by the outgoing contractors;
• taking all reasonable steps to obtain from the outgoing contractor and Employer all
records, programmes and other information necessary or required for carrying out the
services under the contract;
• identifying where records, programmes and other information are incomplete or
missing and make recommendations to the Employer regarding activity necessary to
resolve any issues that arise due to incomplete or missing information;
• reviewing the results of any surveys, assessments or other investigations that have
previously been carried out by others, where these are relevant to providing the
service, and advising the Employer as to their adequacy and the need for further
survey or other work;
• liaising, as appropriate, with the outgoing contractor or others to ensure that
transitional arrangements operate smoothly;
• becoming familiar with any residual duties to be performed by the outgoing contractor
and any ongoing work being performed within the Contract Area and advising the
Employer as appropriate;
• advising the Employer of any addition to the service, which the Contractor considers
appropriate to be performed during the mobilisation period;
• undertaking all enabling activity to be able to start work on any key projects by the
commencement date;
• developing, finalising and submitting all-encompassing Health and Safety Plan (clause
153AR) and all other initial documents required by the contract;
Page 26 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• ensuring that he has ready access to an adequate supply of materials and equipment
e.g. street lighting columns or other highway furniture, such that response periods
identified in the contract can be achieved;
• prepare night scout plan / programme (clause 1432AR);
• prepare cleaning and cyclic routine maintenance plan / programme (clause 1433AR);
• prepare cyclic inspection and testing plan / programme (clause 1434AR);
• prepare fault management method statement (clause 1435AR);
• review lighting unit inventory (clause 1437AR);
• provide details of proposed lighting unit components (clause 1441AR);
• Agreeing meeting and reporting requirements with the Employer;
• Submit for approval the Contract Specific Quality Plan (Appendix 1/24);
• Agree Quality Promise Register (Appendix 1/41) with the Employer;
• Submit for approval layout of typical Performance Report (clause 152AR).
2. The Contractor shall prepare a mobilization programme for approval by the Employer within
14 days of Contract Award.
148AR Contractor’s Depot, Stock and Storage
1. Depot & Welfare Facilities
The Contractor shall note depot space that may be available through a commercial lease with London
Borough of Haringey, details in Appendix 1/42.
The Contractor shall ensure that the services required by the contract are carried out from a suitably
equipped depot with appropriate welfare facilities. The depot shall, at all times, provide sufficient safe
and appropriate storage for all of the Contractor’s equipment, vehicles, plant and materials. It shall be
fitted out and furnished to provide a healthy and safe environment for all personnel that are associated
with delivery of the service.
The depot shall be established during the mobilisation period and maintained throughout the contract
period. During that period all buildings, access roads, storage areas and parking areas shall be safe,
serviceable and adequately maintained. The depot shall be fully serviced with gas, water, electricity
supplies, telephone lines and sanitation as necessary to perform as a safe place to work having regard
to welfare of all working at and visiting the facilities. The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate
security measures are provided at the depot and that all equipment stored on behalf of Haringey is
safe and secure. The Contractor shall pay all fees, charges associated with the Depot.
Page 27 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
The depot shall be located either within the London Borough of Haringey or sufficiently close to it to
enable the Contractor to respond to orders for emergency attendance or other priority responses
within the times specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall not leave any materials, or park any Contractor’s equipment on any part of the
Employer’s Road Network or at other locations outside the depot, unless expressly permitted to do so
by the Employer in connection with works that are taking place.
2. Stock and Storage
The Contractor shall ensure that he has, throughout the contract period, ready access to items
of equipment and materials e.g. street lighting columns, guardrails, paving, etc to enable him
to provide the service in accordance with response times identified in the Specification.
The Contractor shall inform the Employer immediately if any items are not available due to
reasons beyond the Contractor’s control. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with
options for replacing equipment that is not available. Alternative items may only be used with
the agreement of the Employer.
The Contractor shall provide at his depot adequate space to store all equipment and materials
necessary to provide the service in accordance with response times identified in the
Specification. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide an area of 20 sq. metres for ad-hoc
storage of equipment or materials requested by the Employer and a single marked parking
space for the Employer’s staff.
149AR Demobilisation
1. Unless the Employer notifies the Contractor, in accordance with the Conditions of Contract
that the contract period is to be extended the Contractor shall commence demobilisation
three months prior to the end of the initial term. If the contract is extended, the Contractor
shall commence demobilisation three months prior to the end of the extended term. The
activities undertaken during the demobilisation period shall include but are not limited to
the following:
• delivering to the Employer (the extent and format of which shall be as he reasonably
requires) all operational records, collected data, calculations and results of all analysis
produced by the Contractor in connection with surveys and other investigations and
enquiries;
• providing all necessary facilities, advice and assistance to enable the incoming
Contractor(s) to perform his duties equivalent to the mobilisation activities;
• handing back all materials and equipment provided by the Employer, in good order at
the end of the contract;
• transferring to the Employer, all digital information that has been accumulated during
the contract period, other than the Contractor’s commercially confidential digital
Page 28 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
information;
• preparing and submitting to the Employer, no later than three months before the end
of the contract, a report on all outstanding defects and work in progress and
identifying work that the Contractor expects to be completed after the end of the
contract period;
• confirming to the Employer the stock of equipment and materials being held on behalf
of the Employer that will be transferred to the incoming contractor;
• delivering or otherwise assisting with the transfer of such items to the incoming
contractor;
• TUPE records as required by the contract terms and conditions.
150AR Interaction with Stakeholders
1. The Contractor shall, as necessary, notify stakeholders of Works he is constructing and
consult with
• The Metropolitan Police;
• Transport for London and in particular traffic signals unit, TfL Buses and TfL
Underground where they are likely to be affected by the Works;
• Adjacent Highway Authorities, if any part of their road network is likely to be affected
by the Works;
• Elected Members of the Employer;
• Residents’ Associations (if directly affected by the Works);
• Traders ‘Associations (if directly affected by the Works);
• Hospitals (if directly affected by the Works);
• Stadia and large venues (if directly affected by the Works);
• Officers within other sections of the Employer (responsible for dealing with such
matters as street cleansing, refuse collection, environmental protection and parking
and the like);
• Bus operators (if directly affected by the Works);
• Emergency Services (if directly affected by the Works);
• Statutory Undertaker’s and the like;
Page 29 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• Network Rail (if directly affected by the works)
2. The Contractor shall notify residents and businesses of works that may affect them or cause
local disruption at least 72 hours in advance of commencing the Works. Such notification
shall be made by the use of standard letters prepared by the Contractor to the satisfaction
of the Employer which will require the insertion by the Contractor of the precise details of
the proposed disruption.
3. All vehicles used by the Contractor and his sub-contractors in the execution of the Contract
shall while in use bear on both sides and rear identity marks bearing the trading name of
the Contractor. The identity marks shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the
Contract Period.
4. All Contractors’ staff engaged in the Works (including sub-contractors) shall have Personal
Protective Equipment badged with the Contractor’s ID.
5. The Contractor shall provide, and widely publicise on information signs and on plant and
vehicles being used for the Works, a dedicated telephone number to which members of the
public should address any queries or complaints as a first point of contact. The Contractor
shall ensure that this number is attended throughout normal working hours by courteous,
helpful and competent staff, supported by effective processes for dealing with the enquiries
and complaints reported to them that are associated with performance of the Works. The
Contractor shall not be expected to address issues related to general Network
Management but shall forward any such enquiries to the Employer within 24 hours of
receipt.
151AR Considerate Contractor’s Scheme
1. The contractor shall be a member of the Considerate Contractor’s Scheme.
2. The Contractor will not be expected to register schemes or maintenance projects of value
less than £50,000 in value, though they shall in case fully exhibit the behaviours of a
considerate contractor whether or not the scheme is registered.
152AR Performance Management and Monitoring
1. The Contractor shall ensure that a quality management system is in place to assure internal
control of quality and consistency of practice and be committed to a process of continuous
service improvement. Outcomes and Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) will be reviewed
throughout the life of the contract. The Contractor shall provide a Monthly Performance
Report (in a format agreed by the Engineer) comprising monthly returns on all KPIs and
work with the Employer to measure performance effectively and to ensure compatibility
with the Employer’s systems and requirements.
2. Details of KPIs and their measurement are included in Appendix 1/40. Any changes to KPIs
or targets shall be agreed jointly by the Employer and Contractor, annually.
3. In addition, quality promises inferred from the quality tender submission at tender stage
Page 30 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
shall be recorded in the register in Appendix 1/41 and their delivery monitored through the
course of the Contract.
4. Performance metrics will not be directly linked to payments due under the Contract but will
be an important factor in assessing the Contractor’s ability to deliver the service and
consider future extensions. The Contractor shall, in accordance Clause 100 of the
Conditions of Contract, on a monthly basis submit Key Performance Indicator (KPI)
information described above and in Appendix 1/40.
5. During the first three months of the contract the Contractor shall operate shadow KPI
reporting on performance and it shall not be used to assess performance.
6. After three months, the Contractor shall perform contract requirements to ensure the
required operational performance is achieved across KPIs. Where performance as
measured through KPIs does not meet the Employer’s requirements it shall be managed
in accordance with Clauses 100 to 102 of the Conditions of Contract.
7. The Employer, in its commitment to continuous improvement and delivering value, considers that
the way the works are carried out on site makes a significant impact on both convenience to the
public and the perception of a quality service. The Contractor shall fully co-operate with initiatives
to promote value. These may be consultation with service users and community groups, service
reviews, publication of performance measures, attendance at ad hoc meetings with the Employer
and/or the Employer to review the options for change to improve the overall service, adopting the
basic principles that services levels will be sustained or improved through new methods of working
and/or the introduction of technical innovation.
153AR Roles and Responsibilities under Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 2015
Client
1. The Client for the Works, for the purposes of the Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 2015 (CDM), shall be the Employer for the contract.
2. The Client shall provide the Contractor with a Pre-Construction Information in accordance
with the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015. Pre-construction
information will comprise:-
a. a generic preconstruction information document which identifies information available
at the time of tender; and
b. project specific preconstruction information packs (including SU plans) as required to
comply with CDM requirements and the Contractor’s “All-Encompassing Construction
Phase Plan”
Principal Designer
3. The Principal Designer for the Contract shall be the Employer or other such person or
organization identified in individual Works Orders and may include:
Page 31 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• A member of the Employer’s staff
• Consultants employed or commissioned by the Employer
• The Contractor (exceptionally by agreement)
4. The Principal Designer shall assist the Client in producing Pre-Construction Information
Pack in accordance with the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015.
Principal Contractor
5. Unless indicated otherwise the Contractor shall be the “Principal Contractor” for all Works,
within the meaning of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015.
6. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Construction (Design and
Management) Regulations 2015 in relation to their role as Principal Contractor and shall
not commence any work until such time as their Construction Phase Plan has been
approved.
7. The Employer has produced a generic preconstruction information document. The
Contractor shall during the mobilisation period prepare an “All-Encompassing Construction
Phase Plan” for the Contract and submit it to the Principal Designer / Employer for approval
at least four weeks before the contract commencement date. The Plan shall cover the
relevant arrangements, proportionate to the risks, for each separate area of work. The plan
shall be clear about where specific works should be considered as separate projects or
require further development of the “All-Encompassing Construction Phase Plan.”
8. Where the Client provides project specific preconstruction information packs (including SU
plans) as required by the “All-Encompassing Construction Phase Plan” that shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his obligations in relation to CDM, Clause 116SR, Appendix 1/16
and all other statutory obligations. In particular, where for any reason implementation of
any works is delayed the Contractor shall ensure he obtains current SU plans before
proceeding to construction.
9. The Contractor shall liaise with the Client / Designer and provide the following information
(to allow preparation of a Health and Safety File) within 7 days of completion of the works:
• “red line” AS BUILT drawings
• a copy of the Contractor’s Construction File (identifying any residual risks)
The information shall be provided in *.pdf format and be included in a single project zip file.
10. To achieve the 7 day deadline it is essential that the Contractor shall during the course of
works maintain a master set of manually marked-up “red line” AS BUILT drawings. As
changes are made on site and as all components of the installation are completed, the
Contractor is required to confirm that they are installed per the original drawings or record
the changes directly on hard copy drawings.
154AR London Permit Scheme and Traffic Management Act 2004
Page 32 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1. The Contractor shall comply with clause 27 of the Conditions of Contract and the following:
• Traffic Management Act 2004
• New Roads and Street Works Act 1991
• Street Works (Registers, Notices, Directions and Designations) (England)
Regulations 2007
• Street Works (Charges for Unreasonably Prolonged Occupation of the
Highway) (England) Regulations 2009
2. In addition to the above, the Employer operates within the London Permit Scheme for Road
Works and Street Works. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the London
Permit Scheme for Road Works and Street Works.
3. For works classed in the Traffic Management Act 2004 as Immediate (Urgent or
Emergency), the Contractor shall notify the Employer within two hours of commencing
work.
4. The responsibility for raising and issuing Provisional Advanced Authorisations, Permit
Applications and Notices for Cyclic, Reactive and Scheme works rests with the Contractor
in accordance with the London Permit Scheme, Traffic Management Act 2004 and the New
Roads and Street Works Act 1991. Applications shall be made electronically via an
Electronic Transfer of Notices (EToN) system or through CONFIRM.
5. The Contractor shall adhere to all notice/permit requirements and conditions.
6. The responsibility for sending all Traffic Management Plans, Works Activity Footprints,
TMAN Notifications, and EToN Notifications (NRSWA and Permit Applications) to the
relevant highway authority rests with the Contractor.
7. The Contractor shall check and reply to all EToN Comments and ensure all Web Service
Transactions have been sent successfully.
8. The Contractor shall sign up to the Mayor’s Code of Conduct for Street Works.
9. In addition to the above, the Employer has powers under the Traffic Management Act 2004
to issue fixed penalty notices against promoters who commit offences. The Fixed Penalty
Notice offences listed in the Regulations will have affect as though the Contractor were a
statutory undertaker, and the charges/fees listed in those Regulations will therefore also
apply as they would to a statutory undertaker. The relevant Regulations are specified
above. The Contractor should assume that such charges/fees will be applied unless
specifically stated in Works Orders.
10. Failure to comply with the Acts or Regulations outlined above will lead to charges being
imposed on the Contractor in line with the fines associated with the relevant legislation, e.g.
The Street Works (Charges for Unreasonably Prolonged Occupation of the Highway)
(England) Regulations 2009. The Contractor should assume that such charges/fees will be
applied unless specifically stated in Works Orders.
Page 33 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
11. The Contractor shall comply with the staff training, assessment and certification policy as
required by the TMA. All supervisors and all operatives on the contract shall be qualified in
accordance with the requirements of the Street Works (Qualifications of Supervisors and
Operatives) Regulations 2009 (“the Regulations”). Supervisors and operatives carrying out
work outside the scope of the mandatory units of the Regulations shall also be qualified in
the appropriate units covering the work that they are undertaking. All operatives working in
the highway shall be qualified in 'Unit 2' under Schedule 3 of the Regulations (Signing,
Lighting and Guarding). All supervisors and operatives shall be holders of the relevant
CSCS (Construction Skills Certification Scheme) card, as issued by the CITB.
12. The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors comply with the above in respect of
their own employees.
13. Copies of certificates held by all supervisors and operatives employed on the contract shall
be made available to the Employer, on request, at the commencement and when new
operatives are employed during the contract period.
155AR Normal Working Hours, Working Outside Normal Working Hours and Restricted
Working Hours
1. Unless described otherwise, Normal working hours shall be Monday to Friday between
0730 and 1800 hours and Saturday between 0730 and 1300 hours. The Contractor shall
not work outside normal working hours except with the written permission of the Employer.
2. Other than in exceptional circumstances no working will be permitted on Sundays or Bank
Holidays.
3. Restrictions to Normal Working Hours may be imposed at the Employer’s sole discretion
on any works at any time e.g. works on traffic sensitive routes or in other circumstances
where the works may cause significant disruption or nuisance.
4. The Contractor should note that no noisy work is permitted before 08.00 hours as stated in
Appendix 1/9.
156AR Care and Maintenance of Employer’s Road Network
1. Highway Maintenance
The Contractor shall, in accordance with any directions from the Employer or otherwise, afford
facilities and make arrangements for the highway authority and its other contractors to continue
to carry out normal maintenance functions. This shall include maintenance of infrastructure
outside the ambit of this Contract, street cleaning and winter maintenance operations.
2. Statutory Undertakers and Emergency Services
The Contractor shall, in accordance with any directions from the Employer or otherwise, afford
facilities and make arrangements for Statutory Undertakers to access their plant and mains in
Page 34 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
accordance with their rights under the New Roads and Street Works Act 1991.
The Contractor shall afford facilities to the Emergency Services in carrying out their statutory
duties, including affording full access to any property in the vicinity of any Works and access
to any fire hydrant.
3. Network not to be Used as Depots
The Contractor shall not make use of any street or public way for depositing or storing plant or
materials other than such plant, materials, tools and implements which from time to time
may be required for immediate use on the site.
4. Highway Closures
The Contractor shall not close any part of any street or public way, or occupy any land for
storing materials, without first obtaining the permission of the Employer. Such permission will
not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not continue to keep closed such portion
of any street or public way or continue to occupy such land beyond the time for which such
permission has been given. Closure of highway may be affected to facilitate the Contractor's
programme subject to eight weeks' notice being given to the Employer.
157AR Matters Affecting the Public
1. Access to Frontages of Properties:
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times safe and sufficient pedestrian and
vehicular access to all properties in the vicinity of and adjacent to any Works.
The London Borough of Haringey is characteristically a densely populated urban environment
with substantial pockets of industrial and commercial development. Many residents are Council
tenants, some in large estates including tower blocks. Many residents are from ethnic
minorities including significant numbers who do not speak English.
It is inevitable that much of the activity envisaged within this Contract will take place in close
proximity to residential properties and businesses. Works and services must therefore be
carefully planned and programmed so as to fully take into account the needs of frontagers and
others affected. The Contractor is required to engage with the residential and business
communities such as to reduce inconvenience to a minimum.
2. Notification to Residents Occupiers and Vehicle Owners:
Certain works will unavoidably necessitate:
• clearing areas of carriageway of vehicles to facilitate the Contractor's operations
• working at one location for more than one day
• disrupting the access to any property, including residential and business
The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying residents, occupiers and vehicle owners, etc.
Page 35 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
at least 72 hours in advance of such disruption. Such notification shall be made by the use of
standard letters prepared by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer which will
require the insertion by the Contractor of the precise details of the proposed disruption.
3. Removal of Vehicles:
No vehicles to be moved by the Contractor without the permission of the owner or his/her
authorised agent, unless in compliance with Clause 163AR.
158AR Avoidance of Nuisance
1. Traffic:
The Contractor shall at all times be under an obligation to minimise the effects of his operations
on traffic. He shall in general seek to keep as short as possible operations within or restricting
the highway, and shall seek to carry out such operations at times chosen so as to minimise
disruption to traffic flows. He shall so arrange the transport of plant and materials such that
any additional traffic which arises shall be limited as far as is reasonably possible. The
Contractor shall cause no avoidable congestion or nuisance to the highway or neighbouring
property.
2. Advertisements and Graffiti:
No advertisement shall be placed on any temporary or permanent work erected in connection
with this Contract. Any unauthorised fly-posting or graffiti appearing on any buildings,
hoardings, fencing etc. on the site of the Works when possession of the site is taken by the
Contractor or, afterwards during the currency of any Works shall be removed as soon as
possible after such is discovered.
3. Contractor to use Appropriate Plant:
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Appendix 1/9. All constructional plant
shall be of such type and size as the Employer may approve and shall not be unduly noisy.
The Employer may require the Contractor to suspend temporarily or permanently the use of
any plant on the grounds that such is avoidably the cause of undue noise or exhaust pollution
nuisance to neighbouring residents or businesses. In such circumstances the Contractor shall
change the method of performing the Works at his own cost and shall have no claim against
the Employer in this matter. All mechanical hand tools, all pneumatic tools, and all other plant
and equipment shall be fitted with mufflers of an approved type. Prior approval of the Employer
will be required should the Contractor wish to use a vehicle-mounted type concrete breaker.
4. Storage of Plant:
The Contractor may select his own sites for the temporary storage of his plant and materials
but, should the Employer reasonably consider this to be unsuitable, the Contractor shall
relocate. Sites shall be reinstated to their original condition after use. Should the Contractor
seek to store plant and materials in the highway, the advance approval of the Employer to his
precise proposals shall be required.
Page 36 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
159AR Protection of Private Property
1. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect private property from
damage, i.e. forecourts, walls, gates, driveways etc., and will be held responsible for
making good any damage whatsoever at his expense. The Contractor shall inspect the
site prior to the commencement of his work and report to the Employer any existing
defects or damage to private property. The Contractor should at his own cost carry out
such conditions surveys as he considers necessary to protect his own interest. The
Contractor is also required to inform the Employer of any damages and any rectification
work carried out within 3 days.
160AR Safety on Site 1. All improvement notices from the Employer or any of his authorised representatives
concerning health and safety of operatives or road users must be complied with as
specified in the notice(s), within such a period as may be stated in the notice. Unless
action is taken as directed, the Employer may provide all such materials, plant and labour
as are necessary, in his opinion, and all the costs of hiring carrying, placing, maintaining
and arranging will be charged to the Contractor or be recovered from monies which
become due to the Contractor.
161AR Care of the Works 1. The Contractor shall, during the whole time that the works are in progress, keep the
whole of the site clean and in a tidy condition, and shall remove all debris to that
Contractor's tip. Particular care should be taken to ensure that no materials enter the
street gullies.
2. The Contractor should also ensure that no dust or clay is being deposited on the highway
outside the limits of the work.
3. All water pumped from the trenches or other excavations shall be confined to proper
channels and shall not be permitted to flow across roads, pavements or footways, to the
inconvenience or danger of the public. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the
likelihood of damage occurring to surfacing by oil deposits from stationary and standing
plant. Any such damage shall be made good at the Contractor's expense to the
satisfaction of the Employer.
4. Any potholes that form in the existing carriageway surfacing shall be made up with
suitable material.
5. The condition and cleanliness of footways and carriageways will be vigorously enforced.
Page 37 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
162AR Storage of Materials and Plant on Roads 1. Because of the nature of the Works, material and plant shall not be stacked or deposited
upon the road, save with the express agreement of the Employer.
2. The short term storage of small items may be permitted only in those locations
specifically indicated by the Employer. Such materials shall be placed so as to cause the
least interference possible to the public.
3. The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for any damage or accident cause by such
stacking or depositing. Under no circumstances shall any materials be left on the
carriageways or footways during the hours of darkness without adequate lighting.
163AR Vehicles Parked on the Site and Notification to Residents and Businesses
1. The Contractor shall take into consideration the difficulty of parking in some locations and
shall devise methods of working that avoid the parking of any vehicles or plant in a
manner that contravenes any Traffic Regulation Order. Parking difficulties shall not be in
any way interpreted as a failure on the part of the Employer to provide right of access.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the site is free of obstruction caused
by parked vehicles which may affect his planned progress of work. In this connection, the
Contractor shall give adequate notice and shall liaise with the appropriate authorities to
ensure that the necessary suspension of On-Street Parking, and/or arrangements for
dealing with obstructive or illegally parked vehicles, is made.
3. The Contractor shall not close any part of any street or public way, or occupy any land for
materials, without first obtaining the permission of the Employer, and shall not continue to
keep closed such portion of any street or public way, or continue to occupy such land,
beyond the time for which such permission has been given.
4. The Contractor shall indicate within his programme reasonable dates that he requires
individual roads to be closed or for “no waiting and loading” restrictions to be introduced
in order for him to be able to carry out his works. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of
8 weeks notice to the Employer in order for the appropriate orders to be made.
5. One week prior to any road closure or temporary waiting and loading restrictions being
brought into force, the Contractor shall erect warning signs indicating the time at which
the restrictions will come into force, their duration, a brief indication of the purpose of the
restrictions, the Contractor’s name and 24hr emergency number. The Employer shall
approve the wording and layout of the sign prior to fabrication.
6. The signs shall be attached to convenient lamp columns or sign posts, and shall be
located as follows:
• Road Closure: 2 signs at each end of the road, or section of road to be closed, plus 2
at every junction with another road within the extent of the closure; and
Page 38 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• Temporary waiting restrictions: One at each end of the extent of the restrictions, plus
one every 30m between.
7. The Contractor shall, on the same day as the erection of the signs, distribute to every
household, and attach to the windscreen of every car parked within the extent of the road
closure or temporary waiting and loading restrictions, a standard form of notice, the
original copy of which will be supplied by the Employer.
8. On the day prior to the road closure or temporary waiting and loading restrictions, the
Contractor shall attach to the windscreen of every car within the extent of the road closure
or temporary waiting and loading restriction, a standard form of notice the original copy of
which will be supplied by the Employer. The Contractor shall also place ‘no waiting’ cones
to deter parking.
9. Before commencement of the works the Contractor shall confirm in writing to the
Employer that residents have been notified as outlined above.
10. Throughout the period of any closure, the Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and
subsequently remove such traffic signs, road markings, lamps, barriers and traffic control
signals and such other measures as may be necessary to safely maintain the closure in
accordance with the recommendations contained in Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual
1991.
11. When the Contractor encounters an obstruction that prevents him from carrying out works
or services required by the contract, the Contractor shall make every effort to identify who
is responsible for the obstruction, including the owners and drivers of vehicles. This shall
include calling at all nearby residences, businesses and shops. In general, all addresses
within 50 m of the obstruction shall be visited (although where a building outside this
distance may reasonably contain owners/drivers such premises shall also be visited).
When the Contractor, using his best endeavours in accordance with the above
requirements, fails to get an obstruction removed, he will then become responsible
himself for removing the obstruction, assuming that it is physically possible to remove it.
12. Where the obstruction is caused by parked vehicles and the Contractor, having made his
best endeavours to have the vehicles removed by their owners/drivers, and/or to carry out
the works in the presence of the obstructing vehicle(s), he may elect to remove the
vehicle(s) by means of an approved mechanical vehicle-lifter. The removal of vehicles by
a lifter is viewed by the Employer as very much a last resort, however so long as the
Contractor is able to demonstrate compliance with the above requirements and
application of his best endeavours, approval to use a mechanical lifter will not be
unreasonably withheld.
13. The Contractor shall give the Employer 3 days notice before resorting to a mechanical
vehicle-lifter. On the day before the vehicle-lifter is to be present at the site, the Contractor
shall deliver letters to all addresses and place notices on all vehicles on and within 50m of
the site. This will inform of the nature of the works, the exact location, the need for removal
of parked vehicles and the attendance of the mechanical vehicle-lifter. At 7.00am on the
morning of the works the Contractor shall place temporary signs saying “NO PARKING.
Page 39 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
ESSENTIAL HIGHWAY WORKS TODAY, OBSTRUCTING VEHICLES WILL BE
REMOVED” immediately in advance of the works.
14. The selection and use of a vehicle removal firm will be at the approval of the Employer. The
chosen vehicle removal firm shall be aware of, and shall comply with, all the legal
requirements associated with the removal and relocation of vehicles from the public
highway. The Contractor shall ensure that all recovery vehicle operatives hold a current
certificate, recognised by the Institute of the Motor Industry or the Motor Industry Training
Standards Council, confirming that they have successfully completed training in the use of
the vehicle removal equipment to be operated for the purposes of the contract. The
Contractor shall submit to the Employer, prior to commencement of vehicle recovery
operations, copies of such certificates, together with copies of the driving licenses of the
operatives.
15. The Contractor shall ensure that all recovery equipment used for the vehicle relocation is
operated in accordance with the recommendations of the “Code of Practice on Health and
Safety for Vehicle Recovery Operators” published by the Association of Vehicle Recovery
Operators, and that all vehicle relocation operations are conducted in accordance with the
Health and Safety best practice.
16. On no account shall vehicles be moved by the Contractor without first obtaining the
permission of the owner or his/her authorised agent, unless in the presence of and with the
permission of a Police Officer. Removed vehicles shall be relocated to a suitable location,
if possible within 30 metres of the works and in sight of the original location. Where possible
the vehicle shall be replaced in its original location at the earliest possible opportunity. Any
vehicle not returned to its original location shall be reported without delay to the national
removed vehicles database “Trace”. The Contractor shall leave a notice on a trestle (or
other approved method) at the location of any removed vehicle not relocated within 30m of
its original location informing owners that “Vehicles Obstructing Essential Road Works
Have Been Removed” and giving the Contractor’s name and a contact telephone number,
to answer any enquiries.
17. The Contractor shall fully indemnify the Employer against all claims and damages that may
arise from the mechanical lifting of vehicles. The Contractor shall deal with all reports or
allegations that vehicles have suffered damage. All such claims shall be dealt with
professionally, promptly, and politely. In all cases where damage to a vehicle by the
Contractor necessitates the said vehicle being unavailable to its owner/driver, the
Contractor shall provide the said owner/driver with an equivalent vehicle for the whole of
that period at no cost to the owner/driver or to the Employer.
164AR Portable Temporary Traffic Signals
1. The use and positioning of temporary traffic signals shall be agreed with the Employer prior
to their installation.
2. Portable traffic signals shall be vehicle actuated and comply with the Department of
Transport Advisory Leaflet 2/11 (revised December 2015), the Highways Agency
Specification for Portable Traffic Signal Control Equipment for use at Roadworks (TR 2502
Page 40 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
A), an Introduction to the Use of Vehicle Actuated Portable Traffic Signals" published by
TSO and Chapter 8 of the Traffic Signs Manual, TSO.
3. Portable traffic signals may be operated by a generator only between the hours 8.00 am
and 5.00 pm on Mondays to Saturdays and at no time on Sundays or Bank Holidays.
Outside these hours traffic signals must be operated by the means of batteries with a
reserve capacity of 24 hours from the time of the proposed expiry time. The Contractor
shall provide an information board with a 24 hour per day call out number displayed at the
portable traffic signals.
4. Any portable generator used as a power supply shall be a sound reduced model and be
properly silenced and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's 147 instructions
and operated in accordance with BS 5228:1984
5. Any cables for the traffic signals which cross a carriageway which is open to vehicles shall
be contained in a Cable Crossing Protector designed to prevent damage to the cable and
to permit traffic, particularly two wheeled vehicles, to cross safely. Drivers shall be warned
of the presence of the Cable Crossing Protector by means of "RAMP" signs.
6. The maximum distance between the two signal heads, when using temporary traffic
signals, shall not exceed 150 metres unless otherwise agreed with the Employer.
7. Temporary traffic signals shall include a pedestrian phase wherever such facility is deemed
necessary by the Employer.
8. For any site where temporary traffic signals are operated, there shall be at least one person
on site competent in the operation and adjustment of such apparatus.
9. The Contractor shall provide the necessary advance warning signs and shall have
STOP/GO signs available for immediate use in case of electrical or mechanical breakdown.
165AR Manual STOP/GO sign control
1. For some short duration works, when agreed with the Employer and Police, the Contractor
may use manual STOP/GO sign traffic control. All operators of STOP/GO signs shall be
suitably experienced and certificated for this type of work. The traffic signs layout for this
type of work shall be in accordance with Chapter 8 of 'The Traffic Signs Manual.'
2. Where the length of the works necessitates the use of two STOP/GO signs, then their
operators shall ensure that they are clearly visible to each other at all times. If not, then a
third central operator may be required to relay instructions to the two STOP/GO sign
operators.
166AR Pelican/Toucan/Pedestrian Crossings
Page 41 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1. If any works are within 50 metres of pedestrian or pelican or toucan crossings this should
be brought to the attention of the Employer. After agreement with the Employer the
Contractor shall ensure that the signal / belisha head is suitably covered and signs
indicating that the crossing is temporarily out of use shall be provided on both approaches
to the crossing.
2. A list of all the crossings effected shall be maintained by the Employer and will be
appropriately advertised, indicating the duration that each of the crossings effected will be
out of action.
3. The Contractor will be advised of when the markings of the crossings have been reinstated
in order that he may remove the signs and signal covers.
167AR Temporary Footway Crossings 1. The Contractor shall provide a one-week notification prior to commencing any works where
it is necessary for lorries or heavy plant to be driven across the public footway, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove the existing kerb and surfacing, excavate as
required and provide, lay and maintain a temporary crossing to the satisfaction of the
Employer. On completion of the Works for which the access is required, it shall be
permanently reinstated to its former construction, at the Contractor's expense.
168AR Temporary Variable Message Signs
1. When instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall supply temporary, trailer mounted
variable message signs to alert road users to forthcoming works or to provide road users
with information during works.
2. Signs shall comply with TR2158A:2008 Specification for Portable VMS for use on the HA
Trunk Road Network. Such signs shall be set up in accordance with the Employer’s
requirements for the particular location.
3. Signs shall be positioned in accordance with the Employer’s instructions. If site constraints
do not allow the Contractor to comply fully with these instructions, the Employer shall be
notified immediately. The positioning of these signs shall be such as to ensure that they do
not impede the flow of traffic (unless the Employer specifies otherwise) or the movement
of pedestrians, that they do not create a hazard to traffic or pedestrians, and that they do
not cause damage to vegetation.
4. Once in place, each sign shall be visited at intervals of not less than once every 24 hours
in order to check on cleanliness, positioning and security.
5. The duration of signing shall be instructed by the Employer. Signs shall be removed
promptly once the signing need has expired.
169AR Environmental Management
Page 42 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1. It is the Employer’s aim is to minimise any adverse impacts that construction has on the
environment. The Employer seeks this through the design process, materials selection,
construction techniques and operational methods. All organisations appointed to work on
the Employer’s behalf are required to work in accordance with these principles. The
Employer’s greenest borough strategy to which all consultants and contractors appointed
on
our
projects
are
expected
to
conform
can
be
found
at
http://www.haringey.gov.uk/business/selling-council/sustainable-procurement
2. The Contractor
shall produce an annual Environmental Action Plan confirming how the
Contractor will comply with the Employer’s Environmental objectives.
170AR Site Waste Management Plan
1. One targeted outcome of the Employer’s Environmental Management Policy is to
continuously reduce the quantity of waste arising and increase the recovery of materials
for reuse and recycling on all construction projects. The Contractor shall support the
Employer’s objectives when developing waste management requirements for the contract.
2. The Employer’s aim is to minimise the consumption of finite natural resources and to
minimise the quantity of waste being sent to landfill sites. Therefore, as general design
principles, the Employer shall require the following where commercially viable (in
accordance with the waste hierarchy):
• Efficient design and stock control to minimise the use and waste of materials;
• Reuse and refurbishment of existing infrastructure;
• Use of reclaimed products and materials;
• Use of renewable materials from legal and sustainable sources (such as timber
with appropriate certification);
• Waste and loss minimisation on-site;
• Recycling of construction, demolition and excavation waste; and
• Procurement of products and materials with good practice levels of recycled
content (relative to other products meeting the same specification).
3. These objectives should be pursued while avoiding adverse impact on cost, quality or other
requirements in this brief, and minimising transport (especially road transport of heavy
materials) where feasible.
4. The Employer requires that the Contractor establishes a Site Waste Management Plan
(SWMP) for the contract. The plan is required to set targets for waste reduction and
recovery based on an assessment of the likely composition and quantity of waste arising
and identification of the most significant cost-effective options for improvement. This should
be supplemented by information on how the targets will be achieved during construction
Page 43 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
activities and how the actual levels of waste reduction and recovery will be monitored for
comparison with the targets set.
171AR Prevention of Fly Tipping 1. The Contractor shall effectively ensure that no earth, soil, rubble, rubbish or other waste
material removed from the site in connection with the Works by the Contractor's transport
is deposited, dumped or fly-tipped in whole or in part on any land, street or premises
whatsoever in or outside the London Borough of Haringey (except in the case of lawful
disposal) without the previous consent, in writing, of the owner or occupier of the said land,
street or premises.
2. The Contractor shall make his employees and any permitted or nominated sub-contractor
fully aware that dumping or fly-tipping in any form or place is strictly prohibited and would
render the Contractor liable to prosecution. The Contractor shall produce whenever
required satisfactory evidence that each load carted away has been deposited only at an
approved tip and the Contractor hereby agrees to give the Employer the name and address
of any driver of any vehicle contravening this condition.
3. The Contractor shall immediately report any instances of fly tipping and any resultant
remedial measures to the Employer.
172AR Prevention of Mud on Roads
1. The Contractor shall take the utmost care to avoid damage to or soiling of any carriageways
or footways in the vicinity of the Works whether by himself, his direct employees, his sub-
contractors or his suppliers.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to roads and streets (whether public or
private) arising out of or in the course of or by reason of the execution of the Works. The
Contractor shall provide adequate vehicle wheel cleansing or washing plant at all sites exits
and shall be responsible at all times for keeping roads and streets adjacent to the site of
the Works free from each, soil, rubble, mud, dirt, rubbish or other waste materials, and shall
at the end of each working day ensure that these conditions are complied with.
3. The Contractor shall not deposit any earth, rubbish or material or other debris on any
carriageways or footways so as to unnecessarily hinder, obstruct or annoy any person
using or wishing to use a street or public way.
4. If it appears to the Employer that earth, soil, rubble, rubbish or other waste material
removed from the site is falling or being deposited on the public highway from the wheels,
bodies or loads or vehicles using the site or otherwise deposited on any carriageway or
footway, then the Employer may give notice to the Contractor of the fact and the Contractor
shall, within six hours thereof and at his expense remove the said deposit and properly
cleanse the land, street or premises affected.
Page 44 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
5. If the Contractor shall fail to do so within six hours then the Employer may at its sole
discretion choose to carry out the necessary work of cleansing the land, street or premises
affected and the cost of such operation shall be paid by the Contractor to the Employer and
the Contractor hereby agrees that if the said cost is not paid the Employer may deduct
same from any monies due to the Contractor from the Employer.
173AR Maintaining Flow in Existing Sewers
1. Flow in the existing sewers shall be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall note that
existing sewers may surcharge during storms. Any proposals involving a sewer connection
or the diversion of flow in sewers, and any proposed measures to maintain the flow in
sewers, shall under all circumstances be subject to the approval of the Employer. The
Contractor shall give to the Employer a minimum of three days' notice prior to carrying out
any work affecting existing sewers. Temporary measures for carrying surface water or foul
sewage flows shall provide no less capacity than the pre-existing arrangement. The
Contractor shall restore and make good any existing field drains, house drains or other
drains, pipes sewers or other existing sewerage facilities interfered with and which are not
to be abandoned.
174AR Works Affecting Watercourses
1. The Contractor shall notify the Employer in writing 14 days in advance of his intention to
start any part of any Works affecting a watercourse.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining watercourses within the site in effective
working condition at all times.
3. The Contractor shall take all practical measures, which shall be subject to the prior approval
of the Employer, to prevent the deposition of silt or other materials in, or the pollution of,
any existing watercourse, lake, reservoir, borehole, aquifer or catchment area, arising from
his operations.
175AR Protection of Street Furniture, Fences, etc
1. All street furniture and signs, fences, lamp columns, walls, trees, shrubs, greens, footpaths
and any other surfaces adjoining the footways or near the site shall he protected and any
damage arising out of operations under this Contract shall be made good at the expense
of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Employer.
2. The Contractor is also required to inform the Employer of any damages and any rectification
work carried out within 3 days.
176AR Protection of Trees
Page 45 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1. The Contractor shall take all reasonable care while undertaking the works to avoid damage
to any trees. Where the Contractor considers that any element of tree pruning is required
he must not proceed with the operation until he has notified and received instructions from
the Employer.
2. When undertaking works near trees the Contractor shall consider the likely extent of the
trees’ root system and, where reasonably practicable, shall protect the whole of this area
so that it remains undisturbed during construction operations. Where it is not reasonably
practicable to exclude a trees’ protection zone from the work area, the Contractor shall
adopt one of the following specific measures to minimize the effects of the Works.
(a) Before starting the work, the Contractor shall identify the protection zone with marker
paint or pegs to ensure that his operatives are aware of the extent of the area in which
special precautions are required to avoid or minimise tree damage.
(b) The Contractor shall provide adequate protection, to a height of at least two metres, to
prevent mechanical damage to the bark of the trunk of each tree. The protection shall
be reusable and, as the work progresses, shall be transferred from tree to tree.
(c) Where the work includes the removal of paved surfaces and excavation works shall be
carried out as follows
• Footways – All slabs or other paving shall be carefully lifted and removed. Layers
not infiltrated by tree roots may be broken out using a hand held breaker but all
loosened material shall be removed by hand taking care to avoid damage to roots.
All other layers of sub-base shall be excavated using hand tools only, taking care
not to damage roots. Tree roots exceeding 25mm in diameter shall be worked
around and retained. Where it is necessary to remove these roots the Contractor
should consult the Employer’s Arboricultural officer for advice. Any root cutting shall
be carried out using a sharp handsaw or secateurs and the size of the wound shall
be kept to a minimum. Roots smaller than 25mm in diameter and in particular mats
of smaller roots (including fibrous roots) should be retained where possible. Smaller
and fibrous roots may easily dry out and die when exposed, particularly in warm or
windy conditions and shall be covered and protected with damp hessian until
excavation is backfilled.
• Carriageways – Bituminous surface, binder and base courses may be removed by
machine and compacted sub-base material below may be broken using a hand held
breaker, but loosened material shall be removed by hand taking care to avoid
damage to roots. All other layers of sub-base shall be excavated using hand tools
only, taking care not to damage roots. Tree roots exceeding 25mm in diameter shall
be worked around and retained. Where it is necessary to remove these roots the
Contractor should consult the Employer’s Arboricultural officer for advice. Any root
cutting shall be carried out using a sharp handsaw or secateurs and the size of the
wound shall be kept to a minimum. Roots smaller than 25mm in diameter and in
particular mats of smaller roots (including fibrous roots) should be retained where
possible. Smaller and fibrous roots may easily dry out and die when exposed,
particularly in warm or windy conditions and shall be covered and protected with
Page 46 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
damp hessian until excavation is backfilled.
3. Where a root cannot be severed without putting the stability of the tree in danger the
Contractor shall subject to the approval of the Employer resolve the issue in one of the
following ways:
Kerbing
• Use a smaller sized kerb
• Create a gap in the kerb to allow for the root
• Bridge the kerb over the root
• Construct a kerb build out
Footway Surfacing
• Create a localized change in level to accommodate the root
• Create a tree pit, if the root is close enough to the tree and the footway width is adequate
• Replace a localized area of rigid paving with bituminous material
In the exceptional event that it is not possible to identify a solution the Employer may have
to consider, authorize and arrange for the tree to be felled.
4. The Contractor shall take particular care when backfilling excavations within a tree
protection zone to avoid over compaction of the soil and root damage resulting from
mechanical action of tamping down. Backfill material used around exposed roots shall
consist of suitable fine granular fill material and shall be compacted using hand tamping
methods only, to maintain a degree of aeration and enable tree roots to recover. Where it
is necessary to compact bituminous material in the close proximity of tree roots the
Contractor shall consult the Employer’s Arboricultural officer for advice. Non-paved areas
shall be backfilled using the previously excavated soil which shall be only lightly firmed and
left proud to allow for natural settlement.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that he does not include residual chemical herbicides in
construction materials that are used within a tree’s protection zone.
177AR Traffic Management for Special Events
1. The Contractor may be required to set out traffic management for special events. Full
details of each event and traffic management layout will be supplied to the Contractor by
the Employer. The Contractor may be required to provide and install traffic management
or, alternatively, to collect Employer-owned signs from the Employer’s store and to deliver
to site, and to set up, the signs and any ancillary equipment as instructed. The Contractor
shall maintain personnel and vehicles on site in order to maintain or modify the layout of
the signs for the period instructed during the special event, and shall remove from site the
signs and return to the Employer’s stores on instruction from the Employer or the Police.
2. Special events may take place at any time of year and on any day of the week. The
Contractor shall meet with the Employer’s Special Event Coordinator at the location
Page 47 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
specified by the Employer to discuss and arrange special event traffic management
establishment following any reasonable request for such a meeting.
3. The Contractor shall take all reasonable care of the Employer’s equipment and signs and
protect such equipment and signs from damage, scratches, dents and the like. The
Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any equipment or signs that may have become
damaged during the time that they are in the Contractor’s custody. The Contractor shall
check in and out all equipment utilised for special events and immediately report to the
Employer’s Special Event Coordinator any loss or damage of signs or equipment.
4. When instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall be required to provide or to hire and
deliver to site special equipment or signage. Payment shall be in accordance with the
Method of Measurement.
5. The Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the special event, propose the level of
resources, works plan and equipment list to be used in delivering the requirements to the
Special Event Coordinator for approval. The Contractor shall record all such resources
utilised and his record sheet shall be signed as certified and correct by the Special Event
Coordinator or his representative on the same day and immediately following the special
event.
6. Throughout each special event the Contractor shall maintain an adequate system of watch,
commensurate with the event requirements, of all signage and equipment in accordance
with the contract and any instruction from the Employer.
178AR Emergencies and Civil Emergency
1. The Contractor shall provide any support requested by Haringey Council with regard to any
Emergencies that may impact the Employer’s Highway Network whether or not the
requirements are covered within the Schedule of Rates. Where support does not fall within
Emergency Attendance and is not otherwise covered by the Schedule of Rates it shall be
priced as a variation in accordance with the Contract or at the Engineer’s sole discretion
reimbursed as dayworks.
2. In the event of a major civil emergency affecting the Network, the Contractor may be
required to perform services as specified in the contract, or akin to those specified in the
contract, with minimal notice. Where support provided is not covered by the Schedule of
Rates it shall be priced as a variation in accordance with the Contract or at the Engineer’s
sole discretion reimbursed as dayworks.
3. In handling Emergencies and Civil Emergencies the Contractor shall provide necessary
labour and equipment to site within one hour or other such period as agreed by the
Engineer.
179AR Prime Cost Items
The Employer may from time to time request that the Contractor provide special materials or engage
specialist sub-contractors, consultants, services or technical staff (either directly or through staff
agencies) during the course of delivering the works.
Page 48 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
The Employer may also provide materials for incorporation in the works.
Whether materials are provided by the Employer or purchased from a nominated supplier the
contractor shall collect, unload, stack and store them so as not to cause a hazard to road users.
Where prime cost items are required in the contract the percentage additions included in the
Schedule of Rates shall be applied to cover all associated costs incurred by the Contractor.
180AR Homelessness Reduction Act
The Homelessness Reduction Act 2017 requires local authorities to take reasonable steps to
prevent homelessness. Haringey Council will be utilising the daily on-street presence of its
officers and contractors / suppliers in order to optimise its ability to identify those at risk so
that appropriate early intervention may be undertaken by the Council.
It is a requirement that the Contractor support the Council in this area by making appropriate
staff available to attend any training provided by the Council and establishing a reporting
mechanism with the Council.
Page 49 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 200 SITE CLEARANCE
210AR Abandoned Pedal Cycles
1. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall remove abandoned pedal cycles
from any site in the Contract Area and either store it at the Contractor’s compound or
dispose of it where instructed by the Employer.
2. Care should be taken not to damage the pedal cycle at all stages.
3. The Contractor shall keep records of Abandoned Pedal cycles held in storage and report
the current status to the Employer on a monthly basis.
4. The Contractor shall return pedal cycles to individuals where they have produced
reasonable evidence as to ownership.
Page 50 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 300 FENCING
320AR Replace Fencing
1. Work shall comprise the taking down of parts or sections of existing fencing and the erection
in their place of new parts or sections of fencing following accident damage or long-term
deterioration.
2. Damaged fences, gates and stiles, with posts shall be carefully taken down, elements
replaced as necessary and re-erected in compliance with Clauses 306, 307 and 308 and
standard details and all surplus materials disposed of to tip off site.
3. Replacement shall be carried out using the same type of fencing and post as currently
exists.
4. Where existing posts and concrete are removed and new posts and concrete footings are
installed in the same location, any remaining voids shall be filled with concrete. Surfaces
shall be reinstated to match existing surfaces.
5. New sections of fences, gates, stiles and posts shall be prepared and treated to match
existing in compliance with Clause 312.
6. If any posts, rails or lengths of fencing are removed to facilitate repairs or renewal of existing
fences, the gap in the fencing shall be patrolled or closed with appropriate temporary
fencing in accordance with Clause 303.
Page 51 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 400 ROAD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN)
420AR Replacement of Pedestrian Guardrail
1. Work shall comprise the taking down of parts or sections of existing pedestrian guardrailing
and the erection in their place of new parts or sections of pedestrian guardrailing following
accident damage or long-term deterioration.
2. Damaged pedestrian guardrailing, with posts shall be carefully taken down, elements
replaced as necessary and re-erected in compliance with Clauses 411 and standard details
and all surplus materials disposed of to tip off site.
3. Repairs shall be carried out using the same type of pedestrian guardrailing and the same
type of post as currently exists. All materials shall comply with Clause 411.
4. Where existing posts and concrete are removed and new posts and concrete footings are
installed in the same location, any remaining voids shall be filled with concrete. Surfaces
shall be reinstated to match existing surfaces.
5. New sections of guardrailing and posts shall be prepared and painted to match existing in
accordance with Appendix 19/6.
Page 52 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 500 DRAINAGE AND SERVICE DUCTS
530AR Inspection and Proving of Existing Ducts
1. Cable ducts shall be proved by drawing a wooden or plastic mandrel through as the ducts
are laid. Local ducts from chambers to cabinets shall be proved by drawing through each
completed length of duct a spherical mandrel of a diameter 10% less than the nominal bore
of the duct.
2. On the successful completion of each pull the Contractor shall insert a draw chord if none
is present, protect the ends of the duct to ensure no loose material can cause future
blockage and record the route and availability of the duct on plans provided by the
Employer.
3. Where required excavation shall take place in accordance with Series 600. On completion
of the inspection / proving the site shall be reinstated to match existing surfaces and any
spoil removed from site.
531AR Traffic Signal Pole Retention Sockets
1. Traffic signal pole retention sockets shall be constructed in accordance with Standard
Detail 500-10. Units shall Type A, B, C or D manufactured by:
NAL Limited Weir Lane, Worcester, WR2 4AY.
Phone: 01905 427 100. Fax: 01905 427 030
Email
: xxxxx@xxx.xxx.xx We
b: www.nal.ltd.uk
Or equivalent unit approved by the Employer.
2. Units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Page 53 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 590 SUSTAINABLE DRAINAGE
590AR Sustainable Drainage Specification
The sustainable drainage specification is provided in a separate document titled:
“HARINGEY Framework SuDS Components Specification_v6” May 2018
Page 54 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 700 ROAD PAVEMENTS GENERAL
730AR Delivery Tickets and Weighing
1. The Contractor shall produce for the Employer all weight tickets for material delivered to
and used in the works and shall, if required, supply the Employer with one copy of each
ticket.
2. When so directed, the Contractor shall weigh any part load unused or re-weigh any load
as delivered on a public weighbridge in the presence of the Employer’s representative. Al
costs of such weighing shall be borne by the Contractor unless a re-weighing agrees with
the weight stated on the delivery ticket, in which case the costs of re-weighing shall be
borne by the Employer.
731AR End Performance in Relation to HAPAS Approved and Other Proprietary
Materials and Systems
1. On receiving notification of works involving the use of HAPAS Approved or other proprietary
materials or systems, the Contractor shall visit the site, satisfy himself as to the current
surface condition and assess it for introduction of a thin or high friction surface system.
Thereafter, the Contractor shall establish the most appropriate system and materials for
the site, subject to compliance with the Employer’s overall requirements.
2. Before commencing works on a site, the Contractor shall provide the Employer with a
written undertaking that the selected surface treatment is the best suited to the conditions
of the site. In the event that the Employer determines that works at any particular site have
not fully met with the end performance requirements of the various material clauses, it will
not be acceptable for the Contractor to rely on the inadequacy of the chosen surface
treatment system to avoid remedial works.
3. Remedial works shall be carried out to areas of surface treatment which fail to comply with
the specification end performance requirements. Such works shall be undertaken wholly at
the Contractor’s expense, within 28 days of notification of the defect by the Employer in
writing. In the event of any remedial work not being successful in achieving compliance
with the specification, the Employer may require the Contractor to undertake further
remedial works, at the Contractor’s expense. Ultimately, where remedial action is
inappropriate or unsuccessful, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Employer the full
cost paid to him for works at the failed site or sites.
Page 55 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 800 ROAD PAVEMENTS - UNBOUND, CEMENT AND OTHER HYDRAULICALLY
BOUND MIXTURES
808AR Frost Protection for Cement Treated Pavements
1. Where there is a danger of frost affecting the materials used in any cement treated
Pavement course, the Contractor shall, in addition to curing, protect the material by
covering it with a 150 mm layer of dry straw or other insulating material held firmly in position
with waterproof sheeting.
Page 56 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 900 ROAD PAVEMENTS – BITUMINOUS BOUND MATERIALS
960AR Resin Bonded Coloured Surface Treatment
1. Proprietary resin bonded coloured surface treatment shall comply generally with the
requirements of Clause 924 (High Friction Surfaces) except that the maximum aggregate
size and grading shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the
polished stone value (PSV), aggregate type and finished colour shall comply with the
requirements of this Clause.
2. Any existing High Friction Surfacing shall be removed by grinding or other method
approved by the Employer before application.
3. The material shall be machine laid, unless otherwise authorised by the Employer for small
areas.
4. Areas to receive resin bonded coloured surface treatment will be shown on site specific
drawings but are typically bus lanes, cycle advance stop reservoirs, cycle lanes, cycle
tracks, toucan crossings and pedestrian crossings. The individual requirements for these
areas are as follows:
i) For bus lanes, where high skid resistant surface treatment has not been specified
for the adjacent section of carriageway:
Minimum PSV: 55
Aggregate Type Chinese Bauxite
Finished Colour: Natural Red
or Harden Red Granite where instructed by the Employer.
ii) For cycle tracks and cycle lanes not forming part of the adjacent traffic lane, where
there is no requirement for high skid resistant treatment of the adjacent
carriageway surface, the requirements are as for (iii) above, except that the
minimum PSV shall be 55 and the aggregate type may be proposed by the
manufacturer.
iii) For cycle tracks and cycle lanes which are shared and form part of the adjacent
traffic lane, the minimum PSV shall be determined by the minimum PSV required
on the adjacent traffic lane, as defined by the Skid Resistance Policy of the
Employer, or in lieu of an organisation specific policy, the requirements contained
within HD 36/06. The aggregate type may be proposed by the manufacturer.
5. For each different coloured surface treatment, a sample shall be submitted to the Employer
for approval not less than 14 days prior to work commencing on site.
961AR Stress Absorbing Membrane Interlayer (SAMI)
1. Stress absorbing membrane interlayers help to prevent cracks or joints in pavement sub-
layers propagating into new surfacing layers. Typically, interlayers shall be open aperture
Page 57 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
type for use on level smooth surfaces or composite type for use on milled or uneven
surfaces.
2. The strength of SAMI to be used will be selected by the Employer for individual projects
from the following:
Type 1: Tensile Strength (MD/CD) 50/50 kN/m
Type 2: Tensile Strength (MD/CD) 100/100 kN/m
Type 3: Tensile Strength (MD/CD) 100/200
3. Stress absorbing membrane interlayers shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and the Road Surfacing Treatment Association Code of
Practice unless otherwise instructed by the Employer. They shall be laid in strips not less
than 1.5 metres wide over individual joints and cracks or, where these are widespread,
laid to cover a total area. Composite types used on milled or uneven surfaces shall be
installed using a calibrated sprayer applying 160/220 pen bitumen at 0.9 to 1.1 kg/m2.
962AR Ironwork and Drainage
1. During resurfacing works any failed or misaligned ironworks on manholes or drainage
gullies shall be repaired, reset and re-levelled in conjunction with works. The mortar used
shall be a rapid set material (complying with Appendix 5/1) to ensure the repair can
withstand, and is not damaged by, construction traffic and regular traffic when the road is
reopened to traffic.
2. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure that all surface water from
the highway can freely flow to all road gullies during the works.
963AR Traffic Calming Features
1. Traffic calming shall be provided in accordance with Standard Details
700-1 – Bituminous sinusoidal Road Hump
700-2 – Road Cushions
700-4 – Bituminous sinusoidal Speed Table
700-5 – Block Paving Speed Table
700-6 – Granite Sett Speed Table
2. The specification for entire traffic calming features shall be equivalent to the specification
had the features been constructed as individual components.
Page 58 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Series 1100 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS
1120AR Granite Kerbs, Channels and Quadrants
1. Granite kerbs, channels and quadrants shall be in accordance with the requirements of
BS EN 1343:2001. The dimensions and finish, generally fine picked, shall be as
instructed by the Employer.
2. Granite kerbs, channels and quadrants shall be reused when instructed, and
supplemented by recycled components from a source approved by the Employer. They
shall be unbroken and undamaged and shall be cleaned on all faces, back to parent
stone, before being relayed.
3. Granite kerbs, channels and quadrants shall be laid and bedded in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 1101 and Appendix 11/1.
1122AR Safety Kerbs
1. Safety kerbs shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1340 - 2003. (with
the exception of determining the compressive strength). Mean concrete compressive
strength tested in accordance with BS EN 12390 – 2. Target strength ≥ 50N/mm2.
2. Safety kerbs shall be laid and bedded in accordance with the requirements of Clause
1101 and Appendix 11/1.
1123AR Granite Setts
1. Second-hand setts may be used provided that they are undamaged and cleaned on all
faces, back to parent stone, before being re-laid.
2. New and reused Granite setts shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
1342:2001. The dimensions and finish shall be as instructed by the Employer.
3. The Contractor will not be entitled to any payment in respect of setts that are broken or
damaged in lifting or relaying except where it can be demonstrated that such damage
was unavoidable.
4. The sub-grade shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of Clause 616.
5. The base shall consist of one of the materials complying with Clauses 803, 804 or 805
laid and compacted to Clause 802 and to the thickness as instructed by the Employer.
6. Granite setts shall be laid on either:
• a full ‘wet’ workable mix mortar bed (1:3 cement/sand). The mortar bedding should
be laid to give a thickness between 25mm and 50mm; however some adjustment
may be necessary to ensure that the units are fully supported and do not rock or
move; or where instructed by the Employer
Page 59 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• an epoxy mortar such as Ultracrete Envirobed or equivalent approved by the
Employer to a thickness of 30mm; or where instructed by the Employer
• an ST4 wet lean concrete bed to a thickness of 100mm
7. Setts shall be laid in parallel courses with the longest edge dimension approximately at
right angles to the direction of vehicular traffic and to the required crossfalls identified in
the design.
8. Adjacent setts shall be selected and laid with due regard to tolerances so that the
surface joints do not exceed 15 mm.
9. Any sett with a pronounced taper shall be laid on its larger face dimension.
10. After laying, the setts shall be rammed down to a firm seating in the bedding, and to give
a level surface. Vibro-laying techniques may be used.
11. Joints shall be filled and pointed using a 1:3 mortar, with a 5 mm depression or where
instructed by the Employer Azpects EasyJoint or equivalent grout approved by the
Employer.
12. Granite sett paving shall not be trafficked for 3 days after joint filling or 7 days after laying
concrete slab beneath, unless an epoxy bed and grout have been used to permit earlier
opening.
1124AR Cutting and Finishing Paving (All Types)
1. All paving shall include for cutting to radius corners, irregular frontage lines, lamp posts,
trees, boxes, etc., and for 65 mm, 70 mm or 80 mm thick mortar fillet, depending on the
thickness of the paving. Mortar fillets to Clause 2404 designation (i), not exceeding 50mm
width, shall be provided at the back of the footpath, around lamp posts, boxes, around the
bases of poles, street furniture, etc. The colour of mortar shall match the block or paving
colour.
1125AR Tree Pits and Resin Bonded Tree Pit Surfacing
1. Tree Pits shall be provided in accordance with Standard Detail 1100-11 – Tree Pit & Edging
Detail
• Pit Type A– Aluminium Edge restraint (4x100mm AE100M AluExcel or
equivalent approved by the Employer) and resin bound porous surround
(50mm thick Ronadec System or equivalent approved by the Employer)
• Pit Type B– No edge detail and top soil surface
• Pit Type C– 50x100mm PC Concrete Edging and top soil surface.
2. The specification for tree pit installations shall be equivalent to the specification had the
features been constructed as individual components.
Page 60 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1126AR Traffic Islands
1. Traffic islands shall be provided in accordance with Standard Detail 1100-10 – Typical
Island and Tactile Paving
• Island Type 1A – Block / Block / Tactile
• Island Type 1B – Block / Block / Bitmac
• Island Type 2A – Bitmac / Bitmac / Tactile
• Island Type 2B – Bitmac / Bitmac / Bitmac
2. The specification for traffic and staggered refuge islands shall be equivalent to the
specification had the elements been constructed as individual components.
1127AR Footway Crossovers
1. Footway Crossovers shall be provided in accordance with Standard Details
1100-06 – Standard Detail Footway Vehicle Crossover
1100-07 – Standard Detail Footway Vehicle Crossover 2
1100-08 – Standard Detail Footway Vehicle Crossover 3
2. The specification for footway crossovers shall be equivalent to the specification had the
elements been constructed as individual components.
Page 61 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 1300 ROAD LIGHTING COLUMNS, BRACKETS & WALL MOUNTINGS
1320AR Vertical Re-Alignment of Lighting Unit Columns and Traffic Sign Posts
1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary qualified labour, specialist equipment and
materials necessary to realign columns and posts.
2. The Contractor shall disconnect and take all precautions necessary to ensure safety and
prevent damage to the electrical supply.
3. Columns and posts shall be replumbed in a manner that will restore their foundations to a
condition compatible with that for a new column/post of an equivalent type. Before
commencing works the Contractor shall supply the Employer with a method statement
identifying how the column / post will be replumbed in a manner to achieve such
performance.
4. The Contractor shall carefully excavate by hand in any material around the column/post
down below the cable entry slot to the existing concrete foundation taking extreme caution
not to damage the electricity supply cable or any other cables. Should the excavation reveal
any damage to the electricity supply, or any other cables which would make the
column/post unsafe after realignment, the Contractor shall report the need for replacement
to the Employer before proceeding.
5. The excavation shall be kept free from water and loose materials while the column/post is
being restored to the vertical and prior to backfilling.
6. Once the column/post has been restored to vertical, it shall be supported until backfilling
and compaction have been completed.
7. The Contractor shall backfill and compact the excavation ensuring that any void between
the existing concrete foundation and the surrounding ground has also been filled and
compacted.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good any damage to the column/post or its
protective system caused by the Contractor during this operation.
1321AR Lighting Column Retention Sockets
1. Lighting column retention sockets may be used for lighting columns or items of street
furniture.
2. Lighting column retention sockets shall be constructed in accordance with Standard Detail
1300-08. Units shall Type Standard Type A, B, C or D or Shallow Type A, B, C or D
manufactured by:
NAL Limited Weir Lane, Worcester, WR2 4AY.
Phone: 01905 427 100. Fax: 01905 427 030
Email
: xxxxx@xxx.xxx.xx We
b: www.nal.ltd.uk
Page 62 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Or equivalent unit approved by the Employer.
3. Units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Page 63 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 1400 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR ROAD LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNS
1430AR Requirements for Lump Sum Electrical Works 1. The Schedule of Rates includes annual lump sum rates covering:
• Night Scouting (Clause 1432AR)
• Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance (Clause 1433AR)
• Cyclic Inspection and Testing (Clause 1434AR)
• Reactive Fault Repair (Clause 1435AR)
1431AR Lighting Unit Performance Requirements
1. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) shall be measured within the system defined in Clause
152AR and Appendix 1/40.
1432AR Scope of Night Scouting (Lump Sum)
1. Night scouting shall comprise drive by or walked scouting where driving will not allow all
faults to be detected. The frequency of scouting is to be such that each lighting unit
recorded in the inventory is inspected a minimum of once every two weeks.
2. Confirm Mobile shall be used to record night scout inspections and provide a history of
when each street/site is done and when next due.
3. Any lighting unit operating during day light hours is deemed to be faulty and shall be treated
in a similar manner to faults identified through night inspections.
4. The inventory for the purpose of night scouting shall be the live inventory held in Confirm.
5. The Contractor shall prepare their night scouting plan/programme during the mobilisation
period and submit it to the Employer for approval at least four weeks before the contract
commencement date. Any subsequent changes to the plan/programme shall not be
implemented until agreed by the Employer. In subsequent years the plan / programme shall
be updated and submitted to the Employer for approval at least four weeks before the
anniversary of the contract commencement date.
6. The Employer reserves the right to witness night scouting activity and the Contractor shall
assist in this regard by accommodating Employer’s representatives during the activity.
1433AR Scope of Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance (Lump Sum)
1. Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance shall include the following sub activities:
Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance (3 Year Cycle)
Page 64 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
a) For all lighting units - thorough cleaning of all luminaires, photo-electric control units,
all external surfaces, all internal surfaces, and any other components affecting the
optical performance of the luminaire. The cleaning methods and materials shall be in
accordance with clause 1444AR.
b) For all lighting units - thorough cleaning of all electrical compartments including
columns, sign posts, illuminated bollards, vehicle actuated signs and feeder pillars.
c) For all lighting units - degreasing, lubrication and operation of all toggles, wing nuts,
hinges, door locks and any raising and lowering gear (including locking studs).
d) For all lighting units - removal of all debris and undergrowth from 300mm radius of
column, sign or feeder pillar base or foundation.
e) Disposal of all waste arising from cleaning and cyclic routine maintenance to a
suitably licensed facility.
Cleaning and Cyclic Routine Maintenance (1 Year Cycle)
f) For all internally and externally illuminated sign units - external cleaning
g) For all illuminated bollards - external cleaning
h) For all solar and retro-reflective bollards and school flashing units - external cleaning.
2. The Contractor shall supply all necessary qualified labour, specialist equipment and
materials necessary to undertake cleaning and routine maintenance.
3. The inventory for the purpose of cleaning and routine maintenance shall be the live
inventory held in Confirm.
4. Asset maintenance data shall be entered into the CONFIRM system in realtime or within 3
working days.
5. The Contractor shall prepare their cleaning and routine maintenance plan/programme
during the mobilisation period and submit it to the Employer for approval at least four weeks
before the contract commencement date. Any subsequent changes to the plan/programme
shall not be implemented until agreed by the Employer. In subsequent years the plan /
programme shall be updated and submitted to the Employer for approval at least four
weeks before the anniversary of the contract commencement date.
6. The Employer reserves the right to witness cleaning and routine maintenance activity and
the Contractor shall assist in this regard by accommodating Employer’s representatives
during the activity.
1434AR Scope of Cyclic Inspection and Testing (Lump Sum)
1. Cyclic Inspection and testing includes the following sub activities:
Cyclic Inspection and Testing (3 Year Cycle unless indicated otherwise)
a) Visual electrical inspection (clause 1445AR), a visual inspection shall be carried out
by the Contractor, as detailed in the 17th Edition of the I.E.T Wiring Regulations
(BS7671). The Contractor shall allow for providing access to and the opening of all
equipment for inspection. The visual inspection shall be made to verify that the
Page 65 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
electrical equipment is not visibly damaged so as to impair safety, is correctly selected
and erected in accordance with the I.E.T Regulations and complies with the
appropriate British Standard.
b) Visual checking of all sign face fixings.
c) Checking of all conduits for any corrosion and other defects and reporting to the
Employer.
d) Visual structural inspection of lighting units (clause 1445AR).
e) Detailed electrical testing in accordance with clause 1446AR (6-year cycle).
Structural testing is not included within cyclic inspection and testing (Lump Sum). Structural
testing will be ordered under the contract where required by the Employer (Clause
1447AR).
2. The Contractor shall supply all necessary qualified labour, specialist equipment and
materials necessary to undertake cyclic inspection and testing.
3. The inventory for the purpose of cyclic inspection and testing shall be the live inventory
held in Confirm.
4. Asset inspection / testing data shall be entered into the CONFIRM system in realtime or
within 3 working days.
5. The Contractor shall prepare their cyclic inspection and testing plan/programme during the
mobilisation period and submit it to the Employer for approval at least four weeks before
the contract commencement date. Any subsequent changes to the plan/programme shall
not be implemented until agreed by the Employer. In subsequent years the plan /
programme shall be updated and submitted to the Employer for approval at least four
weeks before the anniversary of the contract commencement date.
6. The Employer reserves the right to witness cyclic inspection and testing activity and the
Contractor shall assist in this regard by accommodating Employer’s representatives during
the activity.
1435AR Scope of Reactive Fault Repair (Lump Sum) 1. The scope of reactive fault repair to lighting units, shall include the repair of all faults in
lighting units including but not limited to the following:-
(i)
Replacement of failed, malfunctioning or inefficient lamps (all new lamps to be
indelibly marked with date of installation);
(ii)
Repair or replacement of all electrical components (including but not limited to
ballasts, capacitors, electronic control gear, electronic driver, ignitor, fuse blocks,
etc.) in lighting units including checking and repair if necessary of photocell or time
switch for correct operation;
(iii) Realignment of lit sign faces or bollards misaligned with respect to the
carriageway;
(iv) Repin, rebolt or otherwise refix any illuminated bollard shell or non-illuminated unit,
including replacement of fittings;
Page 66 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(v) Securing doors on lighting units including installing, removing and replacing
temporary banding where required;
(vi) Repair or replacement of damaged or missing locking studs for raise & lower
columns;
(vii) Provision, maintenance and removal of Hazard Safety Bollard;
(viii) Removal of unauthorised signs and attachments;
(ix) Reactive cleaning of lighting units;
(x) Any fault associated with the failure of cleaning or cyclic routine maintenance
activity;
(xi) Emergency Attendance necessary due to the failure of cleaning or cyclic routine
maintenance activity or any other works undertaken by the Contractor;
(xii) Detection and reporting to the Employer underground cable faults (repair of which
will be measured outside lump sum), costs associated with repairs to the private
cable network do not fall within the scope of this lump sum however all
investigatory work to identify and locate such faults does. The Contractor identifies
the location and the nature of the fault and the Employer then uses this information
to decide on the most appropriate course of action;
(xiii) Liaison with DNOs to facilitate early restoration of failed services (works orders
placed with DNOs direct by the Employer and details copied to Contractor);
(xiv) Disposal of all waste arising from fault repair to suitably licensed facilities.
but excluding the following which shall be re-measured:
• Replacement of damaged lighting units including columns, posts, signs, luminaires
and bollards, where agreed by the Employer;
• Structural realignment of lighting units, where structural realignment shall mean
realignment requiring below ground foundation works, where agreed by the
Employer.
• Replacement of permanent doors, where agreed by the Employer.
2. The Contractor shall supply all necessary qualified labour, specialist equipment and
materials necessary to undertake fault repairs within specified response times, identified in
Clause 1436AR.
3. The inventory for the purpose of fault repair shall be the live inventory held in Confirm.
4. Fault repair data shall be entered into the CONFIRM system in realtime or within 3 working
days.
5. The Contractor shall during the mobilisation period prepare a method statement
demonstrating how they will manage, undertake and complete fault repairs during specified
response periods and submit it to the Employer for approval at least four weeks before the
contract commencement date. Any subsequent changes to the method statement shall not
be implemented until agreed by the Employer.
6. The Employer reserves the right to witness fault repair activity and the Contractor shall
assist in this regard by accommodating Employer’s representatives during the activity.
Page 67 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1436AR Response Times for Completion of Lighting Unit Fault Repairs
1. All faults in lighting units shall be repaired within 3 working days of their being identified by
or notified to the Contractor.
2. Where the fault is associated with an underground cable fault the Contractor shall identify
this and send a report of investigations carried out and findings to the Employer via Confirm
(or such other media as agreed). Where the Contractor has complied with these
requirements within 3 days the clock will stop for the purposes of repair of that fault.
1437AR Street Lighting, Illuminated Sign Inventory and Records 1. The Contractor shall note the requirements of clause 145AR with regard to general use of
the Employer’s CONFIRM asset management system.
2. The Contractor is also required to use the CONFIRM system to record all changes arising
from commissioning, maintenance or de-commsioning against lighting unit assets.
CONFIRM holds the entire inventory of street lighting and illuminated assets. A summary
of the street lighting and illuminated sign inventory is provided in Appendix 14/8. The actual
inventory is held on CONFIRM and will be made available to the Contractor during the
mobilisation period.
3. During the mobilisation period the Contractor shall review the inventory summarised at
Appendix 14/8 and bring to the Employer’s attention any items that should be deleted,
amended or added. At least 2 weeks before the contract commencement date a year one
annual inventory shall be agreed by the Contractor and Employer.
4. For subsequent years the annual inventory shall be agreed no later than 2 weeks before
the anniversary of the contract commencement date.
5. The mechanism for amending the lump sum payment to account for changes in the annual
inventory is described in the Preamble to the Method of Measurement.
6. Increases or decreases to the inventory during the course of the year shall not affect
payments due.
7. For the purposes of measuring performance, the Street Lighting and Illuminated Sign
Inventory shall be the real time inventory recorded in the Inventory Management System.
8. For lump sums in relation to night scouting, cleaning and cyclic maintenance and cyclic
inspections and testing the agreed annual inventory established as above will be used for
payment purposes. It will be reviewed annually on the anniversary of the contract’s
commencement.
9. Details of records to be held in the Employer’s Lighting Unit Asset Management System
and the Contractors specific duties and responsibilities in that regard are provided in
Appendix 14/9.
Page 68 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1438AR Emergency Attendance to Lighting Units
1. Emergency attendance for lighting units shall comply with Clause 144AR.
2. Typical works for which emergency attendance to lighting units may be ordered includes
but is not limited to the following:
a) Making safe damaged illuminated bollard, including re-pinning shells.
b) Making safe exposed electrical connections e.g. accident or vandalism
c) Bracket, bowl and/or luminaire hanging and unsafe
d) Door off or missing and or reports of electrical shock from lighting units and
control/feeder pillars.
e) Securing doors on lighting units (including temporary banding and materials to replace
missing doors) to faulty doors and locks (door replacement not included in lump sum)
f) Instances where the Contractor has failed to effect a permanent repair to a previously
notified fault and the Employer considers that the fault needs to be rectified
immediately.
g) Removal of unauthorised signs and attachments which present a safety hazard.
h) Erection, maintenance and removal on completion of Hazard Safety Bollards.
i) Identify any DNO faults and send to the Employer via Confirm, the clock will stop at
this point unless full details are not provided.
3. Emergency Attendance shall be ordered by the Employer to assist in resolving problems
arising out of accidents, vandalism and other un-forseen incidents. Failure by the Employer
to order Emergency Attendance does not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to inspect
and resolve faults in the timescales defined in clause 1436AR.
1439AR – Hazard Safety Bollards
1. All excavations containing electrical equipment that cannot be backfilled or other exposed
electrical equipment shall be protected by a Hazard Safety Bollard which shall comply with
the following:
a) height not less than 1000mm;
b) base size not less than 600mm x 600mm;
c) weight when ballasted not less than 17.0kg;
d) information panel with the Contractor’s name and emergency contact telephone number
(unless provided on other signage associated with the works); and
e) all lettering black on yellow.
2. The light attached to the bollard shall be as follows:
a) a battery-powered amber flashing light fitted to the top of the bollard;
b) visible from all sides and shall achieve a minimum luminous intensity of 1.5cd within ±
5°vertical and ± 10° horizontal of the principal axis;
c) in compliance with BS EN 12352 Traffic Control Equipment – Warning and Safety Light
Devices;
d) adequately maintained to the satisfaction of the Employer.
Page 69 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
3. Hazard Safety Bollard shall be placed to protect exposed conductors or dangerous
equipment in the following situations:
a) missing or damaged illuminated bollard;
b) removed, cut down or damaged beacon post;
c) removed, cut down or damaged lighting column; or
d) removed, cut down or damaged sign post.
4. The Contractor shall inspect Hazard Safety Bollards no less frequently than every 24 hours,
ensuring all electrical equipment remains protected, and shall provide to the Employer a
weekly log of such inspections.
5. Hazard Safety Bollards shall be removed as soon as possible by undertaking a permanent
repair.
1440AR Procedures for Isolation, Energising and Making Safe of Existing Power
Supplies and Cables
1. Isolation, energising and making safe works shall be carried out in accordance with the
Energy Networks Association Employering Recommendation G39/1 and a recognised
Permit to Work system to ensure compliance with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989.
See also HSE Guidance HSG85 “Electricity at Work – Safe Working Practices and the
Institution of Lighting Professional’s Code of Practice for Electrical Safety in Highway
Electrical Operations.
2. Electrical Equipment for Lighting Units is as described in sub-Clause 1401.2(iv). Any
person authorised to undertake the isolation, energising and/or making safe of electrical
power supplies and cables shall therefore be able to demonstrate competency to the
appropriate Category as required by (Appendix B of) the Energy Networks Association
Employering Recommendation G39/1.
3. For isolation, energising and making safe of private power supplies and cables the following
shall apply:
a) Isolation or making safe shall require no authorisation from the Employer for Emergency
and Performance Activity or Cyclic Maintenance Activity works.
b) A record of all private cables the Contractor proposes to isolate, energise and/or make
safe shall be completed on a daily basis by the Contractor.
c) The name of the Operative responsible for isolation shall be displayed on the switchgear
in the feeder pillar/supply position on a clear weatherproof notice board. Where more than
one person requires a cable isolated or energised, each person involved shall display a
notice. On completion of testing or works the sign(s) shall be removed.
d) When Cyclic or other Maintenance Operations are undertaken, the number of feeder
pillars de-energised at any one time shall be kept to a minimum.
e) Isolation shall include the disconnection from the incoming electricity supply of all live
conductors (including the neutral conductors).
4. For isolation, energising and making safe of Electricity Authority/Distribution Network
Operator (DNO) power supplies the following shall apply:
Page 70 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
a) Where supplies to the Employer’s own equipment are to be isolated by means of a
secondary isolator above the Electricity Authority/DNO’s cut-out, only competent persons
in accordance with the Energy Networks Association Employering Recommendation G39/1
may isolate the supply.
b) Where there is no means of secondary isolation, and so supplies to the Employer’s own
equipment requires removal of the Electricity Authority/DNO’s cut-out to isolate the supply,
the Employer shall be informed and the Contractor shall then liaise with the appropriate
Electricity Authority/DNO before any work commences.
c) A temporary shroud shall be inserted as soon as the fuse carrier is removed. The
temporary shroud shall then be removed prior to reinsertion of the fuse carrier.
5. Before vacating site the Contractor shall ensure all exposed cables, cut-outs and all other
equipment is rendered safe are suitably protected and so present no hazard or danger.
6. Where works are proceeding on any cable distribution systems, but for whatever reason
need to be temporarily halted, the associated circuits must first be made safe by causing
the conductors to be rendered dead by isolating at all appropriate points and, where
practicable, the means of isolation shall be locked to avoid any circuits inadvertently being
made live.
7. All works shall be guarded by means of appropriate barriers. Warning notices shall be
displayed and, where necessary, the works shall be illuminated, all as required by the New
Roads and Street Works Act 1991.
1441AR Replacement of Lighting Unit Components
1. The Contractor shall ensure the suitability, correctness and compatibility of all equipment
to be installed in lighting units. During the Contract mobilisation period, the Contractor shall
provide the Employer with details of the proposed equipment to be utilised.
2. The requirements for cut-outs, fuse holders, fuses and miniature circuit breakers (MCBs)
for electrical equipment for lighting units shall be as stipulated in Appendix 14/4 and 14/5.
3. The requirements for base compartment fixing arrangements for electrical equipment for
lighting units shall be as stipulated in Appendix 14/4 and 14/5.
4. The requirements for wiring for electrical equipment for lighting units shall be as stipulated
in Appendix 14/4 and 14/5.
5. Where the Contractor attends to a faulty lighting unit he shall ensure that the replacement
component is compatible.
6. The Contractor shall install the replacement component in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions ensuring that the fixing bolts are mechanically tight and greased
and the agreed vertical and horizontal alignment are correctly orientated towards the road.
7. The Contractor shall ensure that the lamp, reflectors, refractors and bowl are clean and
free from obscuring film after installation and that the lamp is correctly positioned.
Page 71 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
8. After testing and commissioning the new component, the Contractor shall check that the
bowl/door has seated uniformly on the gasket seal and that the toggle catches are secure,
so the whole of the unit is dust and weatherproof.
1442AR Lamp Replacement Procedures
1. All new lamps shall be indelibly marked with the date of installation. The date shall be
annotated ‘**/**/**’ with the first double digit referring to the day of the month, the second
double digit referring to the month, and the third double digit referring to the year.
2. Lamps replaced during Cyclic Activities that have burnt less than 2000 hours may be used
for replacement purposes during other maintenance operations, clearly dated again as
detailed in sub-Clause 1 above.
3. Lamp disposal shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 1443AR.
4. The Lamp Replacement Procedures for other light source types (e.g. LEDs) shall be as in
agreement with the Employer.
1443AR Lamp Disposal/Recycling
1. Wherever practicable, the Contractor shall recycle lamps rather than dispose of them.
2. For all aspects of Lamp Disposal/Recycling, the Contractor shall comply with the Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive). In addition, the Contractor
shall comply with the following legislation during the Lamp Disposal/Recycling process:
a) Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974;
b) COSHH Regulations 1991;
c) Environmental Protection Act 1990 (Section 34 Duty of Care Regulations);
d) Directive 76/464/EEC and statutory instruments issued under the Water Act 1989
provisions relating to the discharge of substances to waterways; and
e) Control of Pollution (Amendment) Act 1989.
3. The Contractor shall carry all necessary certificates of authorisation necessary to undertake
Lamp Disposal/Recycling or, where this activity is undertaken by a Subcontractor, then the
Subcontractor shall carry all necessary certificates to the satisfaction of the Employer.
4. The Contractor shall supply, for acceptance of the Employer, completed Transfer Notes
detailing the movement of waste material as detailed in and as required by the
Environmental Protection Act 1990.
1444AR Cleaning Method and Materials for Lighting Units
1. Abrasive tools or cleaners shall not be used for sign faces. The cleaning of all lighting
units shall be carried out using soft bristled brushes, cloths or mops, hoses, clean water
Page 72 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
and antistatic water based cleaning solution/degreaser. All should be in compliance with
the following requirements:-
a) The cleaning solution shall be non-toxic and cause no handling dangers to personnel;
b) The cleaning solution shall cause no harmful effects to the range of materials and
surfaces to be cleaned;
c) The cleaning solution shall be highly effective against greasy surface deposits, fast
acting and suitable for use in cold water, in hard or soft water areas;
d) The cleaning solution shall not give rise to smearing and it shall not be necessary to
carry out rinsing with clean cold water after cleaning;
e) The cleaning solution shall not cause persistent foaming in use and shall not promote
the formation of static charges on the equipment surfaces;
f) The cleaner/degreaser solution shall be diluted with clean uncontaminated water in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall be applied by means of soft
muslin cloths.
2. The cleaning cloths etc shall be continually cleaned or changed to ensure that no
scouring or abrasive action damages the surfaces of the optical components.
3. Any special cleaning measures required for removal of tar, oil, bituminous material, pollen
or fungus, paint, crayon and the like shall be agreed by the Employer.
4. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the dangers which may arise from the
dropping of quantities of water or solution onto vehicles or other highway users passing
below or adjacent to the cleaning vehicle. All cleaning cloths to be used shall be dipped in
the cleaning solution and wrung out from containers on the vehicle chassis before
cleaning commences.
5. After the use of the cleaning solution, all surfaces treated shall be wiped with a clean dry
cloth and left reasonably dry.
1445AR Visual Inspection of Lighting Units
1. During reactive and cyclic routine maintenance both structural and electrical visual
inspections are required.
2. The purpose of visual inspections, checks and the like is to identify imminent hazards
arising out of the lighting unit’s condition and to identify the need for future maintenance
works. Operatives undertaking inspections shall be trained and competent to carry out
visual inspections and recognise any potential hazards.
3. Visual inspections or checks to lighting units shall, so far as is reasonably practicable,
verify that the health and safety of persons, animals and property is not endangered.
Where a problem is considered as dangerous, the item of equipment should be repaired
immediately or taken out of service by removing the main fuse from the supply
termination until the fault has been rectified. Under no circumstances should an
electrically dangerous item of equipment be left in operation.
Page 73 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
4. Following visual inspections (either Structural or Electrical) the visual condition of lighting
units shall be noted in an inspection report (consistent with any statutory requirements e.g
17th of the I.E.T Wiring Regulations (BS7671), which is loaded into the CONFIRM
inventory management system (other as otherwise instructed by the Employer). Any
particular items that cause concern shall be brought to the Employer’s attention within 24
hours, unless the level of risk means it should be sooner.
1446AR Electrical Testing of Lighting Units
1. The following tests shall be carried out on all lighting units and associated highway
distribution systems (every six years):
- Visual inspection.
- Continuity of protective conductors.
- Polarity.
- Earth loop fault impedance.
- Insulation resistance.
- Operation of devices for isolation and switching.
- Operation of residual current device.
- Operation of circuit breakers.
- Operation of time clocks
- Earth electrode resistance (where applicable).
- Voltage / voltage drop.
2. A record should be made of any departure from the regulations.
3. Electrical testing shall only be carried out by a competent person with sufficient training
and experience to interpret the test results and identify any inherent problem within the
installation.
4. All test equipment should be suitable for the test intended, correctly calibrated and
regularly certified.
5. The results of periodic electrical testing must be recorded on a test certificate, which is
loaded into the CONFIRM inventory management system (other as otherwise instructed
by the Employer).
1447AR Structural Testing of Lighting Units
1. The Contractor shall, in accordance with the contract, undertake structural inspection /
testing of Haringey’s Road Lighting Columns.
2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times safe and sufficient pedestrian and
vehicular access to all properties in the vicinity of and adjacent to any Works.
3. The Contractor when inspecting / testing shall at all times be under an obligation to
minimise the effects of his operations on traffic. He shall in general seek to keep as short
as possible operations within or restricting the highway, and shall seek to carry out such
Page 74 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
operations at times chosen so as to minimise disruption to traffic flows. He shall so
arrange the transport of plant and materials such that any additional traffic which arises
shall be limited as far as is reasonably possible. The Service Provider shall cause no
avoidable congestion or nuisance to the highway or neighbouring property.
4. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure parked vehicles or other obstructions
do not affect inspection / testing and no payment (or abortive costs) will be made in
respect of inspection / testing which is not achievable due to parked vehicles or other
obstructions.
5. All testing must be undertaken by a testing organisation to the UKAS (United Kingdom
Accreditation Service) accredited for structural testing of lighting columns.
6. Haringey Council manage their street lighting assets through a CONFIRM system. All
reports produced by the Contractor shall be loaded electronically into the CONFIRM
system.
7. Haringey Council require testing to comprise the following components:
8. When testing a full visual survey shall be carried out to all the above ground test areas.
An at ground full visual survey that aligns with The Institute of Lighting Professionals
Technical Report 22 – Managing a Vital Asset: Lighting Supports – APENDIX B –
Guidance for the assessment of the condition of street lighting supports shall be
completed.
In addition testing as deemed necessary to assess the structural integrity of the columns
should be undertaken. This should include:
Test 1: Ultrasonic (Base area, below door area, top door area, swaged area)
Test 2: Eddy current (below ground testing) Below ground testing must be full depth of
the
Test 3: Magnetic Particle test - Only required if column as square cut corners, or heavy
internal corrosion.
And/or other tests deemed necessary to comply with The Institute of Lighting Professionals
Technical Report 22 – Managing a Vital Asset: Lighting Supports – APENDIX B – Guidance
for the assessment of the condition of street lighting supports.
1448AR Festive Lighting and Permanent Tree Lighting
1. Each year festive lighting is erected, maintained and removed at more than 200 sites
across the borough. In addition, the borough has trees in which permanent lighting is
installed.
2. All works shall be undertaken in accordance with the 17th Edition of the I.E.T Wiring
Regulations (BS7671) and have appropriate regard to the health and safety implications
of working at height.
Page 75 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
3. The Contractor may be required to
• collect from the Employer and erect lighting units using established connection points
• install new connection points
• provide / repair or replace supply cables
• undertake electrical teasting including PAT testing and certification
• test structural adequacy of supporting infrastructure on buildings and columns
• night scout and maintain festive lighting units
• take down and return to the Employer lighting units
• repairs to lighting units and their supporting infrastructure
• supply a qualified electrician to attend switch on events (out of hours)
• label, store and manage festive lighting units
• check and test time clock operation
Installation of Festive Lighting
4. The contractor shall before fixing any temporary installations check that means of support
are satisfactory and refer any issues to the Employer.
5. The Contractor on installing any temporary installations shall carry out electrical testing
and provide to the Employer certification that the installation complies with the 17th Edition
of the I.E.T Wiring Regulations (BS7671).
6. The Contractor on installing shall set-up and programme electronic clocks
Storage of Festive Lighting
7. The Contractor shall supply a suitably secure 40 ft container at the Contractor’s Depot or
other secure location agreed by the Employer.
8. The Contractor shall collect festive lighting from its current store and transport it to their
new store.
9. The Contractor shall label and manage stock as necessary to ensure accurate distribution
of equipment when required.
10. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer as regards any costs arising out of theft or
other loss or damage to Festive Lighting.
Page 76 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SUBSTITUTE CLAUSES, TABLES & FIGURES
SERIES 100: PRELIMINARIES
101SR Temporary Accommodation and Equipment for the Employer
1. When instructed by the Employer, for the purposes of overseeing major schemes, the
Contractor shall provide, maintain and service the accommodation and equipment
described in Appendix 1/1.
2. All accommodation shall be kept in a good state of repair and shall be cleaned at the end
of each working day for so long as it is in use, and suitable arrangements shall be made
for the disposal of any waste arising from use of the accommodation. The rate for provision
of temporary accommodation shall be deemed to include all associated consumables.
3. All equipment detailed in Appendix 1/1 shall be of a quality and precision appropriate to its
proposed use, and it shall be delivered and maintained in a serviceable condition. Any
equipment needing periodic calibration shall be calibrated on delivery, annually and at other
times as and when recommended by the manufacturer.
107SR Site Extent and Limitations on Use
1. The Contractor may be required to undertake works on any part of the Employer’s Road
Network as defined in Appendix 1/7.
2. The extent of each individual Site shall be the area defined in the Works Order or in the
absence of any other definition the working area including any safety zones, which the
Contractor necessarily occupies in order to carry out the Works.
3. The Contractor shall not have sole possession of the Site and shall allow full facilities to
other Contractors or Statutory Authorities engaged or employed on the site or adjacent
sites.
4. For any Site a restriction to normal working hours may be imposed (to the whole or part of
the works) at the Employer’s sole discretion at any time e.g. works on traffic sensitive routes
or in other circumstances where the works may cause significant disruption or nuisance.
5. Existing traffic and pedestrian flows are to be maintained at all times except where allowed
for in the contract or agreed with the Employer. The Contractor shall comply with the
noticing and permitting requirements as set out in clause 154AR.
6. All temporary traffic routes and access arrangements shall be co-ordinated with the
Employer, the Police and the other Emergency Services.
7. Road closures and diversions shall be co-ordinated with the Employer and bus operators.
Seven days’ notice of the timings of changes to traffic phasings and diversion routes shall
be given to allow bus operators to plan alternative routes. Existing bus stops shall remain
operational at all times unless temporary stop positions are agreed. Safe pedestrian routes
Page 77 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
and crossing points shall be maintained to all permanent or temporary bus stops while
these are in use.
112SR Setting Out
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting out the works, and for the correctness of the
positions, levels and dimensions of the works. In setting out the works, it shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that any dimensions, sizes and levels given are correct
and, should he wish to query any of these, he shall give written notice to the Employer
before commencing the works.
2. If at any time during the progress of the works any error shall appear or arise in the
positions, levels or dimensions of the works, the Contractor shall, at his own expense,
remove and amend the work to the satisfaction of the Employer, and shall become liable
for any costs associated with any delay caused to the works due to such error.
3. The Contractor shall, within 3 weeks following the commencement of the works, carry out
a check of the co-ordinates and levels of all relevant permanent ground markers and
permanent bench marks and shall supply the Employer, if requested, with their position
and level in order that they may be checked and revised, if necessary.
4. The Contractor shall keep updated schedules and drawings of all bench marks (which shall
be based on Ordnance Datum at Newlyn) used in the setting out and shall make these
available to the Employer when required.
5. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that any information provided to him relating to the
existing ground levels is correct. Should the Contractor wish to dispute any levels he shall
submit to the Employer a schedule of the position of the levels considered to be in error
and a set of revised levels. The existing ground relevant to the disputed levels shall not be
disturbed before the correct levels are determined.
6. The Contractor shall establish works bench marks of accepted design so that the distance
between adjacent works bench marks does not exceed 200m. The works bench marks
shall be located within 60m of the site and the agreed value of each works bench mark
shall be legibly recorded thereon. The Contractor shall check at weekly intervals all such
works bench marks and Permanent Ground Markers and immediately notify the Employer
in writing of any discrepancy in values. Where the Contractor locates works bench marks
outside the site, he shall arrange and pay for any necessary wayleaves with the owner of
the land.
7. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, supply the Employer with records in accepted
format relating to all reference pegs and works bench marks and shall keep such records
up to date monthly by formal notice to the Employer.
8. Running metreages of the works shall be indicated on setting out line pegs at not more
than 20m intervals.
Page 78 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
9. On erection of any site boundary fencing, whether temporary or permanent, the Contractor
shall mark the running metreage of the adjacent section of road at 10m intervals such that
the metreage may be easily read at a distance of 20m. The Contractor shall maintain the
markings during the works and shall remove them as requested by the Employer or at the
end of the Defects Period for the works.
10. The line of each cross-section shall be marked by reference pegs driven in the fence line
or other protected place on each side of the setting out line peg. Sufficient information shall
be accurately recorded to enable the setting out line pegs to be re-located.
11. Where directed by the Employer, kerb and margin lines shall be set out independently and
shall not be based on off-sets from the setting out line. Line and level pegs shall be set out
at intervals not exceeding 10m except on straight gradients and elsewhere when accepted
by the Employer where they may be at 20m intervals. They shall, where necessary,
incorporate profile boards and be of a type which will not be disturbed during the laying of
kerbs, marginal strips or channels.
12. All pegs and profile boards, etc shall be painted in such distinguishing colours as agreed
with the Employer.
13. The line and levels of formation, side slopes, drainage, carriageway, footways and hard
shoulders shall be carefully set out and frequently checked, care being taken to ensure that
correct gradients and cross-sections are everywhere obtained.
14. Any reference to Chainage in the Contract Documents shall be taken as reference to
Metreage.
15. The Contractor shall ensure that, where necessary, in order to maintain his programme,
lines and levels are set out in such time as to enable Statutory Undertakers’ plant and other
publicly or privately owned services or supplies to be installed, altered or removed.
16. The Contractor shall provide all assistance required by the Employer for checking the
setting out or for measuring up the works, at such times as may be suitable to the Employer.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, rectify any errors arising from inaccurate setting
out unless the Employer shall decide to the contrary.
113SR Programme of Works
1. Subject and without prejudice to the Conditions of Contract, the Employer shall request a
programme for any scheme, package or grouping of works where he considers it to be
appropriate.
2. Where the Employer requests a programme the Contractor shall submit to the Employer a
programme that complies with the constraints imposed by the Contract and specific
requirements stated in the Works Order in a manner described in Appendix 1/13. The
Contractor shall update the programme as necessary.
3. The programme and subsequent revisions of the programme shall show the level of detail
appropriate to each stage of the works and all activities and constraints, each of which shall
be given a short title. All events shall be numbered.
Page 79 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
116SR Privately and Publicly Owned Services and Supplies
1. The Employer will provide the Contractor with details of preliminary arrangements that have
been made with Statutory Undertakers, or others concerned, for any alteration to their services
made necessary by the Works, prior to commencement of the Works.
2. All drawings and information that is available to the Employer on both privately or publicly
owned services and supplies will be available to the Contractor. The Employer does not
guarantee the accuracy of the drawings.
3. The
Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the exact position and nature of Statutory
Undertaker and other publicly and privately owned services or supplies affected by the
works and the depth, size and gradient thereof, by hand digging and electro-location, as
necessary.
4. The Contractor shall refer to all of the pre-construction information that the Employer has made
available to him, in accordance with the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
2015. The Contractor shall not carry out any work until he has obtained the relevant information
and ascertained the location of any underground cables and pipes and overhead cables and shall
contact the Employer in the event of any difficulty accessing the pre-construction information.
5. Private Services to individual property will not generally be shown on any drawings or listed in
the instructing Works Order. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory
Undertakers, or others concerned, for the phasing of all necessary disconnections and diversions
of private services affected by the Works.
6. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Statutory Undertakers, or others, for the co-
ordination of his work with all concurrent work which needs to be done by them or their
contractors. Compliance with any periods of notice identified by the Employer shall not relieve
the Contractor of his obligations to make such arrangements.
7. Disconnected apparatus shall only be removed by the Contractor after receipt of written
permission to do so from the owner of the apparatus.
8. The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Statutory Undertakers serving the locality
are listed below are provided in Appendix 1/16
9. The Employer shall not be responsible for any costs resulting from delay to the Contractor
as a result of a Statutory Undertaker not carrying out his works as agreed. The Employer
may, however, at his discretion, allow extensions of time in such circumstances.
10. The Contractor shall ensure that all Statutory Undertakers' manholes, boxes, inspection
chambers, fire hydrants and the like, within the limits of the site, are kept completely
unobstructed at all times and have free access for the Undertaker concerned. Instructions
to this effect shall be given by the Contractor to all site staff.
Page 80 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
11. The use of Water Company hydrants within London is based on a licensing system. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that he holds an appropriate annual
licence for the use of such hydrants.
Page 81 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 900 ROAD PAVEMENTS – BITUMINOUS BOUND MATERIALS
942SR Thin Surface Course Systems
General
1. Thin surface course systems shall either:
(i) Have a HAPAS Certificate, or equivalent certification, applicable to the required
produce performance under the combination(s) of traffic level and site classification
specified in Appendix 7/1, or
(ii) Have the required product performance declared under the CE mark for the product in
accordance with the relevant British adopted European standard and either the
Construction Products Directive (89/106/EEC) (CPD) or the Construction Products
Regulation (Regulation (EU) No 305/2011) (CPR) and for installation have a HAPAS
Certificate or equivalent certification applicable to the required product performance
under the combination(s) of traffic level and site classification specified in Appendix
7/1, or
(iii) Have the required product performance declared under the CE mark for the product in
accordance with a European Technical Approval and the CPD and for installation have
a HAPAS Certificate or equivalent certification applicable to the required product
performance under the combination(s) of traffic level and site classification specified
in Appendix 7/1, or
(iv) Have the required product performance declared under the CE mark for the product in
accordance with a European Technical Assessment and the CPR and for installation
have a HAPAS Certificate or equivalent certification applicable to the required product
performance under the combination(s) of traffic level and site classification specified
in Appendix 7/1.
2.
(i) Thin surface course systems that are mixed hot as asphalt shall comply with the
relevant part of BSEN13108 and either be CE marked in accordance with the relevant
parts of BSEN13108 and the CPD or CPR, or shall be produced in plants that operate
Attestation of Conformity to BSEN13108-21 and the Contractor shall provide
certification to demonstrate this.
(ii) Cold applied ultra thin surface course systems that are produced using surface dressing
techniques shall comply with either sub-Clause 1(i), (iii) or (iv) and for materials
complying with sub-Clause 1(i) be produced by companies that are either:
a. Registered to the National Highways Sector Scheme 13 for The Supply and
Application of Surface Dressings to Road Surfaces as described in Appendix A, or
b. Operating Attestation of Conformity to BSEN12271 and the Contractor shall
provide certification to demonstrate this.
3. The generic type of thin surface course system required shall be specified in Appendix 7/1
as either:
(i) Hot applied thin surfacings.
(ii) Cold applied ultra thin surfacings.
Page 82 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(iii) Other thin surfacings.
Test Certificates and Material Samples
4. A copy of the HAPAS Certificate or equivalent certification for the system shall be provided
to the Employer, together with the associated Quality Plan and Installation Method
Statement which shall comply with the requirements of this specification and any minimum
laying requirements given in the HAPAS Certificate. Copies of these documents shall be
provided in the asset records. If the product is CE marked then the CE mark and associated
declaration of performance must also be provided. The thin surface course system shall be
manufactured, transported and laid in accordance with these documents. The material shall
be manufactured in plants as defined in sub-Clause 2 and shall be laid by an installer
approved by the Certificate Holder.
5. When required for audit purposes the component materials (including, where relevant, their
nominal sizes) and their relative proportions and/or spread rates for use in the Permanent
Works shall be notified to the Employer. The component materials listed shall include, as
appropriate, coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, filler, additives (including fibres), binder,
modifier and bond coat, and shall be subdivided into layers if applied using surface dressing
or slurry surfacing techniques. Where a thin surface course system is not produced under
a sector scheme as defined in sub-Clause 2, the Quality Plan and Quality System shall be
acceptable to the Employer.
6. If detailed in Appendix 1/6, samples of aggregate, bond coat or binder, modified or
unmodified bitumen from either the spray bar or storage tank or mixed bituminous materials
from the pavement surface or other suitable sampling point shall be supplied to the
Employer.
Aggregates
7. Only hot applied thin surface coat systems with an upper (D) aggregate size of 10mm or
less shall be permitted on bends with a speed limit of 50mph or more and a radius up to
250m, on roundabouts, and on the approaches to roundabouts. Areas where only hot
applied thin surface course systems with an upper (D) aggregate size of 10mm or less are
permitted shall be as specified in Appendix 7/1.
8. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock or steel slag complying with Clause 901 when
tested in accordance with the procedures of BSEN13043. The coarse aggregate in all Base
and Binder Course materials shall additionally have the following properties:
(i) Polished Stone Value (PSV) – as specified in Appendix 7/1 – BSEN13043, clause
4.2.3;
(ii) Aggregate Abrasion Value (AAV) – as specified in Appendix 7/1 – BSEN13043,
clause 4.2.4;
(iii) Los Angeles Coefficient (LA) – not greater than LA30 – BSEN13043,
clause 4.2.2;
(iv) Flakiness Index (FI) – not more than FI20 – BSEN13043, clause 4.1.6.
Page 83 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Test certificates stating the properties of the aggregate to be used shall be supplied to
the Employer unless the values are declared in the declaration of performance under the
CE mark.
Performance Levels
9. The wheel-tracking levels of the thin surface course system, as recorded on the HAPAS
Certificate or equivalent certification, shall be Level 3 unless otherwise specified in
Appendix 7/1. For thin surface course systems whose maximum thickness is less than
20mm and no deformation resistance information is given, Level 3 is assumed.
10. The road/tyre noise level of the thin surface course system shall be as specified in Appendix
7/1.
Layer Thickness
11. The minimum and/or maximum compacted thickness of the thin surface course system
shall be as specified in Appendix 7/1. The installed layer thickness must not be less than
the permitted minimum thickness stated in the HAPAS Certificate or equivalent certification
for a particular system.
12. Where necessary, the existing substrate surface shall be regulated in accordance with
Clause 907, prior to laying surfacing material to this Clause. Evidence that the deformation
resistance of material used for regulation is capable of complying with the requirements of
sub-Clause 7 shall be provided to the Employer except that, if the combined maximum
thickness of the regulating material and/or of the thin surface course system is more than
20mm, evidence of the deformation resistance of the combined layers shall be provided.
13. Where required, the surface shall be gritted with 0/4 dust free or very lightly bitumen coated
crushed rock fines at a rate exceeding 600 g/m2 before final compaction is complete and
rolled in. Excess material shall be removed by sweeping.
Surface Preparation
14. When required in Appendix 7/1, a site inspection shall be undertaken prior to the main
works jointly by representatives of the Employer and the Contractor to agree suitable
preparation works (e.g. patching).
15. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with BS 594987 and the Installation Method
Statement provided in accordance with sub-Clause 4. Moreover:
(i) Existing surfaces shall be cleaned using steel brooms and suction sweeping or
other appropriate means. The surface on which the asphalt is to be placed shall be
essentially dry and free from any standing water. Asphalt shall not be placed during
periods of rain or when rain is imminent. All mud, dust, dirt and other debris and
organic material shall be removed.
(ii) Ironwork shall be lifted to its final level before surfacing is carried out except where
the installation method statement specifically states otherwise. Unless raised prior
to surfacing, ironwork and reflecting road studs shall be located for lifting and
Page 84 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
resetting after completion of surfacing works. Fire hydrants and other safety related
ironwork shall be uncovered immediately after completion of rolling. Gullies shall be
covered prior to surfacing.
(iii)Where possible, existing road markings shall be removed.
Transportation
16. Transportation of the thin surface course system and/or its components shall be in
accordance with the Installation Method Statement provided in accordance with sub-Clause
4. Notwithstanding, hot bituminous materials shall be transported in accordance with sub-
Clause 903.6.
Sweeping and Early Life Monitoring of Cold Applied Ultra Thin Surfacings
17. Sweeping of newly laid cold applied ultra thin surfacing shall be in accordance with the
HAPAS Certificate or equivalent certification and the Installation Method Statement.
18. Notwithstanding the above, suction sweeping shall be undertaken immediately before the
newly laid cold applied ultra thin surfacing is opened to traffic.
19. The installation shall be monitored closely for a minimum period of 2 hours after the road
is opened to traffic. Traffic safety and management procedures shall be reinstated, or other
such remedial actions instigated, if there are signs of distress in the surfacing, such as
turning of the chippings, in order to prevent further damage to the installation.
20. Where detailed in Appendix 7/1, a mandatory speed limit shall be implemented during
installation and for a period of 5 days after installation. This speed limit would not normally
be in excess of 40mph. The actual speed limit applied shall be agreed with the Employer.
21. Further operations to remove subsequently loosened chippings shall be carried out over
the next 48 hours. The road, and adjacent side roads, footways and paved areas shall be
kept substantially free of loose chippings for a period of 30 days after completion of the
surfacing work.
Surface Macrotexture – Untrafficked
22. The macrotexture depth of the thin surface course system after compaction has been
completed and before opening to traffic shall be in accordance with Clause 921.
Surface Macrotexture – Performance Guarantee
23. A guarantee shall be provided that for a period of two years from the date of opening to
traffic the average macrotexture, measured using the volumetric patch technique described
in BSEN13036-1, will be maintained above the levels given in Appendix 7/1.
24. Where measurement is necessary to demonstrate compliance during the guarantee period,
the macrotexture shall be measured in accordance with BSEN13036-1 in the most heavily
trafficked lane at 10m intervals. The average value of a set of 10 individual measurements
Page 85 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
taken along the centre of the most heavily worn wheel-track shall not be less than the
appropriate value stated in Appendix 7/1.
Surfacing Integrity – Performance Guarantee
25. For surfacing installed on the strategic road network, a guarantee shall be provided for the
integrity of the surfacing and the workmanship for a period of five years from the date of
opening to traffic.
26. The five-year guarantee shall include for defects such as fretting, ravelling, stripping and
loss of chippings. The guarantee shall exclude defects arising from accidental damage or
damage caused by settlement, subsidence or failure of the underlying carriageway on
which the surfacing material has been laid. Replacement of the surfacing or other remedial
measures agreed with the Employer shall be executed if the surfacing is in a “Suspect” or
“Poor” condition as defined in Appendix A of TRL Report TRL674 – “Durability of thin
surfacing systems, Part 4, Final report after nine years monitoring, TRL report 674”.
Page 86 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
SERIES 1200 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND ROAD MARKINGS
1217SR Traffic Signals
Permanent Traffic Signals
1. Any alterations to permanent traffic signals will be undertaken by Transport for London and
the local electricity supply company or their respective Subcontractors. The Contractor shall
allow in his rates for programming his work to suit their requirements. The allowance shall
include for preliminary discussions, phasing of work to suit and any delays that the
Contractor may feel will be caused to him as a result of the foregoing.
2. The Contractor where instructed by the Employer shall provide attendance to Transport for
London and the local electricity supply company or their respective Subcontractors in
connection with traffic signal works.
Temporary Traffic Signals
3. See Clause 164AR and Appendix 12/5.
Page 87 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX: 0/2
CONTRACT SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES AND TABLES
INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
Page 88 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX: 0/2 - CONTRACT SPECIFIC MINOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING CLAUSES
AND TABLES INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
Clause
Alterations to be made
Number
110
Delete: "four weeks" and insert: "one week" in line one.
601
Add sub-clause 601.2 (ii) (b)
Fly-tipped material.
1107
Add the following sub-clauses:
1107.4: Laying Small Element Paving (including Tactile Paving)
The sand layer should be 50 mm thick when fully compacted after
construction. The blocks should then be laid on to the screeded sand
bed, ensuring that a joint width of 2 to 4 mm is achieved. Care should be
taken to avoid undue disturbance of the screeded sand layer. Kiln dried
silver sand should be spread over the joints and the flags bedded in,
using a rubber band based vibrating plate or a paviour's maul. Silver sand
should be swept over the surface until the joints are full to the satisfaction
of the Employer.
1107.5: Laying Concrete Blocks
When laid in conjunction with small element paving, the blocks are to
be laid as to Clause 1170.4AR but vibrated down with a rubber-based
vibrating plate. When blocks are laid independently, the laying course
should be screeded to a compacted finished depth of 50 mm. The
screeded laying course should never be walked upon. Each block must
be firmly placed close together into position. Particular care must be
taken initially, ideally starting against a firm edge, to give the required
laying pattern. When the required area has been laid, the blocks are to
be vibrated down with a rubber-based vibrating plate. Kiln dry fine silver
sand should then be brushed over the entire area and the blocks should
he once again vibrated to ensure that the joints are completely filled.
Page 89 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1212
In sub-Clause 1212.1 the first sentence is deleted and replaced by the
following:
"1. Road markings shall meet the requirements of BS EN 1436 (2007).
The minimum performance of white lining will be as given below:-
Property
BS EN 1436
Requirement
Value
Reference
Colour
Table 6
White
x,y coordinates
given
Luminance
Table 5
Class B2
0.30
Skid
Table 7
Class S1
45
Resistance
Retro-
Table 2
Class R2
100
reflectivity
Page 90 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX: 0/3
LIST OF CONTRACT SPECIFIC NUMBERED APPENDICES REFERRED TO IN THE
SPECIFICATION AND INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT
Page 91 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/1: TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE
EMPLOYER Generally, it is expected that no office accommodation will be required for the Employer.
However, for larger projects it may be necessary to provide accommodation.
Where required accommodation shall comprise: Portable Offices for the Employer
1. The portable office shall measure 4.5m x 2.5m on plan (clear floor area) and shall include
2 No. windows (total 2 sq m minimum, 1 sq m minimum to open).
2. The office shall be provided with a power supply, wi-fi or other internet connection and
lighting.
3. The offices shall be lined throughout.
4. A lock with four keys shall be provided for the entrance door.
5. Each office shall be fitted with electric heating and lighting which shall be powered from a
suitable sized generator or an Electricity Board supply as appropriate.
6. Heating and general requirements shall be in accordance with the Offices, Shops and
Railway Premises Act 1963 and any relevant subsequent legislation.
7. All windows shall be fitted with external close boarded shutters capable of being fastened
and secured.
8. Boot cleaning facilities shall be provided outside the door.
9. Hardstanding car parking to be provided for one vehicle.
10. Portable office to be located as agreed with the Employer.
11. The following furniture and equipment shall be provided for each portable office:
• Office desk (1.4 x 0.8 m) lockable 2 No.
• Chairs 2 No.
• 4 drawer filing cabinet 1 No.
• Wastepaper basket 1 No.
• Portable wash basin, soap and towels 1 No.
• Sanitary hut with flushing toilet 1 No.
• 5 Gallon water container 1 No.
• Kettle – 4 pint 1 No.
• First aid kit (size 1-10 persons) 1 No.
• Fire extinguisher (general purpose type AFF) 1 No.
• 225mm x 25mm shelving 5m
• Hat and coat hooks 3 No.
Page 92 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
• Teapot – 3 pint 1 No.
• Tea service comprising jugs, bowls, mugs, saucers, plates, spoons for 4 persons
Page 93 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/5: TESTING TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR
1. The Contractor shall comply with all Quality Management and Product Certification
schemes indicated in Table NG1/1 of Notes for Guidance on the Specification for
Highway Works and shall provide certificates of compliance as required by the Employer.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out testing to prove compliance with the
Specification where instructed by the Employer. Testing, where required, shall be as
identified in Table NG1/1 of Notes for Guidance on the Specification for Highway Works.
Page 94 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/7: SITE EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS OF USE
1. The Contract Area is defined as:
The London Borough of Haringey and any areas outside the borough where the Employer
has powers (either by agreement or otherwise) to undertake works within the scope of the
contract. For clarity this shall include but not be limited to:
(i)
all the lands and other places within the London Borough of Haringey including the
Employer’s Road Network, other highways, car parks, recreational areas, educational
premises, land owned by Haringey Homes and other public areas.
(ii)
all lands in adjacent local authorities where London Borough of Haringey are entitled by
agreement to undertake works.
2. An overview of the Employer’s Road Network is given in the plan inserted below:
Adobe Acrobat
Document
3. A more detail can be seen on the interactive map at:
http://maps.haringey.gov.uk/LBHinternet/i4lg/pages/main/main.jsp#
4. The Employer’s Road Network is fully defined in detail within CONFIRM and will be shared during
the mobilisation period.
5. The specific location for individual works will be provided in Works Orders together with any
restrictions or limitations of use.
Page 95 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/9: CONTROL OF NOISE AND VIBRATION
1. Construction activity has the potential to cause significant environmental impacts and
neighbourhood nuisance. These effects however, can be reduced by implementing good
practice.
2. The Employer has specific powers under the Control of Pollution Act 1974 and the
Environmental Protection Act 1990 to deal with noise and environmental nuisance. The
Contractor should also always comply with all other relevant legislation including the
provisions of The Clean Air Act 1993, The Environment Act 1995, the Pollution
Prevention and Control Act 1999 and The Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.
3. In particular, BEST PRACTICABLE MEANS as defined in Section 72 of the Control of
Pollution Act 1974 shall be employed at all times to reduce noise TO A MINIMUM. Best
Practicable means should include, but not be limited to, the following:-
i.
All vehicles and mechanical plant used for the purpose of the works shall be fitted
with effective exhaust silencers and shall be maintained in good and effective order
so that extraneous noise from mechanical vibration, creaking, squeaking, etc. shall
be reduced to a minimum.
ii. All compressors and generators shall be "sound reduced" models fitted with properly
lined and sealed acoustic covers which shall be kept closed whenever the machines
are in use and all ancillary pneumatic percussive tools shall be fitted with mufflers or
silencers of the type recommended by the manufacturer.
iii. Machines in intermittent use shall be shut down when not in use or throttled down to
a minimum as necessary.
iv. Noise from construction activities shall not be audible outside the nearest or worst
affected occupied premises outside the hours specified in the following table. In
particular, none of the activities, or mechanical plant listed below shall be undertaken
or used:-
Mechanical breakers, compressors, saws etc.
Mechanical excavation, sawing, etc.
4. The Contractor shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Employer or
the Local Authority Environmental Health officer in relation to noise levels emitted by
constructional plant installed on the Site, or which the Contractor intends to install on the
Site, and shall afford all reasonable facilities to enable them to carry out such site
investigations as may be necessary.
5. Noise from construction activity, shall not give rise to noise levels in excess of those given
in the following Table at the facade of the nearest or worse affected occupied premises.
Noise levels shall be monitored by the method set out in Appendix E of BS 5228-2:1997.
Period
Hours
No.
of Noise dB Peak
Hours
(A) Leq. Noise
Page 96 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
dB(A)
(2)
(1)
Monday – Friday
08.00
– 10
75
85
(excl.
Public 18.00
Holidays)
Saturdays
08.00
– 4
75
85
12.00
or 3dB (A) above the ambient equivalent noise level with no construction works in
progress whichever is the higher.
NOTE:
Peak Noise Levels refer to levels recorded on a BS IEC 61672-2:2013 Type 1 precision
sound level meter set to slow response.
i.
Leq. Noise values are the values applicable to the equivalent continuous sound level
value, over the relevant period, measured at points as stated in the Contract.
ii. A noise control station shall be any position determined by the Employer.
iii. The ambient equivalent continuous noise level Leq. is the noise level to which people
in the neighborhood are normally exposed and which does not originate from the
site, as defined in BS 5228-2:1997.
6. The Employer may agree to or specify that works shall be carried out outside the periods
and hours specified in the table above and in such circumstances, the Contractor shall
discuss with the Employer's Environmental Health Officer, the proposed works and
methods and plant intended to be used in order to agree satisfactory arrangements for
minimising noise levels. The use of breakers, milling machines or other equipment
creating similar noise levels will not be permitted between 23.00hrs - 08.00hrs.
7. The Contractor may be given permission to carry out Works which give rise to noise
levels exceeding those in the above table provided that at least seven days notice of the
exact date and time of these works is given to the Employer in writing, together with the
measures proposed by the Contractor to alleviate the discomfort caused by his works on
affected occupants of adjacent buildings.
8. In the event of the Local Authority serving notice on the Contractor imposing noise levels
or restricting working hours to a greater extent that those set out above, the Contractor
shall immediately consult the Employer as to whether the matter shall be made the
subject of an Appeal as provided under the Act. This provision shall not apply to the
protection of persons on Site against noise which is wholly the responsibility of the
Contractor.
9. The foregoing requirements may be waived in any emergency situation or where safety
would be otherwise at risk, provided that the Contractor makes every effort to ensure that
the work in question is completed as quickly and quietly as possible and with minimal
disturbance to people living or working nearby.
Page 97 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
10. The Employer and the Employer's Environmental Health Officer shall be domed where it
has been necessary to exceed the permitted noise levels in an emergency.
Vibration Control
11. The Contractor shall select and utilize methods of working and items of plant so that the
maximum ground vibrations do not exceed a peak particle velocity of 1 nm per second at
any occupied property and 31 nm per second at any other property.
12. In exceptional circumstances the Contractor may apply to the Employer for consent to
carry out works which he considers will exceed the specified limit of ground vibration. The
procedure for submitting and processing the application will be as specified for obtaining
consent to exceed the specified noise levels.
Dust and Air Pollution
13. The Contractor will take all necessary measures to avoid creating a dust nuisance.
Measures to prevent dust will include the following practices:-
i.
The enclosure of material stockpiles at all times and damping down of dusty materials
using water sprays during dry weather.
ii.
The hard surfacing of heavily used areas which will be kept clean by brushing and water
spraying regularly.
iii.
Control of cutting or grinding of materials on site. Water-feed facilities shall be used.
iv.
The complete sheeting of the sides of all vehicles carrying spoil and other dusty
materials.
v.
Materials should be stored away from the site boundary wherever possible.
vi.
Completed earthworks to be sealed as soon as reasonably possible.
The effectiveness of these measures shall be monitored frequently by the Contractor and
reviewed at progress meetings.
The Local Authority will be kept informed of the ongoing situation.
14. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the occurrence of smoke
emissions or fumes from site plant or stored &el oils for safety reasons and to prevent
such emissions or fumes drifting into residential areas. In particular, plant should be well
maintained and measures taken to ensure that they are not left &g for long periods when
not directly in use.
Page 98 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/13: PROGRAMME OF WORKS 1. Where instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit works programmes
for capital improvement projects, planned maintenance schemes and routine activity. All
programmes shall be updated monthly, at least, to coincide with monthly progress meetings.
2. Programmes may be in the form of a bar chart, activity schedule or in the form of a detailed
statement (as agreed by the Employer) showing the planned locations, scope, sequencing, dates
and durations for improvements, maintenance renewal, routine maintenance and other works
orders issued under the Contract.
3. For larger projects the programme shall be comprehensive and comprise a bar chart produced as
a result of a Critical Path Analysis complying with the constraints below. It shall show the
level of detail appropriate to each stage of the Works and all activities and constraints, each
of which shall be given a short title. All events shall be numbered and annotated with
earliest and latest event dates. At the time of presentation of the Programme the Contractor
may also be requested to provide a mass-haul diagram showing his intended earthworks
movements and locations and capacities of anticipated plant and other resource input.
Schedule of Constraints (to be completed by the Employer based on project for which a
programme has been requested)
The constraints known at Works Order stage should be inserted here. Typical constraints
are commitments by the Employer as follows:
(i) Work to privately and publicly owned services and supplies (although this is
usually agreed informally giving the Contractor latitude in determining the
Programme).
(ii) Possession (rail, property, etc).
(iii) Traffic Orders.
(iv) Provision of noise and environmental protection prior to the main works (noise
barriers etc).
4. The level of detail in the programme should be not less than the following:
Level 1 Provisional Programme (Prior to issue of the Works Order based on detailed
construction information provided by the Employer):
a) Each structure.
b) Each Earthwork Feature – e.g. cutting or embankment.
c) Roadworks – split into junctions and lengths not exceeding 100m for all
carriageways, footways and cycletracks
i. Fencing
ii. Site clearance
iii. Topsoil strip
iv. Drainage
Page 99 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
v. Sub-base.
vi. Sub-grades improvement layer
vii. Road base or concrete paving
viii. Surfacing
ix. Soiling / Seeding
x. Traffic Signs / Road Markings
xi. Road Lighting
xii. Cabling and Telecomms
d) Works involving privately and publicly owned services and supplies.
e) Traffic management measures including operation of site accesses, plant
crossing and temporary diversions.
Level 2 (Firm Programme prior to commencing construction):
Headings as Level 1.
Level 3
Further breakdown of items and other details where required by the Employer.
Page 100 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/14: PAYMENT APPLICATIONS
1. Monthly payment applications shall be submitted through the Employer’s Confirm system
in a format defined by the Employer, having consulted the Contractor.
2. Whenever dealing with matters covered by the Schedule of Rates, payment applications
shall be set out under Part and Section headings similar to those in the Schedule of Rates
and shall separately identify each item and specify quantity, unit, rate and value. Items not
described in Schedule of Rates but appropriate for inclusion as measured work shall be
shown at the end of the relevant section or under section headings as appropriate indicating
quantity, unit rate and value.
3. In respect of all other matters the Contractor shall separately show in the payment
application quantities, units and rates of goods and/or materials and also details of any
other matters to which he considers himself entitled.
4. The Contractor may submit interim applications for Works Orders whose duration, in the
opinion of the Contractor and with the agreement of the Employer, is in excess of 28 days.
5. At the end of the Employer’s financial year, or at other times when reasonably required by
the Employer, the Contractor shall provide promptly and to a timetable supplied by the
Employer sufficient information, so that the Employer may close its accounts in accordance
with its normal accounting practices.
6. Interim applications and invoices are required for all work in progress at 31st March each
year.
Page 101 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/16: PRIVATELY AND PUBLICLY OWNED SERVICES AND SUPPLIES Services and Supplies Affected by the Works
1. Where appropriate, details of services and supplies affected by works will be provided by
the Employer with the order for the execution of the works.
Damage to Plant, Services Etc.
2. The Contractor shall immediately report to the Employer and owner, any damage done to
any underground plant, equipment, apparatus or works, and subject to the full
implementation of safety measures and precautions, and where so required and without
cost to the Employer, affect the repairs without delay.
3. Should the authority or owner of the damaged plant, equipment, apparatus or works, carry
out the repairs, the Contractor shall supply immediately any facilities or assistance
necessary and repay to the authority or owner the full cost of the remedial work. Repairs to
all Statutory Undertakers’ plant and services damaged by the Contractor during the course
of the works shall be paid for by the Contractor.
Diversion and Protection of Services
4. The Contractor shall take any and all measures reasonably required by any Public or
Statutory Authority for the full protection of its mains, pipes, cables and other apparatus
during the progress of the Works, and shall construct and provide to the satisfaction of the
Authority concerned, all works necessary for the prevention of damage or interruption of
services. If, in the execution of works, by reason of any subsidence or any act of neglect
or default of the Contractor, any damage to any apparatus or any interruption of any service
is caused, the Contractor shall bear and pay the cost reasonably incurred by the Authority
involved in making good such damage, and shall make full compensation to the Authority
for any loss sustained by reason of such interruption. Where necessary the Contractor will
obtain details of Statutory Undertakers' mains, pipes etc and the Contractor may by prior
arrangement with the Employer inspect them before or during the execution of work.
5. The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the works, afford facilities to
properly accredited agents of any Public or Statutory Authority, as may be necessary for
inspecting, reporting, maintaining, removing renewing or altering such apparatus in
connection with the construction of the Works or for any routing purposes.
6. If it is necessary that a Statutory Authority raises its own cover and frame or should elect
to do so, the Contractor must make all arrangements with the Statutory Authority for this to
be done. The Employer is not responsible for any costs resulting from delay to the
Contractor as a result of a Statutory Authority not carrying out their works as agreed.
Works Near Railways
7. Work under, over or alongside the railway infrastructure is subject to advance notification and
liaison with Network Rail and / or TfL Rail. Except for minor maintenance items it should be noted
that on contact with Network Rail and / or TfL Rail, the Contractor will be required to submit details
Page 102 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
of the works planned, the locations and the programming and enter into a period of consultation
(supported by the Employer / Employer as necessary) and obtain agreements before proceeding.
Authorities Serving the Locality
8. Statutory Authorities and Others serving the locality are identified in the file embedded
below.
Microsoft Office
Excel 97-2003 Worksheet
Page 103 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/17: TRAFFIC SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT
Submission of Traffic Safety and Management Proposals
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic safety and management and associated
works. The Contractor shall prepare his traffic safety and management proposals for each
site, in time to obtain necessary approvals and access to construct the Works but in any
case before commencing Works.
General
2. The Contractor shall at all times be under an obligation to minimise the effects of his
operations on traffic. He shall, in general, seek to keep as short as possible operations
within the highway, and shall seek to carry out such operations at times chosen so as to
minimise disruption to traffic flows. He shall arrange the transport of plant and materials so
that any additional traffic as arises shall be limited as far as is reasonably possible so as to
cause no avoidable congestion.
3. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, road markings, lamps,
barriers and traffic control signals and such other measures as may be necessitated by the
construction of the Works in accordance with the recommendations contained in Chapter
8 of the Traffic Signs Manual 2009 published by the Stationery Office and any amendments
thereof, including the following:
"Safety at Street Works and Road Works" published by the Stationery Office in October
2013
Where the circumstances of any particular case are not covered by the recommendations
or result in the restriction of permitted movements by any class of traffic (pedestrian and
vehicles) the Contractor shall submit proposals for dealing with such situations to the
Employer for approval. Compliance with this clause shall not relieve the Contractor of any
of his other obligations and liabilities under the Contract and under the relevant provisions
of the Highway Acts, and the Road Traffic Act 1991 (C40), Road Traffic (Temporary
Restriction) Act 1991 (C26), and Traffic Signs Manual (TSM), Chapter 8 Volumes 1 and 2
2009, published by the Stationery Office.
4. The Contractor shall, after consultation with any statutory or other authority concerned,
submit to the Employer for his approval a programme based on such consultation showing
the scheme of traffic management he proposes for carrying out the Works before
commencing any work which affects the use of the public highway and thereafter furnish
such further details and information as necessitated by the Works or as the Employer may
require.
5. The Contractor shall not commence any work which affects the public highway until all
traffic safety measures necessitated by the work are fully operational. The installation and
initial operation of each phase of a traffic safety and management system shall only be
carried out during permitted hours.
Page 104 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
6. The traffic signs, lamps, barriers and traffic control signals shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Traffic Signals Regulations and General Directions 2016 or those
current at the date of the execution of the work.
7. Warning and safety lamps shall comply with BS EN 12352:2006 and BS 3143-2: 1990,
except that the flashing rate for flashing lamps shall be within the range 120 -150 flashes
per minute. The minimum luminous intensity of the lamps shall be 0.5 candelas for steady
lamps, 1.0 candela for tipple lamps at their peak, and 1.5 candelas for flashing lamps at
their peak.
8. The Contractor shall keep clean and legible at all times all traffic signs, lamps, barriers and
traffic control signals and he shall position, reposition, cover or remove them as
necessitated by the progress of the Works.
9. All traffic signs must be reflectorised in using Class 1 retroflective material as defined in
Chapter 8 of the traffic signs manual with BS EN 12899-1: 2007. They must be provided
with external or internal lighting when placed within 50m of a street lamp on roads subject
to speed limits exceeding 30 mph. Signs in any other situations must be lit if required by
the Employer.
10. The Contractor must ensure that all his personnel when working on highways are wearing
high visibility jackets to BS EN 471: 2003 with reflective materials being 8910 silver
scotchline BS EN 471: 2003, or high visibility coat to BS EN 471: 2003 Class A with
reflective materials as specified above. He will also be required to ensure that staff are
wearing proper and correct protective clothing etc, for the type of works he/she is
undertaking e.g. ear defenders must be worn where pneumatic hammers are being used
for breaking the road, helmets should be worn when working near planing machines
incorporating an elevator for loading planed off material directly into transport lorries.
11. The Contractor shall arrange for industrial safety helmets to BS EN 397: 1995 to be
provided for use by all personnel on site, including Sub-Contractor's staff, who could be in
danger of head injury. The Contractor shall be expected to ensure that all personnel on site
wear helmets when necessary.
12. All vehicles which are used in connection with the highways works shall, unless agreed
with the Employer, be equipped with a functioning revolving or flashing amber beacon
whilst operating within the specified working area.
Traffic Safety and Control Officer
13. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with the name and 24 hour contact details for
the Traffic Safety and Control Officer, responsible for the maintenance of signs, lamps and
other safety measures and shall notify him of any change.
Carriageways
14. The following table shows Standard and Restricted carriageway widths for different types
of traffic. The standard widths are designed to maintain access for buses and heavy goods
vehicles, and must be provided wherever practicable. Where this is not practicable and
Page 105 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
where your risk assessment concludes that it is appropriate to do so, restricted lane widths
are permissible. If you are intending to use restricted lane widths that will prevent the
passage of HGVs and buses, a suitable diversion route for these vehicles will need to be
agreed with the Employer and bus operator.
Standard: Normal traffic
Restricted: Cars and light
including
vehicles
buses and HGVs
only
Two-way working
6.75 m minimum
5.5 m minimum
Shuttle working
3.25–3.50 m desirable width range
3.25 m desirable minimum width
3.0 m absolute minimum
2.5 m absolute minimum
15. The desirable width for shuttle working with normal traffic (i.e. including buses and HGVs)
lies between 3.25 and 3.5 m. This range avoids certain widths that create opportunities for
unsafe overtaking of cyclists, and is based on Department for Transport guidance.
(Research found that for widths between 2.75 and 3.25 m, most cars could overtake
cyclists, but with reduced safety. Similarly, it found that for widths between 3.5 and 3.75 m
it was possible for HGVs to overtake cyclists, but again with reduced safety.) Consideration
must be given to this before deciding to use widths other than 3.25–3.50 m for normal traffic
in shuttle working. Where shuttle working is restricted to cars and light vehicles only, the
upper bound of 3.50 m (which is aimed at preventing HGVs from overtaking cyclists) is not
relevant, and a desirable minimum only is given.
16. Wherever changes of level occur between temporary and permanent carriageways they
shall be affected by ramps of gradient not steeper than 1 in 3.
17. Where temporary bridging is used it shall, where reasonably practicable, be constructed
with the deck flush with the adjacent road surface. It shall be designed in accordance with
BS 5400 Part 2:2006 and the relevant DfT BEs and BDs. The bridge deck shall have a
surface of material to be approved by the Employer and shall have a clear width of between
3.25m and 3.5m for one-way operation or a minimum of 6.75m for two-way traffic. All
temporary bridging shall be fitted with sound-deadening packing and surfacing to the
approval of the Employer.
Footways, Pedestrians, Cyclists and Vulnerable Road Users
18. Pedestrian access to public transport services and adequate facilities for bus queues
shall be provided and maintained at all times. Routes for pedestrians shall be clearly
defined and signposted and free from hazards and obstructions. The surfaces shall be
firm, clean and even.
19. Requirements for pedestrians are stated in paras. 8.54, 8.55, 8.56 of Chapter 8 (TSM)
including making provision for the visually impaired. Road works signs (FIG 8.1) and
Keep Left/Right signs (FIG 8.18) shall not be used in conjunction with signing for footway
works.
20. Routes for pedestrians shall be clearly defined and signposted and kept free from hazards
and obstructions at all times. The surfaces shall be firm, clean, even and maintained at all
times in good condition. Routes which adjoin works or other hazards shall be bounded by
Page 106 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
a fence or barrier as described above.
21. Alternative routes for pedestrians shall be of the shortest practicable length and, wherever
possible, shall be kept at least 1.8 metres wide to allow for the passage of prams and
wheelchairs and should never be less than 1.2 metres wide. Changes in levels in pedestrian
routes shall be affected by ramps of gradient not steeper than 1 in 10.
22. On roads where one footway is to be closed, warning and direction signs showing a suitable
crossing place to the other footway shall be provided. If no suitable dropped kerbs are
available a temporary ramp shall be provided at each side of the carriageway. Suitable
steps shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent vehicles from parking at crossing points.
23. Where pedestrians are directed on to the carriageway of a road, timber baulks shall also
be provided on the traffic side of the diversion route. These routes shall be lighted during
the hours of darkness to the standard specified in Chapter 8. The timber baulks shall be
300mm x 300mm and painted alternative red and white bands.
24. Pedestrian access to all premises and public transport shall be maintained at all times and
proper facilities shall be provided and maintained for bus queues. Where a bus stop has
to be temporarily re-sited due to the execution of the works, the Contractor shall arrange
with Transport for London (Buses) for the necessary signing.
25. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions to ensure that the needs of the visually
impaired or other special need road users, elderly and persons with prams or wheelchairs
are met in the vicinity of the Works. All openings and other obstructions shall be guarded
for their full extent with a continuous rigid fence or barrier to protect the visually
handicapped. The fence or barrier shall be at least 1 metre in height and shall incorporate
a rigid tapping rail for the blind or partially sighted, approximately 150mm above ground
level. Plastic tape or bunting supported by road pins will not be an acceptable substitute.
Temporary Traffic Control
26. Manually operated "Stop-Go" boards shall only be permitted if agreed by the Employer.
27. Portable traffic signals shall comply with the requirements of clause 164AR and Appendix
12/5.
Temporary Traffic Orders
28. Temporary Traffic Orders are required when a road is closed to traffic or when a suspension
of bus lanes, a suspension of parking restrictions, a ban of right or left turns, or when a
contraflow is in operation. Temporary Traffic Orders, required under the Road Traffic
Regulation Act 1984, shall be arranged by the Employer. Applications, together with all
supporting documentation, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer with the
appropriate notice. For emergencies, an Emergency Traffic Notice may be applied for. The
following notice periods apply:
i) Amending or making Section 14(1) Traffic Orders 8 weeks
ii) Making Section14 (2) Emergency Traffic Notices 24 hours
Page 107 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
iii) Authorisation of non-prescribed signs 12 weeks
iv) Authorisation of temporary signal control 4 weeks
Advanced Notification of Works Signs 29. Where the Employer considers works are likely to cause disruption the Contractor shall
instructed to erect Advanced Notification Signs in accordance with Appendix 1/21.
Site Information Boards
30. At all sites site information boards shall be displayed on each approach to the works.
31. The boards shall give the name of the Employer, the Contractor, and the Contractor’s
telephone number which can be contacted in emergencies. It may contain other
information, for instance an explanation of why the works are being done, or how long it will
take. Such additional information is encouraged where practical. A completion date should
normally be included if the works are expected to continue for more than a month.
32. The boards may also incorporate the site permit number to avoid unnecessary signs.
33. All boards shall be cleaned, maintained and take down on completion of the works.
Traffic Signal Support Teams 34. The Contractor shall provide 2 person or 3 person support teams to Transport for London
and the local electricity supply company or their respective subcontractors in connection
with traffic signal works. Each team shall include a foreman knowledgeable of traffic signal
infrastructure and attendance works.
35. The teams shall have a vehicle, PPE, hand tools and a compressor with breaker, to carry
out civil tasks associated with traffic signal installation.
36. Teams shall be available to attend any site on the Employer’s Road Network during Normal
Working Hours.
Page 108 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/18: TEMPORARY DIVERSION OF TRAFFIC
General
1. Where the Contractor proposes to construct a temporary diversion for traffic as part of his
intended traffic safety and management measures, he shall submit an outline of his
proposals to the Employer for their agreement and consultation with the Police.
2. The Contractor shall submit a formal application to the Employer or other appropriate
authorities e.g. adjacent boroughs or Transport for London for temporary traffic orders,
allowing such time as is stated in Appendix 1/17 for the orders to be made and notices to
be published.
3. The standard and siting of every temporary diversion for traffic shall be suitable in all
respects for the class or classes of traffic using it, and its width shall be not less than that
of the existing street.
4. The Contractor shall not close any part of any street or public way, or occupy any land for
materials, without first obtaining the permission of the Employer, and shall not continue to
keep closed such portion of any street or public way or continue to occupy such land
beyond the time for which such permission has been given.
5. Wherever a temporary diversion of traffic is introduced there shall be on site a person
competent in maintaining the diversion in safe operation throughout its duration.
Area Wide Traffic Management Diversions
6. Area wide diversion of traffic may be approved by the Employer and Police for significant
and disruptive works and other third party events. Area wide diversion of traffic shall
mean diversion of vehicular traffic onto roads where no other works associated with a
scheme are taking place.
7. Approvals requirements in relation to area wide traffic management diversions are similar
to those for other traffic management proposals, provided in Appendix 1/17.
8. The nature of diversion whether area wide or otherwise shall not in any way change the
Contractor’s responsibilities as regards traffic safety and management during the works.
Page 109 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/19: ROUTING OF VEHICLES
1. Construction traffic should be routed so as to avoid residential areas as much as is
possible. Construction traffic should be so routed as to avoid using school roads during
school hours.
2. The Employer may, at his discretion, instruct the Contractor on routes to be used by the
Contractor and his Subcontractors when travelling to and from a site. In some
circumstances, the Employer may place restrictions on the allowable routes, for example,
on larger schemes or Tasks where the movement of plant or materials is significant, or
where a school, town centre or other sensitive area should be avoided.
Page 110 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/21: INFORMATION BOARDS Information Board Type 1
1. For larger projects the Contractor shall, where instructed by the Employer, provide, erect,
clean, maintain and remove on completion Information Boards Type 1.
2. The sign shall include the name of the project, name of the Employer, name of the
contractor, name and logo of the funding organization (if different from the Employer),
names of any other partners and phone numbers for the Employer and Contractor for use
both during normal working hours and outside normal working hours.
3. Details of the sign face for individual projects will be provided by the Employer.
4. Information boards Type 1 shall be approved by the Employer and shall be constructed
so as to be free-standing, or fixed to a post or posts as directed by the Employer. The
sign face size shall any size up to 1800mm x 1200mm.
5. See Standard Detail 100-1.
Information Board Type 2
6. For projects impacting road users, residents or businesses, the Contractor shall, where
instructed by the Employer, provide, erect, clean, maintain and remove on completion
Information Boards Type 2.
7. Information Board Type 2 shall comprise a sign to Diagram 7003.1 in Traffic Sign Manual
and General Directions 2016 or Variant agreed by the Employer.
8. Details of the sign face for individual projects will be provided by the Employer.
9. Information boards Type 1 shall be approved by the Employer and shall be constructed
so as to be free-standing, or fixed to a post or posts as directed by the Employer. The
sign face size shall any size up to 1800mm x 1200mm.
10. See Standard Detail 100-2.
Site Information Boards
11. Site information boards complying with the requirements of Appendix 1/17 shall be
provided at all sites and should be included in rates – see Method of Measurement.
A3 Site Notices
12. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall print, laminate, erect and remove
on completion A4 or A3 site notices of any description provide by the Employer.
13. Notices shall be fixed to lamp columns traffic sign posts or other suitable street furniture
by means of self locking plastic cable ties.
Page 111 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/22: PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
1. The Contractor shall keep before / progress / after photos of each site throughout the
contract period. The photos should be electronic in digital format of 5-megapixel
resolution and should placed in Confirm and associated with agreed assets or sent to the
Employer through an agreed medium on a monthly basis.
2. Photographs shall record:
• works and features associated with the site before, during and on completion of the
works
• when working adjacent to private property, the composition of the photographs shall
include all private frontages, all front hardstandings, all crossovers, all highway
boundary walls and fences, and any other relevant features
• all defects or damage identified and all subsequent works or repairs carried out under
the contract
• where work is to be covered up on completion, the status and condition of the works
before it is covered up in order to adequately demonstrate that the work has been
completed in accordance with the Employer’s requirements and meets the necessary
quality criteria
3. The Contractor shall ensure that, before leaving site, the photographs are clear and
legible. Any blurred or otherwise defective photographs shall be retaken.
Page 112 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/23:
RISKS TO HEALTH AND SAFETY
General
1. The Contractor shall at all times comply with the provisions of Health and Safety legislation
and, in particular, the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2007, the
Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974, and the Management of Health and Safety at Work
Regulations 1999, and shall take account of the latest issues of Construction Safety
Manuals, European Safety Directives, etc.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate measures are taken to protect his employees,
road users, Employer’s staff and others from the risks that are associated with the site and
activities undertaken thereupon. If, in the opinion of a member of the Employer’s staff,
possessing the necessary identification, the Contractor is causing danger to the public, that
officer has the authority to require immediate remedial action. Upon compliance with the
instruction, the Contractor shall then contact the Employer to report the instructions given
and the actions taken.
3. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with a statement of his health and safety policy
made pursuant to the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 Sections 2 and 3 or any relevant
safety regulation. This statement shall have regard to, and take account of, current
legislation and regulations. The Contractor shall review his health and safety policy and
safety working procedures as often as may be necessary and in the light of changing
legislation or working practices, and shall notify the Employer in writing of any such
revisions.
4. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with information on his management
arrangements for health and safety, providing an organisation chart and detail on individual
roles and responsibilities.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that his employees are provided with an adequate and suitable
supply of protective clothing and other protective equipment as conditions may require. The
equipment and clothing shall comply with the appropriate British and/or European
Standard. The Contractor shall instruct his employees in the use of protective equipment
and clothing and it shall be maintained in a fit condition. The Contractor shall ensure that
protective clothing is effectively worn. The Contractor shall adopt a hierarchy of control
reducing the need for protective equipment/clothing other than where such
equipment/clothing is stipulated by legislation or other authoritative guidance.
6. The Contractor shall place warning signs at prominent locations to advise the public
whenever works are being undertaken, and shall remove signs on completion of the works.
7. The Contractor shall provide, erect, fix, maintain and subsequently remove, all protections,
coverings, fencing, gangways, screens, supports, notice boards, warning flags, road
markings and other devices, lights and watchmen, as may be required by the Employer, or
which may be necessary for the protection or convenience of the general public.
Page 113 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
8. The Contractor shall afford facilities for the Employer to visit and inspect any part of a site
at any time during the contract. The Contractor shall keep and maintain on site all statutory
records and shall make these available for inspection by the Employer.
9. The Contractor shall not permit any equipment, workplace or part of the service which has
a defect or presents a danger to his workforce or the public to be used until such defect
has been remedied.
10. Plant and equipment shall be properly maintained and regularly inspected by a competent
person to ensure it conforms to relevant safety regulations (Provision and Use of Work
Equipment Regulations 1998), manufacturer’s Contractor shall notify the Employer of his
arrangements for the statutory and routine inspections and tests of plant and equipment. If
no safety regulations apply, the Contractor shall ensure that the plant and equipment is
designed and protected so that it operates safely and without risk of causing injury.
11. All Site Instructions from the Employer or any of his authorised representatives, concerning
health and safety of operatives or road users shall be complied with as specified in the
Instruction(s). Unless action is taken as directed, the Employer may provide all such
materials, plant and labour as are necessary, in his opinion necessary to achieve safe
operation, and all the costs of hiring, carrying, placing, maintaining and arranging will be
charged to the Contractor or be recovered from monies which become due to the
Contractor.
12. Before subcontracting any part of the contract, the Contractor shall ascertain that any
Subcontractor is competent and experienced in works and duties of the type to be
undertaken, and any environment or circumstances he is likely to face, and that the
Subcontractor's policy and methods with respect to safe working are not inferior in any way
to, or in conflict with, those of the Contractor.
13. The Contractor shall inform the Employer as soon as becoming aware of any visits from
Enforcing Authorities (Health and Safety Executive (HSE) or Local Authority Environmental
Health (EH) Department), prosecution or pending or likely prosecution of the Contractor for
any offence pertaining to the health and safety of his employees or of other persons, or of
any conviction on such prosecution, and shall provide the Employer with such further
information and documents as the Employer may require.
14. The Contractor shall ensure that accurate records are kept of any accident, near miss or
other dangerous occurrences relating to health and safety, whether personal injury or
damage to property. The Contractor shall fully investigate any accident or near miss and
shall immediately forward to the Employer copies of any documents related thereto. In
addition, the Contractor shall provide a report for the Employer every month summarising
Incidents
Asbestos
15. The Contractor shall have in place a procedure for ensuring that, if asbestos is encountered
or suspected, the ‘Control of Asbestos at Work Regulation’ and all other mandatory
Regulations are complied with. If asbestos is encountered or suspected, the Contractor
shall stop all works in the immediate vicinity of the suspect material and isolate the area.
The Contractor shall notify the Employer (or his site representative) who will instruct the
Page 114 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
appropriate action to be taken. Such action may include testing of the suspect material
(using a UKAS accredited laboratory) and arrangements for the removal of the material, if
necessary, using a licensed contractor. Where a project is notifiable, the Contractor shall
also notify the CDM-C of the location and condition of the asbestos containing material and
include all relevant information in the Health and Safety File.
16. The Contractor shall liaise with the Employer ensuring that all relevant information on the
asbestos containing material, location, condition, type, remedial action, etc is provided in
order for the Employer to update the asbestos register.
Manual Handling and Lifting Equipment
17. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees, including those of Subcontractors, that may
be required to lift or handle materials or equipment, etc, have received manual handling
training and that all operations are covered by a suitable risk assessment.
18. Kerbs and flags shall be installed using mechanical lifting aids, where reasonably
practicable, such that the health and safety of the kerb/flag layer or any assistant is not
compromised.
19. All crane/lifting vehicle operatives shall be trained by an approved instructor in the safe
operation of the crane/lifting arm. The Contractor shall provide the Certificate" and his
employees shall carry a copy of their certificates at all times when engaged on the contract.
20. Lift vehicles shall be used in a safe manner in order to ensure the safety of other road
users, pedestrians, the operators and adjacent property. Lift vehicles shall be used only in
ways suitable for the purpose intended and shall comply with all relevant Regulations,
Specifications and Codes of Practice.
21. All lifting equipment and accessories for lifting shall comply with the requirements of the
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998.
Air Quality and Substances Hazardous to Health
22. The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer is notified of any substances hazardous to
health which may be used in connection with the contract. Full information, including
manufacturers' hazard data sheets and the Contractor’s own COSHH assessment, shall
be provided by the Contractor to the Employer for approval 28 days prior to the use of any
substance hazardous to health under COSHH Regulations 2004.
23. All work shall be planned to avoid generating dust. Where dust is generated and it is
practical to do so, a water bowser, or other suitable dust suppressant or mechanical dust
extractor, shall be on site to enable dust to be controlled. For minor cutting with hand tools,
a fine water spray shall be used.
24. Live carriageways and footways shall be protected from dust or spray arising from a site
which might otherwise reduce visibility. The Contractor shall take measures to prevent
debris, dust, spray or other materials from affecting any live carriageway or footway.
Page 115 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
25. The Contractor shall ensure that the protective measures stated in Highways Agency
Advice Note SA 8/94 ‘Use of Substances Hazardous to Health in Highway Construction’,
incorporating Amendment No. 1 dated October 1994, are enforced. The following
substances and activities are likely to be used during the works and may be hazardous to
health:
(a) Bituminous substances;
(b) Proprietary materials or substances; and
(c) Working in and around existing drainage systems.
Working at Height
26. Whenever works above ground level are ordered, the Contractor shall provide safe access
for both his own operatives and those of the Employer. The Contractor shall not use a
ladder to gain access to lighting equipment except in situations where access by scaffolding
or a specialist vehicular mounted platform, cannot be made. Ladders shall be of wood or
other non-conducting material and shall not be reinforced by metal attachments running
along the stiles of the ladder and shall be to the appropriate British or European Standard.
27. Any scaffolding provided shall comply with the requirements of EN 12811and NASC
TG20:08.
28. The Contractor shall ensure that all access plant is maintained in good working order and
serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and he shall maintain
all relevant certificates. All aerial access platform operatives shall be trained by an
approved instructor in the safe operation of the aerial access vehicle. The Contractor shall
provide the Employer with copies of his employees’ "Aerial Access Platform Training
Certificates" and his employees shall carry a copy of their certificate at all times when
engaged on the contract.
29. Every employee of the Contractor shall, when employed upon duties involving the use of a
raised platform, wear a safety harness of the appropriate British/European Standard and in
accordance with current authoritative guidance, e.g. HSE Information Sheet MISC614,
which shall be attached at all times to a secure anchor point on the platform. Where
required, the Contractor shall provide such safety harnesses to the Employer’s staff,
providing instruction on its fit and use.
30. All working at height shall be subject to a suitable risk assessment clearly identifying the
need for working at height and the use of the identified equipment. The risk assessment
shall also clearly identify emergency and rescue arrangements.
31. Each access to a part of the works shall remain in position or be available until the Employer
has inspected that part of the works and has accepted it as satisfactory.
Work in Vicinity of Overhead Lines
32. The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel employed upon the contract are fully
informed with regard to the procedures as laid down by the DNO and National Grid Plc,
and that such personnel are fully equipped and competent to carry out works in the vicinity
of overhead lines.
Page 116 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
33. Lighting columns sited beneath, or adjacent to, high voltage overhead power lines may
have attached to them a "High Voltage" warning notice. The Contractor shall inform all his
employees of the serious danger of elevating any equipment and plant or the working
platform of any lift vehicle in the vicinity of such columns and to the possibility of discomfort
arising from electrostatic effects in certain circumstances. Where the Contractor considers
that such notices should be fitted but are not, he shall notify the Employer in writing.
34. The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles, plant and equipment are effectively electrically
earthed when operating beneath or adjacent to high voltage overhead power lines.
35. The Contractor shall ensure that approved rubber gloves are worn at all times by all staff
when operating beneath or adjacent to high voltage overhead power lines, and that
approved rubber mats are also employed at ground level and within the vehicle platform.
36. The Contractor shall prepare and provide the Employer with a copy of a suitable and
sufficient risk assessment before any works below overhead power lines are undertaken,
particularly where the use of plant/equipment is required to perform the works.
Confined Spaces
37. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, for the duration of the contract, sufficient trained
and certified operatives and specialist equipment for working in confined spaces in order
to be able to conduct confined space entries simultaneously at least two different locations.
38. The Contractor shall implement, maintain and operate a permit to work/enter system. A
permit to enter shall be required for each confined space entry. Permits shall be signed and
dated by the Contractor’s supervisor/manager and detail all procedures for purging,
ventilation, entry and rescue. All works within, and entries to, confined spaces shall be
subject to risk assessment and detailed method statement. Copies of all risk assessments,
method statements and permits shall be maintained on site whilst works within confined
spaces take place, and shall be available to the Employer for inspection on request.
39. The Contractor shall ensure that his permit to enter system includes all personnel who are
entering the confined space. This includes Subcontractors, Employer's Representatives
and others notified to the Contractor by the Employer in addition to the Employer's
Representatives who may from time to time require access to the confined space during
the currency of the works for the purpose of overseeing the works.
40. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Confined Space
Regulations 1997 (SI 1997 No 1713) and Approved Code of Practice (2009: L101).
Storage of Flammable/Explosive Materials
41. No petroleum spirit within the meaning of the Petroleum Consolidation Act 1928 shall be
stored on site without the prior written consent of the Employer. Such consent shall not be
given unless the Contractor has provided copies of all relevant licenses to the Employer.
42. No acetylene, oxygen, propane or other gas cylinders shall be stored on site or within 10
metres of a highway structure without the prior written consent of the Employer.
Page 117 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
43. The Contractor’s arrangements for the safe storage of petroleum and gases shall be fully
described in the Health and Safety Policy and the Contractor shall ensure that such
arrangements are adhered to at all times.
Hot Works
44. All hot works (welding, soldering, flame cutting, disc cutting of metal, etc) shall be subject
to a written risk assessment, method statement and permit to work system. The Contractor
shall maintain suitable first aid and fire fighting equipment on site whist hot works are taking
place and staff shall be trained in its use. Members of the public shall be protected from all
hot works operations and from UV rays generated from welding operations.
45. All compressed gas cylinders used during hot works shall be adequately secured and all
regulators/hoses shall be subject to regular inspection. The Contractor shall maintain
records of inspection and make these available to the Employer upon request.
Page 118 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/24: QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. The Contractor shall operate a comprehensive and effective quality management system
which:-
a) shall include BS EN ISO 9000:2000 quality assurance certification or incorporate its
principles;
b) focuses on the prevention rather than the detection of quality failures and leads to
minimum faults and rectifications;
c) has a flexible, adaptable and innovative approach to service delivery that
incorporates changing customer/user/Employer requirements;
d) takes advantage of all opportunities for innovation and seeks continuous
improvement;
e) incorporates an effective human resource management system which effectively
achieves quality service delivery through people.
2. The Contractor shall operate quality control procedures as part of this system and this
system shall be open to inspection by the Employer.
3. The system shall ensure that all locations and processes involved in service delivery are
well and properly maintained and that the Specification and Contract Conditions are
complied with in all respects. Such a system shall include daily supervision, the carrying
out of frequent inspections, and compliance with the instructions of the Employer.
4. In the event that any reasonable written recommendations concerning the improvement of
such a system are made by the Employer from time to time, such recommendations shall
forthwith be implemented by the Contractor.
5. The Contractor shall during the mobilisation period submit a Contract-specific Quality Plan
for acceptance by the Employer. This Quality Plan shall, include resourced site supervision
proposals alongside quality control and testing proposals. The Quality Plan shall be
reviewed and updated at suitable intervals during the Contract. All Quality Plans and
Method Statements shall indicate “hold points” as follows:
• Contractor’s hold points where no further work shall proceed without the written
approval of a designated person of the Contractor’s management, who shall be
named in the Quality Plan;
• Employer’s hold points where no further work shall proceed without the written
permission of a designated representative of the Employer.
6. The Contractor shall note that quality promises made at the time of tender shall be
incorporated in the contract (see Clause 152AR and Appendix 1/41) and ensure systems
are capable of delivering all promises.
Page 119 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/30: CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS IN RELATION TO EMPLOYER’S
CONFIRM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The contractor will be expected to either use or interface to the Employer’s Confirm system
for the tasks listed below: -
1. Jobs of work - Reactive
a. Changing the Status of a Job to reflect the progress
i. Received by Contractor
ii. Programmed
iii. Job Started
iv. Job Suspended (with a reason, such as no access due to parked cars)
v. Job referred back to LBH for advice
vi. Job Completed
vii. Job Completed but needs further action (typically for emergency call-
outs)
b. Entering Activity Dates
i. Actual Start Date and Time
ii. Actual Completion Date and Time
c. Attaching proof of works
i. Photo of reason if works can’t be started
ii. Before works start photo(s) with date and time stamp embedded
iii. After works completed photo(s) with date and time stamp embedded
iv. Separate after works completed photo of general location and showing
the repaired defect
2. Jobs of work – Scheme and Minor Works (including non-reactive Lump Sum
Electrical Works)
a. Changing the Status of a Job to reflect the progress
i. Received by Contractor
ii. Programmed
iii. Job Started
iv. Job Suspended (with a reason, such as no access due to parked cars)
v. Job referred back to LBH for advice
vi. Job Completed
vii. Job Completed but needs further action (typically for emergency call-
outs)
b. Entering Activity Dates
i. Actual Start Date and Time
ii. Actual Completion Date and Time
c. Attaching proof of works
i. Photo of reason if works can’t be started
ii. Before works start photo(s) with date and time stamp embedded
iii. After works completed photo(s) with date and time stamp embedded
3. Jobs of work – Street Lighting Night Patrols
a. Where the Contractor can “find and fix” a fault: -
i. Creating a Job of work against an existing lighting inventory asset (which
will already have a location) or where the asset is missing from the
Page 120 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
inventory, against a street and with a location and type
ii. Add a fault type, such as Out of Light.
iii. Using Schedules of Rates (SORs) to record the type of materials or
resources used and quantities
iv. Entering Activity Dates for Actual Start Date and Time and Actual
Completion Date and Time
v. Where of use (so excluding lights-out for example), after works
completed photo(s) with date and time stamp embedded
b. Where the Contractor can only make safe a fault: -
i. Creating a Job of Work as per a.i, a.ii and a.v. above
ii. Allocating it to the appropriate decision maker whether Contractor or
Employer
4. Payment Applications
a. Retrieving a Completed Job and adding application values
i. Adding the Contractor’s Request/Invoice number
ii. Requesting an interim payment (typically for major works)
iii. Using “Pay As” where the Employer’s estimate of cost matches the
Contractor’s application value
iv. Entering Contractor’s SOR measurements where they do not match the
Employer’s estimate
v. Entering additional SORs and values where appropriate
vi. Zeroing SORs that haven’t been used
b. Re-measurement process
i. Entering re-measured quantities and/or SORs after site meetings with
Employer’s representative
5. Street Work Permit Applications (London Permit Scheme)
a. The contractor will either be an Organisation working for the Haringey
Organisational Group or an Organisation in their own right and will be required
to do the following – either directly in Confirm or through their own street works
system: -
i. Creation of Street Works Permit applications where required using the
appropriate Permit Type for the works requested i.e. Major, Standard,
Minor & Immediate and all in accordance with the London Permits
Scheme
ii. Adding accurate map locations and extents of works, model conditions
of working and any associated documentation
iii. Progressing a Permit through the usual stages.
iv. Receiving and responding to any Street Works Inspection Notices
v. Receiving and responding to Fixed Penalty Notices for non-compliance
with a granted Permit
6. Asset Inventory
a. Where the Contractor is required to manage and update certain parts of the
Employer’s asset inventory, this will include the following tasks: -
i. For existing asset inventory items: amending textual information for
changes to attributes and their values, and textual and geo-locations
where found to be wrong and resulting from jobs of work.
Page 121 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
ii. For new asset inventory items: adding textual information for attributes
and their values, asset location, geo-location on electronic maps and
any other data that is contained within the Asset Inventory that will be
provided during mobilization.
iii. Deactivation of any existing asset inventory items which cease to exist
as a result of any type of work.
Page 122 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/40: PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT & MEASUREMENT (KPIs)
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI T1
Timely delivery
Emergency Attendance where appropriate % calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
action taken within 2 hours
EA Works Orders where appropriate
continuous
action was taken within 2 hours by the
improvement
✓
✓
total number of EA Works Orders.
to achieve
100%
KPI T2
Timely delivery
Scheme works completed to programme
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
Scheme Works Orders where start date,
continuous
any key dates and completion dates are
improvement
achieved in accordance with programme
in excess of
✓
✓
by the total number of Scheme Works
90%
Orders
KPI T3
Timely delivery
Non-Scheme works completed within 28
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
days
Non-Scheme Works Orders completed
continuous
within 28 days by the total number of
improvement
✓
✓
Non-Scheme Works Orders
in excess of
90%
KPI T4
Timely delivery
Priority response 1B works completed
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
within 7 days
priority 1B works repaired within 7
continuous
calendar days by the total number of
improvement
✓
✓
priority 1B works
in excess of
90%
Page 123 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI T5
Timely delivery
Lighting Unit Fault Repair completed
% calculated by dividing total number of
Continuous
within 3 days
lighting unit faults repaired within 3
improvement
working days by the total number of
in excess of
✓
lighting unit faults
90%
KPI Q1
Quality delivery
Single visit fix during Emergency
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
Attendance
Emergency Attendance Works Orders
continuous
completed in first site visit by the total
improvement
✓
✓
number of Emergency Attendance Works in excess of
Orders
20%
KPI Q2
Quality delivery
Right first time schemes
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
Scheme based Works Orders requiring
continuous
no snagging or repeat visits by the total
improvement
✓
✓
number of Scheme basedWorks Orders
in excess of
75%
KPI Q3
Quality delivery
Right first time non-scheme works
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
non-scheme based Works Orders
continuous
requiring no snagging or repeat visits by
improvement
✓
✓
the total number of non-scheme based
in excess of
Works Orders
95%
KPI Q4
Quality delivery
Potholes repaired within 7 days
% calculated by dividing total number of
Continuous
potholes permanently repaired within 7
improvement
days by the total number of pothole
in excess of
✓
priority 1B Works Orders
95%
Page 124 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI Q5
Quality delivery
Lighting Units working
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
lighting units operating correctly by the
continuous
total number of lighting units
improvement
✓
in excess of
98%
KPI Q6
Quality delivery
Time to fix Lighting Units
Average number of days to replace all
Demonstrate
recorded lighting unit faults (where the
continuous
number of calendar days for each fault is
improvement
the difference between the day the fault
and lower than
is first notified to or identified by the
7 days
✓
Contractor and the date rectified
inclusive, so for a fault repaired on the
day notified the number of calendar days
would be 1)
KPI Q7
Quality delivery
Night Scouts carried out to agreed
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
programme
units where night scouts were carried out continuous
to the agreed programme by the total
improvement
number of units where night scouting
in excess of
✓
was programmed (nb: night scouts where 95%
not programmed shall not be included in
monthly measure)
Page 125 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI Q8
Quality delivery
Cleaning and cyclic maintenance carried
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
out to agreed programme
units where cleaning or cyclic
continuous
maintenance were carried out to the
improvement
agreed programme by the total number
in excess of
of units where cleaning or cyclic
95%
✓
maintenance was programmed (nb:
cleaning and cyclic maintenance where
not programmed shall not be included in
monthly measure)
KPI Q9
Quality delivery
Cyclic inspection and testing carried out to
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
agreed programme
units where inspections or testing were
continuous
carried out to the agreed programme by
improvement
the total number of units where
in excess of
inspections or testing was programmed
95%
✓
(nb: cleaning and cyclic maintenance
where not programmed shall not be
included in monthly measure)
KPI E1
Economic Delivery
Application accuracy
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
works orders where the final value
continuous
exceeds the agreed final application on
improvement
✓
✓
final measure by more than 10% by the
in excess of
total number of works orders
90%
Page 126 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI E2
Economic Delivery
Final application on final measure
% calculated by dividing total number of Demonstrate
presented on time
final applications on final measure
continuous
submitted within 28 days of completion
improvement
✓
✓
of a scheme by the total number of
in excess of
schemes.
95%
KPI E3
Economic Delivery
Early warning indicator
% calculated by dividing total number of Demonstrate
schemes where an early warning was
continuous
issued by the total number of schemes
improvement
✓
✓
where an early warning should have
in excess of
been issued in accordance with the
95%
contract.
Page 127 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI P1
HSE & Process Delivery
Reduce injuries
This Performance Indicator will measure
Demonstrate
both the Accident Incidence Rate (AIR)
continuous
and the Accident Frequency Rate (AFR)
improvement
for injuries to Contractors (and Road
against
Users) that take place at sites at which
baseline
the Contractor is providing the service.
agreed during
AIR - The Accident Incidence Rate is
mobilisation
based on the total number of RIDDOR
period
reportable incidents and injuries at sites
within the Affected Property under
control and/or supervision of the
✓
✓
Contractor per 100,000 employees over
12 consecutive reporting months. AFR -
The Accident Frequency Rate is based on
the total number of Contractor incidents
and injuries at sites within the Affected
Property under control and/or
supervision of the Contractor per
100,000 hours worked over 12
consecutive reporting months.
KPI P2
HSE & Process Delivery
TMA and permitting requirements
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
Works Orders completed fully in
continuous
accordance with permitting and TMA
improvement
✓
✓
requirements by the total number of
in excess of
Works Orders
95%
Page 128 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
KPI Reference Theme
Requirement
Measure
Target
Highway Lighting
KPI P3
HSE & Process Delivery
Appropriate use of CONFIRM system to
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
store record information
works orders where the specified before
continuous
and after photographs are provided in
improvement
CONFIRM within 7 days of completion of
in excess of
✓
✓
the works by the total number of works
90%
orders
KPI P4
HSE & Process Delivery
H&S File Information (including as built
% calculated by dividing total number of
Demonstrate
drawings)
schemes where H&S file information
continuous
(including "as built" drawings) is provided improvement
in CONFIRM within 7 days of completion
in excess of
✓
✓
of the works by the total number of
90%
schemes
KPI P5
HSE & Process Delivery
Construction waste reused or recycled
% calculated by dividing total volume of
Demonstrate
construction waste reused or recycled by continuous
the total volume of construction waste
improvement
in excess of
✓
✓
95% Highways
50%
Notes
1. All indicators to be reported both monthly and cummulatively
2. Targets indicate minimum that is expected under the contract but actual targets will be agreed by the Contractor / Employer on an annual basis
Page 129 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/41: QUALITY PROMISE REGISTER
To be completed by the Employer and agreed with the Contractor during the mobilisation
period.
Page 130 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 1/42: DEPOT AVAILABILITY
Not Used.
Page 131 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 2/3: RETENTION OF MATERIALS ARISING FROM SITE CLEARANCE
1. Instructions on retention of materials arising from site clearance will be provided to the
Contractor at the time individual Works are ordered.
Page 132 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 2/4: EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING
1. No explosives shall be used in connection with any work under the contract.
Page 133 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 2/5: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the protective measures stated in Highways Agency
Advice Note SA 8/94 ‘Use of Substances Hazardous to Health in Highway Construction’,
incorporating Amendment No. 1 dated October 1994, are enforced. The following
substances and activities are likely to be used during the works and may be hazardous to
health:
(a) Bituminous substances;
(b) Proprietary materials or substances; and
(c) Working in and around existing drainage systems.
2. Specific information on hazardous materials identified by the Employer will be provided to
the Contractor at the time Works are ordered.
3. Should the Contractor identify any hazardous material in the course of the works he should
immediately inform the Employer and advise of measures proposed to avoid or control risks
associated with the hazardous materials.
4. The Contractor shall adapt the method of working to avoid cross contamination due to
hazardous materials and shall minimise the total volume of hazardous material that needs
to be removed from any site.
Page 134 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 2/6: SITE CLEARANCE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Removal of Trees and Stumps 1. Felled trees, hedges or bushes shall have their stumps grubbed up or ground down below
ground level and roots removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Holes left by removal
of the stumps or roots shall, within one week, be temporarily reinstated with sandy topsoil
(left proud for settlement) in grass verge areas or compacted Type 1 granular material in
paved areas, where a tree is to be replanted in the same position. Where a tree is not to
be replanted in the same position, the ground will be permanently reinstated with material
similar in construction to match neighbouring surfaces, within one week of the trees
removal.
2. All work must be in accordance with BS5837:2012 Trees in relation to design, demolition
and construction - Recommendations, the Department for Transport’s ‘Roots for Routes’:
Guidelines on Highway Works and Trees’ and comply with Volume 4 of the National Joint
Utilities Group (NJUG) Guidelines for The Planning, Installation and Maintenance of Utility
Apparatus in Proximity to Trees (Issue 2). In particular care shall be taken not to damage
or disturb underground plant and equipment. The Contractor shall be liable for the cost
incurred in repair of any damage associated with tree removal works.
Page 135 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 3/1: FENCING, GATES AND STILES
Plastic Coated Chainlink Fences
1. Plastic coated chainlink fences shall be 1.5. 1.8 or 2.1 metres high complying with Standard
Detail 300-1 and Highway Construction Details Drawing H11.
Timber Close Boarded Fences
2. Timber close boarded fences shall be 1.2. 1.5 or 1.8 metres high complying with Standard
Detail 300-3 and Highway Construction Details Drawing H14. Fences shall be supplied and
treated as specified in Clauses 304 and 311.
Timber Palisade Fences
3. Timber palisade fences shall be 0.9. 1.2 or 1.5 metres high complying with Standard Detail
300-3 and Highway Construction Details Drawing H14. Fences shall be supplied and
treated as specified in Clauses 304 and 311.
Oak Post and Rail Fences
4. Oak post and rail fences shall be 1.05 metres high complying with Standard Detail 300-4.
Fences shall be supplied and treated as specified in Clauses 304 and 311.
Concrete Post and Panel Fences
5. Concrete post and panel fences shall be Allen Concrete or equivalent approved by the
Engineer, 0.9, 1.2, 1.5, 1.8, 2.1 or 2.4 metres high.
Timber Close Boarded Gates
6. Timber close boarded fences shall be 1.2. 1.5 or 1.8 metres high complying with Standard
Detail 300-2. Gates shall have posts, hinges, drop bolts and sliding bar for heavy duty
padlock. All gates shall have a retainer in the open position. Double gates shall have two
centre stops and two retainers in the open position. Timber gates shall have ironmongery
as shown on the Drawings. Gates shall be supplied and treated as specified in Clauses
304 and 311.
Galvanised Single Barrier Gate
7. Galvanised single barrier gate shall comply with Standard Detail 300-4. Gates shall have
posts, hinges, drop bolts and sliding bar for heavy duty padlock. All gates shall have a
retainer in the open position.
Page 136 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
8. All steel fencing and gates shall be galvanised and supplied with a protective system
comprising a black polyester powder coating (approved by the Employer) or painted black
(or other colour as instructed by the Employer) in accordance with the requirements of
Appendix 19/6.
9. The Contractor /Fencing Supplier shall be required to undertake all the necessary layout
checks on site prior to the preparation of the shop drawings for the Employer's approval.
10. The Contractor shall supply all fixings, bolts, expansion bolts, washers, lugs, cleats, or any
other fixing required for complete installation of railings, fencing, and gates.
11. All welds shall be a minimum of 6 mm fillet welds compatible with steel grating panels and
mild steel posts, i.e. there shall be no electrode potential difference between the weld and
the welded material.
12. 10 mm diameter zinc plated security bolts shall be used, unless agreed otherwise with the
Employer.
13. Washers shall be used with all bolt head and nuts. Size of washer shall be suitable for the
diameter of bolt and bolt hole. Excessive bolt projection shall be cut as directed by
Employer.
14. With the exception of the security bolts, all bolts shall be tack welded. Bolt projection shall
be sufficient to enable tack welding to be carried out. Excessive bolt projection shall be cut
as directed by Employer.
Foundations for Permanent Fencing
15. Unless indicated otherwise in drawings all foundations for fencing shall be ST3 (C12/15)
concrete or above of minimum size 450 x 450 by 600mm deep.
16. Break out of hard surfaces and excavation for post holes shall be kept to the minimum
practicable surface area, and the existing finished surface edges around post holes shall
be cut to form a neat square to receive concrete surround. A permanent reinstatement to
any posthole shall have all traces of concrete removed from grass surfaces, subsoil/topsoil
(min. topsoil 150mm) compacted in the hole and the finish shall match the surrounding
surface, making good with existing surfaces.
Page 137 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 4/1: PEDESTRIAN GUARDRAILS
1. Pedestrian Guardrails shall comply with the Streetscape Manual unless otherwise directed
by the Employer. The following are guardrails are included in the Schedule of Rates:
Type 1
Visirail, type shown in standard detail 400-1
Type 2a, 2b or 2c
Fabrikat, type shown in standard detail 400-2
Type 3a, 3b or 3c
Harrington, type shown in standard detail 400-3
Type 4a, 4b, 4c,
Stratford 75 v2 with Trafford posts to Streetscape Manual, type
4d, 4e or 4f
shown in standard detail 400-4
Type 5a, 5b, 5c,
Linx, type shown in standard detail 400-5
5d, 5e, 5f, 5g, 5h,
5j or 5k
Type 6
Linx 200 Wood Green Town Centre 3/4 height, posts with
stainless steel cap to Streetscape Manual, type shown in
standard detail 400-6
Type 7
Medcraft post and rail to Streetscape Manual, type shown in
standard detail 400-7
2. Guardrails shall match existing or be as described within scheme specific information.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the measurement on site and identification of any
special lengths and will need to be fabricated to establish any guardrail rake to suit the
slope of any paved surface.
4. Guardrails shall be erected to flowing alignment both in plan and elevation.
5. Unless indicated otherwise in drawings all foundations for guardrailing shall be ST2
concrete of minimum size 300 x 300 by 350mm thickness.
6. Following erection of guardrails footways and other surfaces should be reinstated to match
the existing.
7. All pedestrian guardrails shall be galvanised and supplied with a protective system
comprising a black polyester powder coated system (approved by the Employer) or painted
black (or other colour as instructed by the Employer) in accordance with the requirements
of Appendix 19/6.
Page 138 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/1: DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS
Concrete, Brickwork and Mortars 1. All concrete used in items of drainage shall have sulphate-resisting cement.
2. Bedding materials for all new, reset, adjusted or replaced frames, gratings or covers shall
be as follows:
(i)
Mortar complying with Clause 2404 cement mortar designation (i) shall be
used for chambers or gullies in the footway; and
(ii)
quick setting epoxy mortar, or other proprietary bedding materials approved by
the Employer for chambers or gullies in the carriageway.
Quick setting mortars shall have the following properties:
(a) the material shall be non-shrink. Use of other materials may be considered in
consultation with the Employer;
(b) the material shall have a minimum workable life of 15 minutes;
(c) the compressive strength of the material shall exceed 30N/mm2 in 3 hours (Test
Method in accordance with BS 6319: Part 2);
(d) the tensile strength of the material shall exceed 5N/mm2 in 3 hours (Test Method in
accordance with BS 6319: Part 7);
(e) notwithstanding the above requirements, the use of proprietary bedding
components to different specifications may be permitted subject to approval by the
Employer.
The bedding thickness shall be between 10 mm and 75 mm. Bedding layers greater than
50 mm thick shall be laid in two stages. The first layer shall be no thicker than 40 mm and
must be covered with a proprietary packing material whilst the mortar is workable.
Uniform contact between materials is necessary in a composite bedding layer, and the
proprietary packing material shall be tamped down to ensure even contact with the
bedding. Proprietary packing materials shall be purpose-made of suitable materials. The
Contractor shall ensure that the proposed packing materials are compatible with the
bedding material which it is intended to use. The use of materials such as quarry tiles and
slates as packing materials is not permitted.
3. Underlying brickwork, concrete or mortar in bedding, chamber or shaft walls shall be
adjusted to the required level and the surface prepared to receive new construction. Where
necessary, reinforced concrete cover slabs shall be broken out. Precast concrete cover
slabs shall be carefully lifted off and cleaned ready for re-use.
New construction in brickwork or concrete shall be built on the existing chamber or shaft
and shall conform to the relevant requirements for new manholes, catchpits, gullies and the
like. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer, the existing precast concrete cover slabs
and the existing covers, gratings and frames shall be re-used in the works. ST4 concrete
with sulphate resisting cement shall be used in concrete works. Employering bricks shall
be used in all brickwork.
Page 139 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Brickwork for chambers and gullies shall be built in English Bond unless otherwise
specified. Mortar shall comply with paragraph 2 above.
4. Following installation of new, reset, adjusted or replaced frames, gratings or covers the
installations shall not be exposed to any load or disturbance until the bedding material has
attained sufficient strength. After installation the frame and cover shall be flush with the
road surface. The joint between the reinstated and existing materials shall be sealed with
bituminous material.
5. Following installation of new, reset, adjusted or replaced frames, gratings or covers
reinstatement shall then be undertaken in accordance with Clause 706 of the SHW to match
the existing surfaces.
Manholes and Chambers
6. Manholes and chambers shall comply with Standard Details 500-3, 500-4, 500-6 and 500-
9. Manhole and chambers referred to in the Schedule of Rates are
Manhole Type
Standard Detail
Characteristics
Manhole Type A
500-3
Brick depth to soffit less than
1 metre
Manhole Type B
500-3
Brick depth to soffit between
1.0 and 1.5 metres
Manhole Type C
500-6
Precast concrete depth to
soffit less than 1 metre
Manhole Type D
500-6
Precast concrete depth to
soffit between 1.0 and 1.5
metres
Manhole Type E
500-4
Precast concrete depth to
soffit between 1.5 and 3.0
metres
Catchpit Type A
500-4
Precast concrete depth up to
2.5 metres
Catchpit Type B
500-9
Precast concrete depth up to
2.5 metres
Soakaways
7. Soakaways shall comply with Standard Detail 500-12. Specific project requirements will be
selected from items in the Schedule of Rates and provided to the Contractor when Works
are ordered.
Page 140 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Gullies
8. Gullies shall comply with Standard Details 500-5 and 500-9. Gullies referred to in the
Schedule of Rates are
Gully Type
Standard Detail
Characteristics
Trapped Road Gully
500-5
Precast concrete pot
1050mm deep
Chute Road Gully
500-9
Chute Gully
Footpath Gully
500-5
Vitrified clay pot 610mm
deep
Chamber Covers, Gratings and Frames
9. All covers and frames shall be BSI KITEMARKED and certified to the requirements of BS
EN124
10. Covers, gratings and frames referred to in the Schedule of Rates are as follows:
Type
Use
Characteristics
Class D400 Group 4 non
For use in carriageways
Ductile Iron. Non-rocking 3-
rocking chamber cover & and estate roads
point suspension design.
frame,
750 x 750 mm Clear
Opening. 100 mm deep.
Class C250 Group 3
For use in car parks,
Ductile Iron. 900 x 900 mm
chamber cover & frame
forecourts, industrial
Clear Opening. 75 mm
sites and areas with
deep.
slow moving traffic
Class B125 Group 2
For use in pedestrian
Ductile Iron. 600 x 600 mm
chamber cover & frame
areas where only
Clear Opening. 40 mm
occasional vehicular
deep.
access is likely
Recessed D400 chamber
For use in heavily
Ductile Iron. 600 x 600 mm
cover and frame
trafficked paved areas
Clear Opening. 100 mm
deep.
Recessed C250 chamber
For use in car parks,
Ductile Iron. 600 x 600 mm
cover and frame
forecourts, industrial
Clear Opening. 100 mm
sites and areas with
deep.
slow moving traffic
Recessed chamber B125
For use in pedestrian
Galvanised Mild Steel. 600 x
cover and frame
areas where only
600 mm Clear Opening. 85
Page 141 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
occasional vehicular
mm deep.
access is likely
Class D400 Group 4
For use in carriageways
Waterway Area in excess of
hinged cycle friendly
and estate roads
900 cm2. Minimum Depth
gully grate and frame
100mm.
Class D400 Group 4 non
For use in heavily
Waterway Area in excess of
rocking double triangular trafficked carriageways
1,000 cm2. Minimum Depth
gully grate and frame
100mm.
Class D400 Group 4 kerb
For use in pavement
Minimum depth 100mm
inlet grate and frame
kerbs adjacent to
highways
Class C250 Group 3
for use in car parks,
Waterway Area in excess of
hinged cycle friendly
industrial or commercial
700 cm2. Minimum Depth
gully grate and frame
areas carrying slow
75mm.
moving traffic
Cleaning of Existing Drainage Systems
11. For the purpose of cleaning existing drainage systems Normal Working Hours shall be any
time considered suitable by the Contractor (and approved by the Engineer, where the times
are outside Monday to Friday between 0730 and 1800 hours and Saturday between 0730
and 1300 hours). Approvals will be given unless the Engineer believes the proposals may
create a nuisance to residents, businesses or road users.
12. Drainage systems shall be cleaned in accordance with Clause 520. The Employer will give
instructions on cleaning gullies, connections and other drainage systems either through
programmes prepared around Critical Drainage Areas or on a reactive ad-hoc basis.
13. The objective of cleaning any gully shall be to remove all detritus, including needles and
other sharps and maintain or restore serviceability of the gully. Where the contractor
achieves this objective he shall make a record clearly identifying the location of the gully,
and any defects identified whilst on site and submit this to the Employer through CONFIRM
within 7 days. Where it has not been possible to restore serviceability of the gully the
Contractor shall make a site specific record (with photographs) identifying gully location,
any defects identified whilst on site and details of action taken and findings, conclusions
and recommendations for next steps to resolve the problem through CONFIRM within 7
days.
14. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall clean any gully under Emergency
Attendance or Priority Response.
15. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall clean any grated drainage channel
or combined kerb drainage unit.
16. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall clean by any means including high
pressure jetting any piped drainage systems, up to 300 mm internal diameter in accordance
Page 142 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
with Clause 521. To allow for establishment of equipment cleaning piped drainage systems
will be ordered in minimum 10 metre units. The objective of cleaning shall be to restore
serviceability of the drainage system. Where the contractor achieves this objective he shall
make a record clearly identifying the details and submit this to the Employer through
CONFIRM within 7 days. Where it has not been possible to restore serviceability of the
drainage system the Contractor shall provide a site specific record (with photographs)
identifying details of action taken and findings, conclusions and recommendations for next
steps to resolve the problem through CONFIRM within 7 days.
17. Where instructed by the Employer the Contractor shall undertake a CCTV survey of pipes
either stand-alone or contemporary to jetting works taking place. Where a CCTV survey is
requested the Contractor shall provide a digital recording of the survey to the Employer
within 7 days.
18. Where a gully is inaccessible due to parked vehicles the Contractor shall be responsible
for securing access following the requirements of Clause 163AR and revisiting the site at
such time as the gully may be cleaned.
19. Gully records are held in the in the Employer’s Gully Asset Management System in
CONFIRM and the Contractor’s specific obligations as regards updating asset information
are provided in Appendix 5/7.
Page 143 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/2: SERVICE DUCT REQUIREMENTS
1. Design groups for service ducts shall be:
• Service ducts in carriageways
• Service ducts in footways
Cover to ducts in carriageways shall be 600mm minimum unless otherwise
described in drawings or instructed by the Employer. Covers to ducts in footways
shall have a minimum of 450mm cover unless otherwise indicated. Under-kerb
ducts shall extend a minimum of 50mm beyond the carriageway face of the kerb
and a suitable marking pin shall be inserted in the carriageway to mark the duct’s
position.
2. All apparatus shall be installed in accordance with National Joint Utilities Group
(NJUG) publications and guidance and the requirements in Series 500 Drainage
and Service Ducts of this Specification.
3. Ducting arrangements are shown on Standard Detail 500-8. Installation shall
include the provision of draw ropes. Polypropylene draw cords shall have a
breaking weight of 5.5kN and be continuous over their entire length with no joints
or knots, and shall extend one metre from each end of the duct. They shall be
replaced on each cable draw-through so that they can be reused.
4. Ducts for traffic signals shall be 100mm dia thick walled (5mm) low or medium
density polyethylene, coloured orange, with the words “TRAFFIC SIGNALS”
printed in white along the length at intervals not exceeding 1metre. When laid, the
wording shall be uppermost. All lengths shall be jointed or sleeved.
5. All ducts shall be laid in a straight line. In cases where this is not possible, the
deviation from straight shall be via a long radius bend and shall not exceed 35o. If
necessary, a series of straight chords shall be used to negotiate bends with
drawpits at the intersection of each of the chords.
6. All ducts shall be thoroughly brushed and mandrelled to prove no debris or
excessive deflection. Longitudinal and cross-carriageway cable ducts shall be
proved by drawing a wooden or plastic mandrel through as the ducts are laid. Local
ducts from chambers to cabinets shall be proved by drawing through each
completed length of duct a spherical mandrel of diameter 10% less than the
nominal bore of the duct. On the successful completion of each pull the Contractor
shall certify compliance of the duct and immediately plug the duct.
7. Where cables are required to be laid in ducts, the Contractor shall swab through
the duct prior to drawing in the cables and a further draw rope. On completion of
cabling, ducts shall be left with a draw rope in place and resealed with a suitable
material, to adequately seal the ducts against the ingress of foreign matter.
8. Duct trenches should be backfilled as shown in the standard details to the
underside of the road pavement. Reinstatement shall be undertaken in accordance
Page 144 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
with the Employer’s instruction on the basis of reinstatement requirements defined
in Appendix 7/1 and 7/2.
9. Drawpit chambers shall be constructed to Standard Details 500-7.
10. Drawpits referred to in the Schedule of Rates are as follows:
Type
Standard Detail
Characteristics
Type A
500-7
Brick, size 600x450mm
Type B
500-7
Brick, size 600x600mm
Type C
500-7
Brick, size 600x750mm,
Type D
500-7
Brick, size 600x900mm,
Type E
500-7
Brick, size 1220x1220mm,
11. Where trenches and ducting are required, the installation shall be provided with
drawpit chambers so that any cable can be installed or removed without the need
for further civil Employering works. Drawpit chambers shall be provided at the
end of each duct run, where the duct changes direction and on both sides of the
carriageway. Beacon pole pits shall be installed immediately adjacent to each
beacon pole.
12. The existing location of cable drawpit chambers and beacon pole pits will be shown
on the drawings along with proposed additional or new ducts and pits. Where
possible, existing traffic signal ducts shall be used but, where necessary, additional
trenches shall be excavated and ducting installed as follows:
• The Contractor shall excavate a trench in the position as shown on the
drawings unless site conditions are such that a change needs to be made.
In this case the Employers agreement to the change should be obtained
and the drawings shall be marked with the “as-installed” route of the
ducting
• Particular care shall be taken to ensure, where possible, that road crossing
excavations do not interfere with pedestrian crossings, and that wherever
possible ducts and drawpits are routed and sited to avoid areas of
pedestrian activity.
13. The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming latest details of statutory
undertakers’ equipment prior to commencing the works. Prior to any excavation
works on site, all existing services shall be traced using statutory undertakers’
service drawings and cable detection equipment. The services shall be identified
on the surface with biodegradable paint.
Page 145 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/4: FIN DRAINS AND NARROW FILTER DRAINS
1. Filter drain trench and bedding details are shown in Standard Detail 500-2. Specific
project requirements will be selected from items in the Schedule of Rates and
provided to the Contractor when Works are ordered.
Infiltration Trenches
2. Infiltration trenches shall be constructed to the requirements of Standard Detail
500-12 with or without pipes as designed. Specific project requirements will be
selected from items in the Schedule of Rates and provided to the Contractor when
Works are ordered.
Page 146 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/5: COMBINED DRAINAGE AND KERB SYSTEMS
Combined drainage and kerb systems may be required in the works. Details of
combined drainage and kerb systems, where required, will be selected from items in
the Schedule of Rates (Series 1100) and will be provided to the Contractor when
Works are ordered.
Page 147 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/6: LINEAR DRAINAGE CHANNEL SYSTEMS
Linear drainage channels shall be:
• C250 polymer concrete linear drainage channel, 100, 150 or 225 mm deep,
with steel galvanised grate; or
as instructed on specific works.
Page 148 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 5/7: EMPLOYER’S GULLY ASSET MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS
On attending any gully, the Contractor shall update CONFIRM as follows, attaching
any supporting details required by Appendix 5/1.
1. On successfully cleaning a gully (whether by emptying/rodding or jetting) the
following shall be provided in the appropriate CONFIRM fields:
Against gully reference
• Date cleaned
• Method of Cleaning
• Any observations
2. On failing to clean a gully (whether by emptying/rodding or jetting) the following
information shall be provided in the appropriate CONFIRM fields:
Against gully reference
• Date attended
• Method of Cleaning
• Issue which prevented cleaning
• Attachments required by Appendix 5/1
i.e. site specific record (with photographs) identifying
details of action taken and findings, conclusions and
recommendations for next steps to resolve the
problem
Page 149 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/1: REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTABILITY AND TESTING ETC. OF
EARTHWORKS MATERIALS
Acceptability
1. The classes of earthworks materials appropriate to the contract are set out in the
table below. Permitted constituents and properties are set out in SHW Table 6/1,
supplemented by the requirements given below.
Class
Description
Typical Use
Property
Acceptable Limits
Lower
Upper
1A
Well graded granular
General fill
iii. mc
OMC -2
OMC +2
material
1B
Uniformly graded
General fill
iii. mc
OMC -2
OMC +2
granular material
1C
Coarse granular
General fill
material
2E
Reclaimed
General fill
ii. bulk density
Pulverised Fuel
Ash cohesive
material
4
General
Fill to
ii. mc
1.4 x
Landscape
OMC
areas
5A
Topsoil or turf existing
Topsoiling
on site
5B
Imported topsoil
Topsoiling
6B
Selected coarse
Starter layer
granular material
6C
Selected uniformly
Starter layer
graded granular
material
6D
Selected
Starter layer
iv. mc
uniformly graded
below
granular material
pulverised
fuel ash
6F2
Selected granular
Capping
material (coarse
grading)
6F3
Selected granular
Capping
material
6F5
Selected imported
Capping
granular material
(coarse grading)
6N
Selected well
Fill to
iv. undrained
C’ = 0
OMC
graded granular
structures
shear
material
parameters
v. effective
Phi’ =
angle of
40o
internal
friction and
effective
cohesion
Page 150 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
vi. permeability
4 x 10-5
m/s
OMC –
vii. mc
2.5%
6Q
Well graded or
Overlying fill
uniformly graded
for
or coarse
corrugated
granular material
steel buried
structures
2. Any special requirements for the acceptability of any proposed fill material shall be
as instructed by the Employer.
3. Information regarding materials that might be classified as Class 3 will be included
in the instructing Task Order.
4. Excavated materials that do not meet the requirements stated above shall be
classified as unacceptable. Artificial hard materials such as concrete, kerbing,
blacktop etc shall also be classified as unacceptable. Unacceptable material shall
be disposed of to suitably licensed tips off site.
5. The Contractor is encouraged to submit proposals for processing to render
unacceptable material Class U1 that is encountered acceptable and, if his
proposals are acceptable to the Employer, this will be confirmed to the Contractor
in writing.
6. Any requirements for groundwater lowering, or other treatment, shall be as stated
in any Task Order, or as instructed on site by the Employer. General groundwater
lowering will not be permitted.
7. The minimum MCV required immediately before compaction, for any lime stabilised
Class 9D materials to be used in any site, shall be as instructed by the Employer.
8. The requirements for acceptability and testing of unburnt colliery shale shall be as
instructed by the Employer if the need arises.
9. The rapid assessment procedure for material acceptability shall not be used unless
exceptionally permitted by the Employer.
10. The effects of water-soluble sulphate, oxidisable sulfides and total potential sulfate
shall only be assessed upon the exceptional request of the Employer. Such
assessments, if required, are likely to be undertaken by others engaged by the
Employer under separate arrangements.
11. Magnesium sulphate tests, and other tests for particle soundness, shall only be
undertaken upon the exceptional request of the Employer. Such tests, if required,
are likely to be undertaken by others engaged by the Employer under separate
arrangements.
Page 151 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
12. All materials except U2, organic material or material that is susceptible to
spontaneous combustion, may be constituents of Class 4 material. However, Class
4 landscape fill must be capable of forming stable embankments at a side slope of
1 in 2 and of being compacted to 85% maximum dry density to remove large voids.
A further requirement shall be that Class 4 material within 500mm of the underside
of topsoil (and to the full depth of landscaping material in areas of farmland to be
reinstated / regraded) shall be free from bituminous material, ash, shale, slag,
colliery spoil, densely compacted clay, oil and other pollutants likely to cause
damage to planting. The material shall be free draining.
13. Levels of contamination for any imported earthworks material shall not exceed the
values specified in the table below. Values in brackets apply to imported Class 4
landscape fill only.
Phenol
5
Sulphate
2000
Toluene Extractable
5000
Sulphide
250
PH
Range 5.5 – 8.5 (5.5 – 8.0)
Arsenic
40
Boron (water soluble)
3
Cadmium
15
Chromium (total)
1000
Chromium (hex)
25
Coal Tars
1000 (50)
Copper (available)
(50)
Copper (total)
100
Cyanide (free)
100 (25)
Cyanide (complex)
250
Lead (total)
2000
Mercury
20
Nickel (available)
(20)
Nickel (total)
20
Selenium
6
Sulphur
5000
Thiocyanate
50
Zinc (available)
(130)
Zinc (total)
250
Classification and Testing
14. The Contractor shall be responsible for the classification and testing of earthworks
materials. The locations of exploratory holes for classification purposes shall be as
instructed by the Employer. Three sets of the relevant tests shall be performed on
each class of material to be used in the earthworks.
15. Sampling for classification and testing of earthworks materials shall be carried out
by the Contractor, at source for on-site materials and at the point of deposition for
Page 152 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
imported materials, unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. The Contractor shall
give the Employer sufficient notice to allow him to be present during all of the
Contractor’s sampling and testing procedures.
16. A schedule of tests and acceptability limits for the fill materials is given in Table 6/1
of the SHW. Particular requirements not included in Table 6/1 shall be either
determined by the Contractor or specified by the Employer.
17. The Contractor shall gain the Employer’s acceptance/confirmation of the
classification of earthworks materials, following the submission of the results of
classification tests, before materials are incorporated into the works.
18. Where the Employer is of the opinion that the classification of site arisings or
imported material has changed, he shall require the Contractor to repeat the
classification tests to check its acceptability.
19. Where a material satisfies the criteria for more than one class, or is marginal
between the classes, the material shall be classified as that requiring the greater
compactive effort.
20. The Contractor shall provide two copies of all the classification test results, within
one working day from the completion of the test, to the Employer, duly signed by
the Contractor.
Page 153 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/2: REQUIREMENTS FOR DEALING WITH CLASS U1B & CLASS U2
UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
General Requirements
1. The Contractor will be made aware of the location, extent and nature of any Class
U1B or U2 material that the Employer believes to be present on any site when
ordering the Works.
2. The Contractor shall undertake all work under the contract in a manner which
prevents contamination of existing water courses, sewers, public highways and
other areas of work.
3. At least four weeks before commencing removal of any contaminated material, the
Contractor shall submit to the Employer in writing the Contractor's proposals for
excavation, transportation, disposal of waste and site hygiene/health provisions.
4. The Contractor shall, in the event of uncovering any Class U1B or U2 material
while carrying out the works, immediately notify the Employer and shall
subsequently comply with all requirements for the handling and disposal of such
materials issued by the Employer.
Toxic Materials that may be Encountered in Highway Works
5. Some or all of the following toxic materials may be encountered during Works:
Toluenic Extractable Matter
Total Phenols
Sulphides
Chlorides
Coal Tar Derivatives
Mineral Oils
Total Sulphates
Total Cyanide
Total Lead
Available Nickel
Available Zinc
Total Cadmium
Total Barium
Available Copper
Total Arsenic
Total Mercury
Hexavalent Chromium
Methane
6. Methods of excavation, disposal, precautions and requirements for handling shall
comply with the requirements of the Employer’s Environmental Health Officer, the
Health and Safety Executive and the London Waste Regulation Authority.
Page 154 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
7. Leachate and contaminated water shall be dealt with in a manner acceptable to
Thames Water Authority.
Requirements of the Environmental Health Officer 8.
(a) Adequate site security shall be provided to prevent unauthorised access to
the site and particularly the excavations.
(b) Dust nuisance shall be minimised by damping down surfaces and keeping
site roads and access/egress routes clean and well watered. Vehicle wheel
washing facilities shall be provided at each egress point.
(c) Sheeted vehicles shall be used.
(d) The work force shall be provided with dust masks and overalls, which shall
be laundered from time to time as necessary. Personal washing and
changing facilities shall be provided on site.
Disposal of Bituminous Planings Containing Coal Tar or Other Hazardous
Materials
9. The Contractor’s Waste Management Plan required by Clause 170AR shall identify
procedures for excavation, cold milling and disposal of bituminous materials
containing coal tar or other hazardous materials that render the material Class U1B
or U2.
10. The Employer will undertake testing at resurfacing sites to identify the presence of
Coal Tar or other hazardous materials. Such testing does not relieve the Contractor
of his duty to follow his own processes outlined in his Waste Management plan for
identification and handling of hazardous materials.
11. Where the Contractor identifies hazardous material he shall immediately inform the
Employer and advise of activity to be undertaken to remove and dispose of
hazardous materials.
Disposal of Fly Tipped Materials
12. The Contractor may be ordered to dispose of materials fly tipped in the Contract
Area.
Page 155 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/5: GEOTEXTILES USED TO SEPARATE EARTHWORKS
MATERIALS
1. Geotextiles shall only be provided where the Employer instructs the use of these
materials in the works. Testing shall be as required by the Manufacturer or
Employer. All samples and test pieces cut shall be retained by the Contractor in a
clean and dry condition for one month after completion of the works.
2. Type A shall be Terram T1000 or equivalent characteristics approved by the
Employer.
3. Type B shall be Terram T2000 or equivalent characteristics approved by the
Employer.
4. Type C shall be Tensar TriAx standard aperture geogrid – TX or equivalent
characteristics approved by the Employer.
5. Type D shall be Tensar TriAx large aperture geogrid – TXL or equivalent
characteristics approved by the Employer.
6. Type E shall be Tensar TriAx geocomposite – TX-G or equivalent characteristics
approved by the Employer.
7. Type F shall be Charcon Permafilter Geotextile or equivalent characteristics
approved by the Employer to filter hydrocarbons.
Page 156 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/7: SUB-FORMATION AND CAPPING AND PREPARATION AND
SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION
Capping Materials
1. Permitted capping materials shall comply with Table 6/1 Class 6F2 with the
exception of chalk.
2. Material used in capping layers shall have an in situ CBR value of not less than
15% when tested by a method approved by the Employer or a laboratory CBR
value of not less than 15% when tested in accordance with BS 1377 Part 2:1990,
Test 16, at the insitu moisture content following compaction.
3. A demonstration area shall be prepared as specified in Clause 613 sub-clause 4.
The dry density shall be determined in accordance with Clause 612 sub-clause 14.
If the demonstration is approved by the Employer, subsequent areas of capping
where the material is the same as in the trial area shall be compacted to provide
the same or higher dry density.
4. Appendix 6/1 shall also apply as regards frost susceptibility.
5. Class 6F2 capping material shall have 10% fines value of 50 KN.
Treatment of Formation or Sub-Formation 6. The preparation of formation on existing sub-base in carriageways, footways and
other paved areas shall comply with the requirements for surface levels and
regularity stated in Clause 702 and the requirements for compaction stated in
Clause 802.
7. Weedkillers shall be applied to the formations of footway and vehicular accesses.
The weedkiller must be approved by the Employer and applied according to the
manufacturer’s instruction.
8. Where a contact weedkiller is appropriate and where there is direct access to water
courses a glyphosate chemical must be used. Residual weedkillers must be
approved by the Environment Agency and must not contain Atrazine or Simazine.
Page 157 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/8: TOPSOILING
General
1. Any areas of the works that are to be designated as areas of topsoil material shall
be identified in details for individual Works.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that all areas of topsoil, grassed areas and verges on
the site are left undisturbed, except where such disturbance forms an essential part
of the works. Any requirements for the removal and/or reuse of indigenous topsoil
(including its use as turf) shall be as stated in details for individual Works.
3. The use of imported topsoil, Class 5B, shall only be permitted or requested in
details for individual Works.
4. Before any topsoil is imported onto site the whole of the areas to be soiled shall be
approved by the Employer.
Topsoil
5. Topsoil shall be as-dug soil from an approved source. A manufactured composite
screened topsoil will not be acceptable. No organic matter derived from a sewage
works will be accepted. The source of the topsoil shall be approved by the
Employer who may request an inspection of the supply at source prior to delivery
to site or at any time during the contract. Topsoil shall be free from subsoil, brick
or other building material, rubbish or other extraneous material, pernicious weeds
including their roots, seeds or top growth, sticks or roots of trees or shrubs, and
shall be free from all chemical or other pollution. All topsoil shall have stones and
other debris removed which have dimensions greater than 25mm equivalent
diameter which lie within 100mm of the surface.
6. Topsoil shall comply with BS 3882:20157 and BS 4428:1989 and with the following:
Texture:
medium loam:
max.
min.
sand (0.05-2mm)
75%
20%
silt (0.002-0.05mm)
60%
5%
clay (less than0.002mm) 30%
5%
Soil reaction:
6 to 7.5 pH.
Stone content: 2mm to 50mm:
20% max. by dry weight
Max. stone size:
50mm in any dimension
Electrical conductivity:
100-1500 micromhs per cm on a 1:2.5
soil-water extract.
Extractable Nitrogen (N):
not less than 0.2%
Page 158 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Extractable Phosphorus (P):
not less than 45 ppm
Extractable Potassium (K):
not less than 240 ppm
Extractable Magnesium (Mg):
not less than 80 ppm
Organic matter:
not less than 4% by dry weigh
Maximum Phytotoxic elements: Total copper:
130mg/kg
Total nickel:
70mg/kg
Total Zinc:
3000g/kg
Water Soluble Boron:
3mg/kg
Maximum zootoxic elements:
Arsenic:
40mg/kg
Cadmium:
15mg/kg
Chromium:
1000mg/kg
Lead:
2000mg/kg
Mercury:
20mg/kg
7. A load of topsoil not less than 5 cubic metres shall be delivered to site for approval
prior to any spreading being carried out. Not less than 1 cubic metre of this shall
be retained on site for comparison with subsequent loads. If the topsoil source is
changed from the original, the Contractor shall give the Employer 48 hours notice
to this effect and a sample of the new and any subsequent topsoil shall be subject
to approval in the same manner as the first. Acceptance based on a visual
inspection of the sample load shall be subject to receipt of a satisfactory analysis
of the soil and/or agreement being reached on any measures required to bring the
proposed material up to specification, these measures being at the Contractor's
expense.
8. Prior to approval of topsoil the Contractor shall arrange for a report on topsoil
quality to be carried out by an approved Soil Scientist. The report shall contain an
analysis of all the qualities referred to above, plus recommendations for any
improvements required to bring the soil up to the above specification. Samples for
analysis shall be fully representative of the soil proposed for use. Ten equal
samples shall be taken, thoroughly mixed and quartered. Two lots each of 500gms
of this mixture shall be put into plastic bags, with appropriate labelling and sent to
the Analyst and the Employer.
Placing Topsoil
9. The Contractor shall give the Employer 48 hours notice of intention to carry out
each of the following operations: import subsoil, spread subsoil, import topsoil,
spread topsoil, cultivate.
10. Topsoil depths will be provided in details for individual Works.
11. Levels of topsoil after spreading shall allow for settlement. Generally the required
finished levels after settlement and cultivation shall be:
Page 159 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
i) in the case of grass areas, flush with any adjoining paved areas,
manholes, etc;
ii) in the case of planted areas, 75 mm below any adjoining paved areas,
manholes, etc. to allow for depth of mulch.
12. The topsoil shall be spread over prepared and approved subsoil in layers not
exceeding 225 mm, and each layer shall be lightly firmed before the next is spread.
13. Slopes, mounds or banks shall be graded according to the drawings and shall be
subject to approval before any cultivation operations.
14. Topsoil shall not be handled, spread or cultivated in any way when wet or during
wet weather when structural damage to it may occur.
15. Any areas of compaction caused by handling in unfavourable weather, by heavy
vehicles, or by any other reason shall be broken up to their full depth by an
approved method and regarded as necessary to comply with the specified levels.
Page 160 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/14: LIMITING VALUES FOR POLLUTION OF CONTROLLED
WATERS
1. The limiting values for pollution of controlled waters shall be as set out in
Environmental Permitting Guidance
Water Discharge Activities
For the Environmental Permitting (England and Wales) Regulations 2010
December 2010
Version 2.0
Published by the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
www.defra.gov.uk
Page 161 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 6/15: LIMITING VALUES FOR HARM TO HUMAN HEALTH AND THE
ENVIRONMENT
1. The limiting values for harm to human health and the environment shall be as set
out in the Air Quality Standards Regulations 2010.
Page 162 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 7/1: PERMITTED PAVEMENT OPTIONS
Permitted Pavement Options – Schedule 1
This Appendix covers all carriageway construction types, with the exception of block
paved surfaces. Block paved areas are to be laid in compliance with Series 1100 of
the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) and BS7533.
Details of carriageway construction types will be provided to the Contractor when
Works are ordered. Materials will be selected from Schedule 5 of this Appendix.
General Requirements – Schedule 2
The grid for checking surface levels of pavement courses shall be:
• Longitudinal dimension : 10m
• Transverse dimension : 2m
A rolling straight edge should be used to measure longitudinal surface regularity. For
roads with a speed limit >40mph the surface regularity shall be that for Category A
Roads. Other roads shall have a Category B Road surface regularity.
The transverse surface regularity shall be measured using a 3m straight edge. Over
the first 500m of completed surface course for each day of laying; transverse
measurements shall be made at intervals not exceeding 20m. During testing, if any
area is found not to comply with Clause 702.8, the Contactor shall be informed
immediately and paving shall cease until the reasons for non-conformance are
investigated and understood. Steps should be taken to remedy the paving process.
Following any non-conformances, the test spacing shall revert to 20m, and may be
extended to 100m once a consistent surface finish is being achieved.
Unreinforced and jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be constructed in accordance
with Series 1000 of the SHW. Transverse joints shall be provided in unreinforced and
jointed reinforced concrete slabs and shall be contraction, or expansion joints
constructed to SHW clauses 1009, 1010 and Standard Detail 700-3.
Unreinforced slabs
Joints shall be provided at 15 metre spacing. Every third joint shall be an expansion
joint. Expansion joints may be omitted from slabs constructed during the summer
period, where agreed by the Employer. In unreinforced concrete slabs joints are
required to ensure the length/width ratio shall be not greater than 2.0.
Jointed reinforced slab
Joints shall be provided at 15 metre spacing. Every third joint shall be an expansion
joint. Expansion joints may be omitted from slabs constructed during the summer
period, where agreed by the Employer.
Page 163 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Permitted Construction Materials – Schedule 3
Details of carriageway construction materials will be provided to the Contractor when
Works are ordered.
General Requirements for Construction Materials – Schedule 4
Not Used.
Requirements for Construction Materials – Schedule 5
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
Surface Course Materials
ST 14
942
Thin Surface
• Thickness: 35mm-50mm
Course Systems
• Traffic Count > 600 cv/lane/day
TSCS 14
• Stress level: 2
• Minimum Declared PSV: PSV65 or 68+
where required
• Maximum Aggregate Abrasion Value
AAV10
• Red colour: Both aggregate and binder
shall be red to an approved mixture colour
• Minimum Wheel Tracking level required
on BBA HAPAS Certificate: Level 2
• Road/ Tyre Noise Level Relative to HRA
required on BBA HAPAS Certificate: Level
1
• Minimum compacted layer thickness:
35mm
• Minimum initial texture depth shall be in
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW.
• The texture depth Guarantee shall be 2
years to Clause 942.14.
• Surface Integrity-Performance Guarantee
shall be 5 years to Clause 942.16.
ST 10
942
Thin Surface
• Thickness: 25mm-30mm
Course Systems
• Traffic Count > 600 cv/lane/day
TSCS 10
• Street Level:2
• Minimum Declared PSV: PSV65 or 68+
where required
• Maximum Aggregate Abrasion Value
AA10
• Red colour: Both aggregate and binder
Page 164 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
shall be red to an approved mixture colour
• Minimum Wheel Tracking level required
on BBS HAPAS Certificate: Level 2
• Road/ Tyre Noise Level Relative to HRA
required on BBA HAPAS Certificate: Level
2
• Minimum Compacted Layer thickness:
25mm
• Minimum initial texture depth shall be in
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW.
• The texture depth Guarantee shall be 2
years to Clause 942.14.
• Surface Integrity-Performance Guarantee
shall be 5 years to Clause 942.16.
S1H
911/
HRA 35/14 F surf
• Thickness: 40 or 50mm
943
des PMB WTR 2
• Grade of binder: a polymer modified
+ PCC 14/20
binder to achieve the wheel tracking
performance to PD 6691 Table C.3 Class
2. Wheel Tracking test temperature 60°C.
• Coated chippings to PD 6618 C.8
• Aggregate size 14/20
• PSV 60, 65 or 68+ as required for site
• AAV12
• Deformation after installation: Required to
Clause 943:10
• Red colour: Both aggregate and binder
shall be red and approved mixture colour
• Minimum initial texture Depth shall be in
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW.
S2H
911/
HRA 35/14 F surf
• Thickness: 40 or 50mm
943
des 40/60 WTR 1
• Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
+ PCC 14/20
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691 Table C.3 Class 1 Wheel Tracking
test temperature 45°C
• Coated chippings to PD 6618 C.8
• Aggregate size 14/20
• PSV 60, 65 or 68+ as required for site
• AAV12
• Deformation after installation: Required
[CI 943:10]
• Red colour: Both aggregate and binder
shall be red and approved mixture colour
• Minimum initial texture Depth shall be in
Page 165 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW.
S3H
910
HRA 30/14 F surf
• Thickness: 40 or 50mm
40/60 + PCC
• Coated chippings to PD 6618 C.8
14/20
• Aggregate size 14/20
• PSV PSV 60, 65 or 68+ as required for
site
• AAV12
• Red colour: Both aggregate and binder
shall be red and approved mixture colour
• Minimum initial texture Depth shall be in
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW.
S3A
912
Close Graded
• Thickness 25mm-35mm
Asphalt Concrete
• Minimum declared PSV: 65
Surface Course
• Maximum Aggregate Abrasion
(AC10 Close Surf
Value:AAV16
40/60)
• Binder Penetration: 40/60 pen
• Minimum initial texture Depth shall be in
accordance with Table 9/3 under clause
921 MCHW, Volume 1 SHW
SFA6
None
Dense Asphalt
• Thickness 20-30mm
Concrete Surface
• Conform to EN13108:1 and
Course (AC6
PD6691:Annex B
dense 100/150)
• Minimum declared PSV: PSV 50
• Maximum Aggregate Abrasion
Value:AAV16
• Limestone fine aggregate shall not be
used
Binder Course Materials (also suitable for regulating)
Bi1A
929
AC 20 HMD bin
• Thickness: 60mm-100mm (minimum
40/60*
thickness at any point 40mm)
•
* a polymer modified binder may be
required
• Composition PD 6691 Table B11
• Volumetric properties after installation:
Required (CI 929.3)
Bi2A
929
AC 20 HMD bin
• Thickness: 60mm-100mm (minimum
40/60
• thickness at any point 40mm)
Page 166 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
• Composition PD 6691 Table B11
• Volumetric properties after installation:
Required (CI 929.3)
Bi3A
906
AC 20 dense bin
• Thickness: 50mm-100mm (minimum
100/150
• thickness at any point 40mm)
• Composition PD 6691 Table B11
Bi1S
937
SMA 14 bin 40/60* • Thickness: 35mm-60mm (minimum
des WTR 2
thickness at any point 25mm)
• Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691
• * a polymer modified binder may be
required
• Table D.2 Class 2 [Wheel Tracking test
temperature 60°C
• Deformation after installation: Required
937.6
Bi2S
937
SMA 14 bin 40/60
• Thickness: 35mm-60mm (minimum
des WTR 1
thickness at any point 25mm)
• Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691
• Table D.2 Class 1 [Wheel Tracking test
temperature 45°C
Bi3S
937
SMA 10 bin 40/60
• Thickness: 25mm-50mm (minimum
thickness at any point 15mm)
Bi1H
943
HRA 60/20 bin
• Thickness: 45mm-80mm (minimum
40/60*
thickness at any point 40mm)
des WTR 2
• *Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691 Table C.3 Class 2 (Wheel Tracking
test temperature 60°C)
Bi2H
943
HRA 60/20 bin
• Thickness: 45mm-80mm (minimum
40/60*
thickness at any point 40mm)
des WTR 1
• *Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691 Table C.3 Class 2 (Wheel Tracking
test temperature 45°C)
Bi3H
943
HRA 60/20 bin
• Thickness: 45mm-80mm (minimum
40/60
thickness at any point 40mm)
Page 167 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
•
AC14 dense bin
BiFA
• Thickness: 40mm-55mm
100/150
• Composition PD 6691 Class B14
BiFC
948
14 Cold Mix
• Thickness: 40mm-70mm
• SVH or QVH as available Class B1
BiP
14mm Porous
• Drain Asphalt (Aggregate Industries)
Asphalt Binder
binder course or equivalent Porous
Course
Asphalt approved by the Employer
Base Course Materials (also suitable for regulating)
Ba1A
AC 32 HDM base • Thickness: Insert 70mm-150mm
40/60*
• * a polymer modified binder may be
required
• Composition PD 6691 Table B11
Ba2A
AC 32 HDM base
• Thickness: Insert 70mm-150mm
40/60*
• * a polymer modified binder may be
required
• Composition PD 6691 Table B11
Ba3A
906
AC 20 dense base
• Thickness: Insert 50mm- 100mm
40/60 rec
• Composition PD 6691 Table B.11
Ba1H
929
HRA 60/32 base
• Thickness: 60mm-150mm
40/60*
• *Grade of binder: 40/60 pen paving grade
or a polymer modified binder to achieve
the wheel tracking performance to PD
6691 Table C.3 Class 2 (Wheel Tracking
test temperature 60°C)
• Volumetric properties after installation:
Required (CI 929.3)
Ba2H
904
HRA 60/20 base
• Thickness: 60mm-150mm
40/60
Ba3C
948
20 Cold mix
• Thickness: 50mm- 100mm
• QVH as available Class B2
• Trafficking trial: Only if sand fines used [CI
948.8]
BaFA
AC14 dense base
• Thickness: 40mm- 55mm
100/150
• Composition PD 6691 Table B.14
BaFC
14 Cold mix
• Thickness: 40mm- 70mm
• SVH or QVH as available Class B1
Reinforced pavement slabs
JRC
1001 to Jointed reinforced
• C32/40 concrete with sulphur resisting
concrete
cement to BS 8500-1 BS EN 13877-1
1039
•
and
Thickness: 150mm- 300mm
Page 168 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Material
Clause
Description
Requirement
Ref.
1044
Unreinforced pavement slabs
URC
1030
Wet lean concrete
• C32/40 concrete with sulphur resisting
cement to BS 8500-1 BS EN 13877-1
• Thickness: 150mm- 300mm
Sub-bases
803
Type 1 unbound
• Clause 803
mixture
For High Friction and Resin-based coloured surface treatments see Appendix 7/30.
Thin Surface Course Systems: Information to be provided by the Contractor –
Schedule 6
The Contractor shall provide the following information prior to commencement of any
Works involving a Thin Surface Course System:
(i) Certificate or Certificates for the Thin Surface Course System or systems that
are proposed for use in the works, together with a copy of the Installation
Method Statement associated with each Certificate.
(ii) For any Certificate that covers several variants of one Thin Surface Course
System, proposed variant or variants of the system to be used in the Works
(variants of a system occur from any option that results in different values
being reported on the Certificate for one or more properties, and could involve
changes in nominal maximum aggregate size, aggregate type, aggregate
grading, binder type, binder content, fibres or other additives, type and rate of
spread of bond coat)
(iii) If requested, or if the Thin Surface Course System is not produced under a
Sector Scheme, the proposed component materials to be used in the Thin
Surface Course System and their proportions for each proposed system.
(iv) Proposed source or sources of coarse aggregate together with statement of
properties including Polished Stone Value, Aggregate Abrasion Value, Los
Angeles Coefficient and Flakiness Index.
(v) If regulating material is to be used, evidence of its deformation resistance either
independently or in combination with the Thin Surface Course System.
Binder Data Requirements – Schedule 7
The following data shall be provided to the Employer for modified binders as required
in sub-Clauses 937.4 and 943.4. The data should not be more than 12 months old.
Page 169 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
I. Binder Samples
Bituminous binders shall be sampled from the delivery according to BS EN 58.
For modifiers blended with the other component materials of the mixture at the
mixer a simulated binder shall be prepared. Such modifiers are generally less
intimately mixed with the bitumen and less well dispersed throughout the mixture
than when pre-blended. Evidence that the simulated binder offers the same
performance as the binder produced when the modifier is added at the mixer
shall be provided.
II. Penetration
Binder penetration at 25°C (BS EN 1426), 100g 5 seconds, and at 5°C, 200g 60
seconds, before and after hardening in the Rolling Thin Film Oven Test (RTFOT)
in accordance with BS EN 12607-1, or alternatively, after RTFOT and after
RTFOT and Ageing in accordance with Clause 955.
III. Product Identification Test and Rheological Properties
Results for the binder(s) proposed shall comprise rheological data for each
binder in the form of complex shear (stiffness) modulus (G*) and phase angle (δ)
determined in accordance with Clause 956 for binder as supplied, after RTFOT
and after RTFOT and Ageing in accordance with Clause 955.
IV. Storage Stability Test
All binders shall be stored strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Polymer modified binders claimed to remain homogeneous in
storage without agitation shall be tested for storage stability in the manner
described in Clause 958. The mean of the differences in softening point between
the top and bottom samples, of not less than five pairs of such samples shall not
exceed 5°C. Manufacturers of preblended modified binders shall state what
precautions are necessary to ensure that adequate homogeneity is maintained
during storage.
V. Photomicrograph
A typical photomicrograph of the modified binder and base binder using ultra-
violet or other technique to provide maximum contrast of the polymer structure to
the binder before modification shall be supplied together with details of sample
preparation techniques. A photomicrograph is intended only to indicate the
presence of a polymer modifier in the binder and should not be used as an
indicator of performance. Guidance on the interpretation of photomicrographs is
given in EN13632 Visualisation of polymer dispersion in polymer modified
bitumen.
VI. Cohesion
Vialit Pendulum cohesion test curve of the binder, in accordance with Clause
957 for the binder as supplied, after RTFOT and after RTFOT and Ageing in
accordance with Clause 955.
VII. FRAASS Brittle Point
Page 170 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
FRAASS brittle point measured using BS EN 12593 shall be provided on the
binder as supplied, after RTFOT and after RTFOT and Ageing in accordance
with Clause 955.
Page 171 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 7/2: EXCAVATION, TRIMMING AND REINSTATEMENT OF
EXISTING SURFACES
1. Locations of any trenches, pits, patch repairs, etc, which require to be excavated
in existing paved surfaces will be provided with individual Works instructions.
2. Pavement construction details i.e. depth of pavement layers for reinstatement will
be provided with individual Works instructions.
3. All excavation, trimming and reinstatement of existing surfaces shall be undertaken
in accordance with this Specification and the ‘Specification for the Reinstatement
of Openings in Highways (2010)’
4. Reinstatement materials shall comply with Appendix 7/1 and include bond coats to
Appendix 7/4.
5. All road surfaces shall be cut back straight and neat using diamond blade saws.
6. Vertical joints shall be stepped by the layer thickness where this does not exceed
75mm, and by a minimum of 75 mm elsewhere.
7. Where new construction of bituminous material abuts existing construction,
whether it be kerbs or other bituminous construction, the joint between the two shall
be sealed with hot poured bitumen.
8. Where excavation takes place in areas on which resin bonded skid resistant
surface dressing or coloured surfaces exist, the existing surface treatment shall be
reinstated. This reinstatement may be hand laid if less than 0.75m wide or less
than 10 square metres in area.
9. Where excavation or reinstatement takes place in areas on which road markings
exist, the existing road markings shall be reinstated.
Page 172 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 7/4 – BOND COATS, TACK COATS AND OTHER BITUMINOUS
SPRAYS
1. A good bond is essential between pavement layers in order to realise the maximum
structural potential. A tack coat or bond coat shall be applied in association with all
bituminous layers to promote adhesion (ref SHW Cl 903.4). The Specification for
Highway Works (Clause 920) requires all tack coats and bond coats to be applied
by metered spray tanker. However, it must be recognised that this is not always
practical for all works including footways and indeed the BBA/HAPAS certificates
for some proprietary products still permit manual spraying. As a consequence,
although application by tanker is to be preferred the Employer will use discretion
to consider all reasonable means of application provided care is exercised to
ensure the recommended rate is applied uniformly.
2. Bond coats shall conform to the requirements outlined in BS 594987:2010 Clause
5.
3. Following milling and cleaning of the surface, but prior to the application of the bond
coat, the Contractor shall undertake a visual inspection of the surface. All cracks
greater than 2 mm in width shall be cleaned and filled prior to the application of the
bond coat. Cracks shall be filled level with the surrounding surface using a polymer
modified bituminous sealant.
4. Bond coats associated with areas of regulating material shall be agreed by the
Employer prior to use.
5. The Contractor shall complete a binder data sheet and supply a copy to the
Employer before commencement of any Works.
Page 173 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 7/22: REPAIRS TO POTHOLES
General
1. The Contractor may be instructed to repair potholes through:
(i)
Emergency Attendance, where the Contractor will be reimbursed the
Emergency Attendance rate in addition to reimbursement for the pothole
repair; or
(ii)
Priority 1A response, where the Contractor will be reimbursed the Priority
1A percentage uplift in addition to reimbursement for the pothole repair;
or
(iii)
Priority 1B response, where the Contractor will be reimbursed the Priority
1B percentage uplift in addition to reimbursement for the pothole repair;
or
(iv)
Priority 2 response, where the Contractor will be reimbursed for the
pothole repair.
2. SHW Clause 946 applies to the treatment of all patches and potholes.
3. It is the Employer’s policy, where practicable, to undertake one-hit permanent
repair to potholes.
4. The Contractor is responsible for the permanent repair of potholes or other spot
defects. It is the Contractor’s choice, having regard to traffic sensitivity and permit
constraints, whether to undertake a one-hit permanent repair immediately or
undertake an interim temporary repair/s prior to a permanent repair later.
5. The minimum treatment for any pothole shall be an interim repair returning the
carriageway area to service. Ttemporary guarding, signing and lighting leaving the
carriageway out of service is unacceptable.
6. Where the option to undertake an interim repair is taken the decision as to which
temporary materials to use rests with the Contractor however the repair shall be
safe, regularly inspected, maintained or replaced as necessary until such time as
the permanent repair is implemented.
7. Permanent repairs to a specification agreed by the Employer shall always be
completed within 28 days and guaranteed for a period of two years.
Page 174 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 7/30: High Friction and Resin-Based Coloured Surface Treatments
1. High Friction and Resin-based coloured surface treatments shall be applied to the
areas shown on the drawings and as required under SHW Clause 924, SHW
Clause 960AR and this appendix.
2. The material shall be BBA/HAPAS Type 1 cold or hot applied as indicated on the
drawings for specific schemes. High Friction and Resin-based coloured surface
treatments referred to in the Schedule of Rates are
Clause Material
924
Cold applied resin bonded high skid resistant surface treatment,
coloured grey, with 3 mm Guyanan Bauxite
924
Cold applied resin bonded high skid resistant surface treatment,
coloured buff, with 3 mm Chinese Bauxite
924
Cold applied resin bonded high skid resistant surface treatment,
coloured red (Venetian Red - BS381C 1996:No 445 or Bold Red -
BS381C 1996:No 564), with 3 mm Chinese Bauxite
924
Cold applied resin bonded high skid resistant surface treatment,
coloured green (Deep Chrome Green - BS381C 1996:No 267), with 3
mm Guyanan Bauxite
924
Thermoplastic high skid resistant surface treatment, coloured grey
924
Thermoplastic high skid resistant surface treatment, coloured buff
924
Thermoplastic high skid resistant surface treatment, coloured red
(Venetian Red - BS381C 1996:No 445 or Bold Red - BS381C
1996:No 564)
924
Thermoplastic high skid resistant surface treatment, coloured green
(Deep Chrome Green - BS381C 1996:No 267)
960AR Cold applied resin bonded coloured surface treatment, coloured red
(Venetian Red - BS381C 1996:No 445 or Bold Red - BS381C
1996:No 564)
960AR Cold applied resin bonded coloured surface treatment with Harden
Red granite
960AR Cold applied resin bonded coloured surface treatment, coloured
green (Deep Chrome Green - BS381C 1996:No 267)
960AR Cold applied resin bonded coloured surface treatment, any other
colour
960AR Thermoplastic coloured surface treatment, coloured red (Venetian
Red - BS381C 1996:No 445 or Bold Red - BS381C 1996:No 564)
960AR Thermoplastic coloured surface treatment, coloured green (Deep
Chrome Green - BS381C 1996:No 267)
960AR Thermoplastic coloured surface treatment, any other colour
Page 175 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
3. The colour shall be as indicated in the drawings for specific schemes.
4. The materials shall be machine laid, unless otherwise authorised by the Employer
or for small areas as specified in the ‘Specification for the Reinstatement of
Openings in Highways (2010).
5. All roadmarkings and iron work in the highway shall be masked before
commencement of the treatments.
Page 176 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 11/1:
KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS
Concrete for Foundations and Backing of Kerbs, Channels and Quadrants
1. All concrete used for foundations or backings to kerbs, channels and quadrants
shall be minimum class ST2 in accordance with SHW Clause 2602, unless
indicated otherwise.
Precast Concrete Kerbs
2. Precast concrete kerbs shall comply with Standard Details 1100-1.
Layout 1
255 x 125mm kerb (laid upright), bull nose, half battered or splayed kerb as
instructed by the Employer, including dropped and transition units as required.
Layout 1A (as Layout 1 except kerb size)
305 x 150mm kerb (laid upright), bull nose, half battered or splayed kerb as
instructed by the Employer, including dropped and transition units as required.
Layout 2
125 x 255mm kerb (laid flat), bull nose, half battered or splayed kerb as instructed
by the Employer, including dropped and transition units as required.
Layout 2A (as Layout 2 except kerb size)
150 x 305mm kerb (laid flat), bull nose, half battered or splayed kerb as instructed
by the Employer, including dropped and transition units as required.
Granite Kerbs
3. Granite kerbs shall comply with Standard Detail 1100-1.
300 x 150mm kerb (laid upright), including dropped and transition units as required.
200 x 300mm kerb (laid flat), including dropped and transition units as required.
Safety and Specialist Kerbs
4. Safety kerbs shall be Trief GST2A in accordance with Standard Detail 1100-1.
5. Specialist kerbs include Kassel KK160, Beany Block Combined Kerb Drainage
System (Standard Grey) 295 x 430mm units and others as required by designs.
Where units are not included in the Schedule of Rates they shall be purchased as
a prime cost items and installed using the appropriate lay only rate.
6. Trief, Kassel and Beany Block kerb systems shall be laid on concrete bed and
backing of a type and thickness specified in the manufacturers instructions.
7. For the purposes of laying specialist kerb systems under “lay only” items in the
Schedule of Rates it should be assumed that 150mm thick ST2 concrete bed and
backing are to be provided. Where manufacturer’s instructions require additional
Page 177 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
concrete it shall be measured under the item for that purpose in the Schedule of
Rates.
Precast Concrete Channels
8. Precast concrete channels shall be either 255 x 125 mm or 150 x 125 mm dished
or plain profile as instructed by the Employer to comply with Standard Detail 1100-
1.
Precast Concrete Edgings
9. Precast concrete edgings shall be either 50 x 150 mm bullnose, round top or
square edge profile as instructed by the Employer to comply with Standard Detail
1100-1.
Linear Drainage Channel System
10. Linear drainage channel systems shall comply with Appendix 5/6.
Precast Concrete Flag Paving
11. Precast concrete flag paving shall comply with Standard Detail 1100-2, unless
changes to the construction depths or materials are instructed by the Employer.
12. Bedding material shall be mortar to Clause 2404 designation (ii). The final
compacted thickness of the laying course is 30mm and should maintain the falls
created in the sub-base layers.
13. Flags shall be 750 x 600 x 63 mm or 600 x 600 x 63mm. 900mm flags are not
permitted.
14. Kiln dried sand shall be swept into joints so that they are full on completion.
15. Precast fibre reinforced concrete flag paving shall be manufactured in accordance
with and comply with all relevant sections of BS EN 1339: Precast Concrete Flags
– requirements and test methods. Performance as regards slip resistance and all
other physical characteristics shall meet the requirements of BS EN 1339 for
precast concrete flags.
Precast Concrete Small Element Paving
16. Precast concrete small element / modular paving shall comply with Standard Detail
1100-2, unless changes to the construction depths or materials are instructed by
the Employer.
17. Bedding material shall be well-graded sharp sand complying with the grading given
in BS 7533-3: 2005. The final compacted thickness of the laying course is 30mm
and should maintain the falls created in the sub-base layers.
18. Paving units shall be 400 x 400 x 65 mm.
Page 178 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
19. After initial vibration to set paving units, kiln dried fine sand shall be brushed into
joints. Sand for joint filling shall be dry, with a minimum particle size no greater than
1.18 mm, containing about 10% by weight passing a 75µm sieve. Sand which might
stain the pavement surface shall not be used. The sand shall not contain any
deleterious salts or other contaminants. After sweeping in sand the paved area
shall be vibrated again, to encourage the filling of the upper part of the joint with
the surface-applied sand. Top filling and final compaction shall be completed as
soon as practicable after laying, and in any case before the end of a day's work.
Further sand filling of joints shall be done if necessary to leave the joints full on
completion.
Concrete Block Paving
20. Concrete block paving may be constructed in footways or carriageways, where
required by specific project designs. It shall comply with Clause 1107.
21. Bedding material shall be well-graded sharp sand complying with the grading given
in BS 7533-3: 2005. The final compacted thickness of the laying course is 30mm
and should maintain the falls created in the sub-base layers.
22. Blocks shall be Marshall Keyblock or equivalent approved by the Employer. Sizes
shall be either 100 x 200 x 65 mm or 100 x 200 x 80 mm in any colour included in
Marshall’s standard range, as instructed for specific works orders.
23. Concrete blocks shall be laid in stretcher, 45o or 90o herringbone or basketweave
patterns as instructed for specific works orders.
24. Edge restraints shall be adequately bedded and haunched to the required levels.
Haunching to gullies, manholes and the inside faces of edge restraints shall be
vertical.
25. The finished surface shall be formed so as to provide required falls with reference
to the design. The line and levels of the block paving shall be to suit existing
conditions and shall be frequently checked to ensure that correct gradient is
obtained everywhere. Areas of paving not as specified or within the acceptable
tolerances stated to be lifted and re-laid to the Employer's approval.
26. Finished paving levels to be within + 6 mm of specified levels. Paving at drainage
gullies and channel blocks to be set 5 mm higher than unit. Sudden irregularities
are not to be permitted. The variation in gap under a 3m straight edge placed
anywhere on the finished surface shall not be greater than 10 mm. Difference in
level between adjacent block/pavers to be not more than 2 mm.
27. Blocks shall be trimmed to shape and size in order to form boundaries and in order
to work around any obstruction. Infill at edge restraints to progress as the work
proceeds. Where trimming of blocks is necessary, portions of less than a quarter
of an entire block shall not be used. Wherever possible blocks shall be used to trim
around up stands, edge restraints fixed furniture, etc. Blocks shall be trimmed to fit
neatly against edge restraints, up stands, or any other margin or fixture. Mortar
fillets to Clause 2404 designation (i), no wider than 50 mm, may be provided at the
Page 179 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
back of the footpath, around lamp posts, boxes, around the bases of poles, street
furniture, etc. The colour of mortar shall match the block colour to the satisfaction
of the Employer.
28. All blocks that need to be cut shall be cut with an appropriate wetted saw to achieve
accurate neat cuts without spalling. Blocks showing irregular or jagged edges will
be rejected by the Employer.
29. Blocks are to be selected vertically from a minimum of three separate packs in
rotation to avoid colour banding.
30. After initial vibration to set blocks, kiln dried fine sand shall be brushed into joints.
Sand for joint filling shall be dry, with a minimum particle size no greater than 1.18
mm, containing about 10% by weight passing a 75µm sieve. Sand which might
stain the pavement surface shall not be used. The sand shall not contain any
deleterious salts or other contaminants. After sweeping in sand the block paved
area shall be vibrated again, to encourage the filling of the upper part of the block-
to-block joint with the surface-applied sand. Top filling and final compaction shall
be completed as soon as practicable after laying, and in any case before the end
of a day's work. Further sand filling of joints shall be done if necessary to leave the
joints full on completion.
Yorkstone Paving
31. Yorkstone Paving shall comply with Standard Detail 1100-2 in relation to precast
concrete flag paving, unless changes to the construction depths or materials are
instructed by the Employer.
32. Slabs should be laid with a 3-5 mm joint. Bedding material shall be mortar to Clause
2404 designation (ii) or lime mortar (cement/lime/sand mix of 1:2:9). The final
compacted thickness of the laying course is 30mm and should maintain the falls
created in the sub-base layers.
33. Flags shall be 750 x 600 x 63 mm or 600 x 600 x 63mm. 900mm flags are not
permitted.
34. Joints shall be pointed as instructed by the Employer so that they are full on
completion.
Granite Sett Paving
35. Granite sett paving may be constructed in footways or carriageways, where
required by specific project designs. Granite sett paving shall comply with Clause
1123AR.
36. Bedding material shall be either:
(i) mortar to Clause 2404 designation (ii) with final compacted thickness of
30mm; or
(ii) quick setting mortar with final compacted thickness 30mm;.or
Page 180 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(iii) 100mm ST4 Wet Lean Concrete.
37. Setts shall be 100 x 100 x 100 mm or 100 x 200 x 100 mm in size and laid with
15mm joints.
38. Joints shall be filled with either:
(i) mortar to Clause 2404 designation (i); or
(ii) quick setting mortar.
39. Where the Employer has instructed the use of quick setting mortar in bedding
and/or grouting materials shall:
(i) be formulated to BS 7533;
(ii) be flowable and shrinkage compensated;
(iii) have a comprehensive strength that exceeds 10 MPa in 3 hours at 20°C.
Tactile Paving
40. Tactile paving shall mean blister or corduroy type paving comprising either of the
following units:
450 x 450 x (65 mm or 50mm)
400 x 400 x (65 mm or 50mm)
200 x 133 x (65 mm or 50mm)
in any standard tactile colour, as instructed in individual works orders.
41. Tactile paving shall be laid on a bed of; 30mm well-graded sharp sand complying
with the grading given in BS 7533-3: 2005; or 30mm mortar to Clause 2404
designation (ii), as instructed in individual works orders.
42. Kiln dried sand shall be swept into joints so that they are full on completion.
Paving Sealant
43. Block paving in carriageway locations is generally treated with a suitable sealant /
sand stabiliser.
44. Paving shall be sealed with a sealant and sand stabliser where instructed in
individual works orders. Suitable sealants are Resiblock 22 available from
Resiblock Limited or Ultrascape Joint Fix from Instarmac or equivalent approved
by the Employer.
45. Sealants shall be applied in accordance with manufactuere’s instructions and the
Employer shall be provided 48 hours notice to witness its application.
Page 181 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Footway Surface Dressing
46. Surface Dressing shall comprise a 12mm double layer of class K1-60 bitumen
emulsion and rolled in 6mm single size washed stone chippings laid and
compacted.
47. Using appropriate bitumen spraying equipment spray bitumen emulsion upon the
sub base layer at rate of 1.6 – 2.0 litres per square metre to falls and
levels. Immediately spread the first layer of 6mm single size washed stone
chippings at spread rate of 8kg per square metre over the bitumen binder.
Immediately over spray with second layer of bitumen emulsion at rate of 1.6 – 2.0
litres per square metre to falls and levels. Immediately spread second layer of 6mm
single size washed stone chippings at spread rate of 8kg per square metre over
the bitumen binder and first layer of stone chippings. Compact the first and second
layers of stone chippings thoroughly into the bitumen binder before it hardens using
a heavy ride-on tandem vibrating roller and continue rolling non-stop until there is
no roller marks in the finished surface (minimum 120 type roller recommended).
Once rolling is finished, check levels of the surface at regular intervals along the
compacted surface course layer for consistent even surface regularity, which
should be accurate to maximum gap of 5mm under a 3.0metere long straight edge,
with no high or low points or hollows. Any part of the surface course layer deviating
from the required level must be regulated with additional bitumen emulsion and
stone chippings and recompacted to the correct levels. Finally, lightly brush off and
dispose of loose stone chippings. Return after a period of one month and again
lightly brush off and dispose of loose stone chippings.
Street Furniture
48. Bench Seats shall be Streetmaster Monmouth as described in the Streetscape
Manual or other type as instructed by the Employer.
49. Litter Bins shall be:
o Linpac Heritage with “Be++er Haringey” logo as Streetscape Manual
o Glasdon Mosaic with “Be++er Haringey” logo as Streetscape Manual
o Steel Wybone Victoriana MV40 with “Be++er Haringey” logo as Streetscape
Manual
o Other type as instructed by the Employer
50. Foundations and installation for all items of street furniture shall be in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
Page 182 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 12/1: TRAFFIC SIGNS - GENERAL
General Requirements for Permanent Traffic Signs
1.1 Details of traffic signs required for individual sites will be provided to the
Contractor when Works are ordered.
1.2 Materials for permanent traffic signs and their construction, assembly, location
and erection shall comply with this Series and Series 1400. The manufacture and
installation of traffic signs shall be in accordance with the quality management
scheme described in Appendix A.
1.3 Each complete traffic sign or part thereof shall comply with, and be capable of
passing the tests in, BSEN 12899.
1.4 Before the commencement of fabrication of any traffic sign the Contractor shall
submit fabrication drawings for the Employer’s approval.
1.5 All traffic sign large base compartments shall be provided with vandal and
weather resistant locks. The number of keys to be provided will be confirmed by
the Employer at the time of order. Types of lock will be specified by the Employer.
1.6 The backs of traffic signs shall be black and have a location identifying mark
unless otherwise specified by the Employer.
1.7 Traffic signs shall be carefully handled to prevent damage, and transported and
stored in accordance with the sign face manufacturer’s instructions.
Street Name Plates
1.8 New street name plates shall be constructed in accordance with standard detail
1200-2 and erected on a frame to standard detail 1200-2 or on a wall or fence.
Traffic Sign Posts
1.9 Tubular steel traffic posts shall be Mallatite or equivalent manufactured to the
requirements of SHW Clause 1204 and approved by the Employer. The posts
shall be of the following types and any height as instructed:
Straight 76 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel post
Straight 89 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel post
Straight 114 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel post
Straight 76 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel wide base post
Straight 89 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel wide base post
Straight 114 mm dia. tubular galvanized steel wide base post
Straight 76 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
post
Straight 89 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
post
Page 183 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Straight 114 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
post
Straight 76 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
wide base post
Straight 89 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
wide base post
Straight 114 mm dia. tubular Mallatite Plascoat plastic coated steel
wide base post
1.10 All traffic sign posts which do not have Plascoat treatment shall be galvanised
steel painted black (or other colour as instructed by the Employer) in accordance
with the requirements of Appendix 19/6.
1.11 All posts are to be fitted with black post caps and shall be of the rigid plastic drive
in type and, when fitted, prevent the ingress of water.
1.12 Under no circumstances are root boxes to be fitted to any posts.
1.13 Where required posts shall have baseplates in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specification and shall have a minimum footing surface area of
150mm x 150mm or as required by BS873.
1.14 Traffic sign post foundations shall be minimum 600 x 600x 600 mm ST2 concrete in
accordance with Standard Detail 1200-6, finishing 150mm below the surface.
Reinstatement above foundations shall comply with Clause 706 of the SHW to
match the existing surfaces. Larger foundations, where required will be indicated
drawings issued for specific works.
1.15 All holes cut in posts to provide a route for internal wiring shall be bushed to
prevent chafing of any wiring and suitably protected using a zinc rich material
specifically designed to provide a rust inhibiting coating.
1.16 All electrical equipment shall be enclosed in a wide base housing. Access to the
interior of such compartments shall be by means of a weatherproof door having
tamper-resistant key fastenings. The lower edge of the door shall be positioned
so that, when the post is installed as intended, it is not less than 300mm above
ground level.
1.17 Wide base posts are to have an external diameter of not less than 140mm. An
internal baseboard with dimensions of not less than 450mm x 95mm x 12mm,
manufactured from a substantial non-hydroscopic material, shall be secured to
the wall of the post directly opposite the door aperture. An earthing bolt of
suitable size shall provide effective earth continuity with the rest of the electrical
system in accordance with the relevant sections of the current edition of the IET
Regulations. The door opening of the base compartment shall be not less than
500mm x 100mm and shall be positioned to provide easy access to the control
equipment. A weatherproof door shall be provided for the opening preferably of
the flush fitting type and shall be fitted with a tamper proof lock, the same pattern
of lock being used throughout. All locks are to be liberally treated with silicon
Page 184 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
grease. Two keys are to be provided per 10 large base posts supplied. A cable
access slot shall be provided not less than150mm x 75mm for cabling purposes
shall be provided approximately 150mm below ground level. A separate 6mm or
8mm diameter brass or stainless steel earthing stud, complete with two brass
washers and a brass nut and locknut shall be provided on the housing in a
suitable and easily accessible position. The distance from the face of the
baseboard to the inside of the front of the housing shall be at least 100mm.
1.18 A 6mm brass or stainless steel earthing stud, complete with two brass washers
and a brass nut and lock nut, shall be provided on metal sign doors.
Permanent Bollards (Non-Illuminated) 1.19 Permanent non-illuminated bollards shall be of the following types and others
where instructed by the Employer:
Permanent Non-Illuminated Bollards (Series 1200)
Type
Reference
Bell bollard
Standard Detail 1200-1
Half Bell bollard
Cast iron Doric
Standard Detail 1200-1
Stainless steel (Broxap VX47008975)
Streetscape Manual
Glasdon Caine
Streetscape Manual
Townscape St Pancras
Streetscape Manual
Cannon
Streetscape Manual
Glasdon Manchester
1.20 All bollards whether new, replaced or reinstalled shall be treated with a protective
system comprising a black polyester powder coating (approved by the Employer)
or painted black (or other colour as instructed by the Employer) in accordance
with the requirements of Appendix 19/6.
Permanent Traffic Bollards
1.21 Permanent traffic bollards shall be illuminated or retroreflective bollards which
incorporate a traffic sign (usually a directional arrow). The type of bollard required
will be identified on instructions associated with specific works.
1.22 Bollards that may be ordered include those listed below and others as instructed
by the Employer:
Page 185 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Illuminated Bollards (Series 1250)
Type
Typical Bollards
Type
1
permanent
internally Simonsigns LED Simbol baselight
illuminated flexible bollard (270mm bollard or equivalent
roundel) complete
Type
2
permanent
internally Glasdon Rebound Signmaster LED
illuminated flexible bollard (270mm baselight bollard
roundel) complete
Type
3
permanent
internally Simonsigns LED Contour baselight
illuminated flexible bollard (600mm bollard or equivalent
roundel) complete
Type 4 permanent solar powered Pudsey Diamond Solaboll bollard
bollard
Retrorelective Bollards (Series 1200)
Type
Typical Bollards
Type 1 permanent retroreflecting Weebol Plus by Simmonsigns Ltd or
bollard
equivalent with 270mm roundel
Type 2 Permanent retroreflecting Sign Post Solutions SPS360 flexible
bollard
bollard with NAL socket or equivalent
(270mm roundel)
1.23 Bollards shall be vertically installed, assembled, correctly orientated, connected
and left in good working order, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Base boxes shall be securely fixed with rag bolts in their correct
positions.
1.24 All illuminated bollards shall be controlled by a Power Sense Unit (installed in
lighting unit isolator). These controls shall be located in an adjacent feeder pillar
or lamp column.
1.25 Units shall be numbered if required by the Employer.
Replace any bollard (non-illuminated or illuminated) with permanent
retroreflecting bollard Existing bollards shall be disconnected, taken down and where applicable all electrical
wiring removed back to the supply point. New bollards shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. On completion reinstatement should be undertaken
to match existing surfaces and all surplus material removed from site.
Traffic Sign Lantern Units 1.26 External traffic sign lighting units shall be:
Page 186 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Type A Lantern - Simmons Signs LED LUA lantern finished in black (Pecu 5/5
lux) or equivalent manufactured to the requirements of SHW Clause 1407 and
approved by the Employer.
or
Type B Lantern - Simmons Signs LED LUB lantern, finished in black (Pecu 5/5
lux) or equivalent manufactured to the requirements of SHW Clause 1407 and
approved by the Employer.
or
Type C Lantern - Sign Post Solutions Enterprise LED lantern, finished in black
(Pecu 5/5 lux) or equivalent manufactured to the requirements of SHW Clause
1407 and approved by the Employer.
1.27 Brackets and lanterns shall be securely fixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Under no circumstances are holes to be drilled in
new posts unless written instructions are issued by the Employer.
1.28 Where two posts are used to support a single sign plate, suitable sign light
brackets are to be used that will enable the sign light to be correctly positioned
to provide adequate lighting on the face of the sign plate.
1.29 Under no circumstances is TESPA Band to be used to secure sign light brackets
or sign plates to posts. Only post top or clamp type fixings are permissible.
Illuminated Traffic Sign Units
1.30 External traffic sign lighting units shall be:
Type
Sign
Lantern Post
TSU1
600 mm dia. internally illuminated LED
Single large base
Simmons Signs Invinca (Employer to
76mm dia. Mallatite
confirm diagram number on order)
post with Plastic PPA
finished colour of sign to be black (Pecu
Coating
5/5 lux) post top mounted
TSU2
600 mm dia. internally illuminated LED
Single large base
sign unit from ONE2SEE (Employer to
76mm dia. Mallatite
confirm diagram number on order)
post with Plastic PPA
finished color of sign to be black( Pecu
Coating
5/5 lux) post top mounted
TSU3
Permanent retro reflective externally Type A
Single large base
illuminated traffic sign face
76mm dia. Mallatite
post with Plastic PPA
Coating
TSU4
Permanent retro reflective externally Type B
Single large base
illuminated traffic sign face
76mm dia. Mallatite
post with Plastic PPA
Coating
Page 187 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
TSU5
Permanent retro reflective externally Type C
Single large base
illuminated traffic sign face
76mm dia. Mallatite
post with Plastic PPA
Coating
Internally Illuminated Signs
1.31 Internally illuminated traffic signs shall be:
Type A - LED Simmons Signs Invinca (Employer to confirm diagram number on
order), finished color of sign to be black (Pecu 5/5 lux) (or equivalent approved
by the Employer)
or
Type B - ONE2 SEE’ internally illuminated LED sign light (Employer to confirm
diagram number on order), finished color of sign to be black (Pecu 5/5 lux) (or
equivalent approved by the Employer)
School Control Flashing Amber Units
1.32 The Contractor may be required to install new school crossing control flashing
units or replace existing life expired equipment.
1.33 School crossing control flashing units shall be supplied, installed, connected and
tested to ensure proper operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.34 Units shall be wired such that the failure of one lamp shall not affect the operation
of the other lamp. All internal wiring shall comply with the requirements of the
I.E.T. Wiring Regulations and the provisions contained in Appendix 14/6.
1.35 Units may be of the following types:-
Type 1 – Pulsa LED by Simmonsigns (or equivalent approved by the Employer)
Type 2 – 4x4 Pulsa LED by Simmonsigns (or equivalent approved by the
Employer)
Refuge Island and Zebra Crossing Beacon and Posts
1.36 The Contractor may be required to install new beacons or replace damaged or
life expired equipment.
1.37 Beacons shall be supplied, installed, connected and tested to ensure proper
operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.38 All internal wiring shall comply with the requirements of the I.E.T. Wiring
Regulations and the provisions contained in Appendix 14/6.
1.39 Units may be of the following types:-
Page 188 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Type 1 – Modubel by Simmonsigns (or equivalent approved by the Employer)
Type 2 – Midubel by Simmonsigns (or equivalent approved by the Employer)
Type 3 - Refuge (white) LED beacon assembly & globe by Simmonsigns (or
equivalent approved by the Employer)
Type 4 - AVG-3 Anti-Vandal Gallery with CELstar 3F LED Belisha lamp (or
equivalent approved by the Employer)
1.40 Posts shall be non-illuminated unless otherwise instructed by the Employer.
Illuminated posts shall be Modupost by Simmonsigns (or equivalent approved by
the Employer).
Vehicle Actuated Signs
1.41 The Employer utilises Vehicle Actuated Signs (regularly moved between sites)
to support enforcement activity.
1.42 The requirements for works on VAS of any type shall comprise:
a. Installation of VAS supplied by the Employer or purchased through a
nominated sub-contractor, at new sites and sites where VAS have
previously been sited;
b. maintenance taking down, storing, repair (through nominated sub-
contractor) of vehicle actuated signs; and
c. where required provision and connection of electrical supply.
Page 189 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 12/3 TRAFFIC SIGNS: ROAD MARKINGS AND STUDS
Road Markings 1.1 Road markings shall be white, yellow or red complying with BSEN 1436 Table 6,
as appropriate. Insofar as BSEN 1436 refers only to white, yellow and black
thermoplastic materials, for the purposes of this Specification, all references to
yellow material in BSEN 1436 shall be deemed to apply equally to red material.
Yellow lines shall be standard lemon yellow (BS 381C No 355), except when
used in conservation areas where they shall be primrose yellow (BS 381C No
310).
1.2 All permanent road markings shall be formed from thermoplastic material in
accordance with BSEN 1871 or permanent preformed road markings in
accordance with BSEN 1790. All markings shall be reflectorised. They shall be
tested in road trials to the Roll-over class P5 in accordance with the procedure
stated in BSEN 1824 to demonstrate compliance with the performance
requirements as stated in sub-clauses 1.3 to 1.7 below. The test report shall give
particulars of the quality and quantity of the material, including drop on glass
beads laid at the test site for future reference and comparison purposes should
such a need arise. Painted road markings shall only be used transversely on
kerbs to indicate parking or loading restrictions, or on the carriageway in
association with speed cameras.
1.3 Road markings shall have the following road performance as defined in BSEN
1436 for the period of the functional life starting from the date of application or
when the road is trafficked, whichever is later. The materials to be used shall be
to the same mix, material quality, quantity and rate of application as used on the
test site.
1 = White; 2 = Yellow; 3 = Red
Property
BS EN 1436
Requirement
Value
Reference
Colour
Table 6
1. White
1. x,y coordinates
2. Yellow
given
(Class Y1, Y2)
2. x,y coordinates
3. Red
given
3. see 1.4 below
Luminance
Table 5
1. Class B2
1. 0.30
2. Class B1
2. 0.20
3. Class B1
3. 0.20
Skid
Table 7
Class S3
55
Resistance
Retro-
Table 2
1. Class R2
1. 100
reflectivity
Class of RL for
2. Class R1
2. 80
dry markings
3. Class R1
3. 80
Page 190 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1.4 Red road markings shall be to BS 381C Colour No 537 (Signal Red). The initial
red colour shall lie within the polygon defined by the following coordinates
according to the CIE colour measuring system:
X
Y
0.570 0.340
0.650 0.340
0.690 0.300
0.520 0.300
0.510 0.320
0.570 0.340
1.5 Unless specified, all markings shall be reflectorised with glass beads in
accordance with BSEN 1423 and BSEN 1424 by incorporation into the road
marking mixture and to the wet surface of the marking. The glass beads shall not
have more than 1000ppm of arsenic trioxide, 200ppm of lead and 1000ppm of
antimony. The
Contractor shall supply test certificates showing compliance with
these requirements.
1.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out of all lines, words,
arrows and stripes. Unless otherwise directed, on roads having reflectorised road
studs, intermittent longitudinal lines shall be laid symmetrically between the
studs. At tie-ins, new and existing road markings are to have a flowing alignment.
1.7 The length and width of road markings shall be as specified, with a permitted
tolerance in accordance with TSRGD 2016.
Removal of Road Markings
1.8 Further to Clause 1212 permanent road markings shall be removed by one of
the following methods:
i) hand grinding (scabbling);
ii) motorised grinding;
iii) hydroblasting (see 1.14 to 1.19);
iv) planing.
The Contractor shall adopt best practical means to limit environmental impact of
the work. Sufficient protection shall be provided such that users of the highway
are not exposed to debris, spray, or any other nuisance caused by any road
marking removal.
1.9 The Contractor shall submit a method statement for the approval of the Employer
outlining the method to be used not less than 7 days prior to commencement of
work. When required by the Employer, the Contractor shall carry out a
representative trial of his intended method of removal.
1.10 Waste material arising from the erasure of permanent road markings shall be
carefully removed using a mechanical (road) sweeper so that the surface is clean
Page 191 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
and free from dust. Handsweeping and collection of arisings shall only be used
with the approval of the Employer.
1.11 Where existing road markings are to be replaced, the markings shall be removed
to below aggregate height. Prior to the application of new road markings, a tack
coat compatible with the road surface and the marking material shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.12 Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer, the removal/replacement shall be
carried out as a combined operation such that the new markings are applied on
the same day that the old markings are removed.
1.13 Where existing road markings are to be removed and not replaced, the
thermoplastic material shall be removed to its full depth. Any residual marking or
abrasion of the surface shall be obscured using suitable bituminous slurry,
complying with the requirements of Series 700 and 900.
Removal of Road Markings by Hydroblasting
1.14 Where appropriate the Contractor shall inspect the pavement surface to assess
its suitability for hydroblasting. The Contractor shall notify the Employer if the
existing pavement surface is not suitable for hydroblasting.
1.15 The Contractor shall ensure that any hydroblasting activities do not damage the
existing asphaltic surface course.
1.16 Where hydroblasting occurs on open graded asphalt surface course (including
stone mastic asphalts, thin surface course asphalts), the Contractor shall ensure
that the hydroblasted area is sealed with either bituminous filler (for example
microsurfacing, surface dressing or similar) or resin bonded product with a
current BBA HAPAS Certificate. The minimum wet Skid Resistance value when
newly installed shall not be less than 60 when determined using the portable skid
resistance tester (pendulum) in accordance with BS EN 13036-4, except that for
sealant widths less than 75mm, the narrow slider shall be used over the full
126mm sliding length utilising the normal slider scale C.
1.17 Where hydroblasting occurs on high friction (calcined bauxite) surfacing, the
hydroblasted area shall be covered with high friction surfacing in accordance with
the requirements of Clause 924.
1.18 The Contractor shall ensure that any hydroblasting activities that result in
removal of more than 5mm depth of the existing asphaltic layer are repaired in
accordance with the treatments compliant with Clause 711.
1.19 Alternative methods for repairing damaged hydroblasted surfaces which do not
comply with the requirements of Clause 711 shall be approved by the Employer.
Page 192 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Masking of Existing Road Markings
1.20 Masking shall only be undertaken where instructed by the Employer. The
Contractor’s proposed method of masking existing road markings shall be
agreed with the Employer.
1.21 When black masking materials are required to cover existing permanent road
markings, they shall comply with BS 7962. The total thickness of original and
masking materials shall not exceed 6mm.
Page 193 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 12/5: TRAFFIC SIGNS: TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Permanent Traffic Signals
1.1 Requirements for permanent traffic signals are described in Clause 1217SR.
1.2 Additions
/Alterations to the permanent traffic signals shall be undertaken by the
Transport for London or their respective nominated Contractors. The contractor
shall allow in his rates for engagement with Transport for London or their respective
nominated Contractors and programming and phasing works to suit their
requirements.
Temporary Portable Traffic Signals
1.3 All temporary Portable traffic signals shall; comply with Clause 164AR.
1.4 The Contractor shall apply to the Employer for permission to use temporary
portable traffic signals at least 6 weeks before their use.
Page 194 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 12/10: CYCLE PARKING
1.1 The Contractor shall provide a range of cycle parking solutions as instructed by the
Employer.
1.2 Most common solutions are Hoop Cycle Stands as shown on standard detail 1200-
4 and Sheffield Cycle Stands as shown on standard detail 1200-5.
1.3 All cycle parking equipment shall be treated with with a protective system
comprising a black polyester powder coating (approved by the Employer) or
painted black (or other colour as instructed by the Employer) in accordance with
the requirements of Appendix 19/6.
1.4 The Employer is also investigating a range of other solutions such as Bike Hanger
and the like. Such “provide and manage” systems may be purchased as prime cost
items from nominated suppliers during the course of the contract.
Page 195 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 13/10: LIGHTING COLUMNS, BRACKETS AND MOUNTINGS
Street Lighting Columns and Brackets
1.1
All equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall be installed in
accordance with Street Lighting Fixing Details (Standard Details 13-01 to 13-07
inclusive), manufacturer’s instructions, Statutory (and other) Regulations,
Codes of Practice and the SHW.
1.2
Unless specified otherwise e.g. by reference to specific types of lighting column
units all lighting columns and brackets shall: -
a. be manufactured by a company accredited under the Quality Assurance
Scheme ISO 9002 and the Manufacturer shall supply a copy of the
Accreditation certificate with their tender;
b. be manufactured in accordance with BS5649/BSEN40;
c. be manufactured from parallel sided plain tubular structural steel to meet
the requirements of BSEN 40 -5, 2002;
d. welding procedures must be approved and in accordance with BSEN 288
and all welders must be approved to BSEN 287. Welding is then to be
carried out in accordance with BSEN1011;
e. be identified with the manufacturers name or mark, date and batch number
of production;
f.
be finished hot dipped galvanised to BSEN1461.
1.3
The columns and brackets shall be designed and manufactured from steel tube
to the detail given in the Lighting Column Requirements, at paragraph 1.15 of
this appendix.
1.4
Where the column shaft is supported by an internal ring then this shall be
square shaped to provide four clearance holes to prevent acid being trapped
during the pre galvanising cleaning process. The fabrication of the column and
bracket shall ensure that there are no sharp edges which could damage
electrical cables either during installation or during normal service. Where
cables change direction from a horizontal to vertical direction within the bracket,
the holes shall be constructed as large as possible and fitted with an anti chafe
ring or similar.
1.5
On completion of galvanising all columns shall be free from imperfections
including porosity and the galvanising shall be fettled and rasped to remove all
spikes and sharp edges leaving smooth edges prior to handling and further
protective treatment.
1.6
All lighting column doors shall be surface fit and fully interchangeable with all
Page 196 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
other doors. The door shall be secured by single fixing bolts. The door locking
bolts shall be industry standard triangular headed bolts recessed into the door
panel. The door shall have an earthing lug provided with a M8 sized hole.
1.7
The door locking bolt threads shall be liberally lubricated with silicon grease
prior to leaving the factory. A door key shall be provided for every 10 columns
supplied.
1.8
The lighting column shall be fitted with a full length non-hydroscopic and
bitumen impregnated/rot resistant backboard of minimum thickness 15mm,
secured by two recessed threaded screws. The baseboard shall be 650 mm x
110mm minimum.
1.9
The bracket and top of the column spigot shall be fitted with an anti rotation
device to ensure the bracket can be secured in four positions, in line with the
centre of the door opening and at 90 degrees to the opening The bracket shall
be secured by two rows of four grub screws . The grub screws shall be of a
length that they do not protrude more than 2mm from the bracket pot when they
are fully tightened home. The grub screws shall be supplied separate from the
brackets and include a 10% surplus for the number of brackets delivered.
1.10 The bracket shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the column and
shall be hot dipped galvanised and protected or painted in the same manner as
the column (as stated in Appendix 19/6). The bracket shall be designed to fit
onto the shaft by means of a reducing spigot so that the bracket cup and shaft
are of the same diameter.
1.11 The luminaire will be directly mounted onto the horizontal bracket arm without
the requirement for a spigot.
1.12 The column base compartment shall be provided with an electrical earthing
point located in the lower area and positioned such that it does not obstruct the
fitting of electrical switch and isolation equipment. The edges of the earthing
point shall be smooth and rounded. The earthing point shall be fitted with a
brass bolt M6X25, 2 washers and one nut.
1.13 The lighting column root shall have a cable entry hole of approximately 150 mm
x 75 mm at a depth of 350 mm to 500 mm below ground level. The cable entry
hole shall be provide directly under the door opening
1.14 All lighting columns shall be packed / bundled for transportation. Packs should
be squared off to allow stacking in storage and have added wooden packing
pieces at steel strapping points. Further packing to include either:-
a. Returnable wooden packing supports scalloped to prevent columns moving
or touching during transportation and rolling when the pack is opened , or
b. With returnable wooden packing supports block ended to prevent columns
rolling when the pack is opened. Additionally the column roots shall be
protected with some suitable form of packaging to protect the root protective
Page 197 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
treatments from rubbing or chaffing with adjacent column during
transportation.
Where possible brackets are to be packed in returnable crates for forklift or Hiab
unloading
All columns shall be loaded and packaged in a safe manner to provide easy off
loading by forklift although deliveries with Hiab crane would be an advantage.
1.15 Lighting Column Requirements
Nominal Height
5 metre
6 metre
8 metre
10 metre
Base section
140 mm o/d
140 mm o/d
168 mm o/d
194 mm o/d
tube
by 5.0 mm
by 5.0 mm
by 6.3 mm
by 6.3 mm
thickness
thickness
thickness
thickness
Base height from
1250 mm
1250 mm
1300 mm
1300 mm
ground level to
reduction to shaft
Ground level to
500 mm
500 mm
500 mm
500 mm
bottom of door
opening
Door opening
600 mm x
600 mm x
Flush fit 600
Flush fit 600
115 mm
115 mm
mm x 115
mm x 115
mm
mm
Door fixing
Anti-vandal
Anti-vandal
Anti-vandal
Anti-vandal
locking bolts
locking bolts
locking bolts
locking bolts
Backboard
650 mm x
650 mm x
650 mm x
650 mm x
110 mm
110 mm
110 mm
110 mm
Base root depth
1000 mm
1000 mm
1200 mm
1500 mm
Cable entry hole
150 mm x
150 mm x
150 mm x
150 mm x
75mm at a
75mm at a
75mm at a
75mm at a
depth of 350
depth of 350
depth of 350
depth of 350
mm to 500
mm to 500
mm to 500
mm to 500
mm below
mm below
mm below
mm below
ground level
ground level
ground level
ground level
Shaft tube
76mm x 3.2
76mm x 3.2
114 mm x
140 mm x
mm
mm
4.9 mm
4.9 mm
thickness
thickness
thickness
thickness
Bracket arm
48 mm o/d
48 mm o/d
60 mm o/d
60 mm o/d
tube
tube
tube
tube
3.2mm
3.2mm
3.2mm
3.2mm
thickness
thickness
thickness
thickness
Bracket outreach
750 mm or
750 mm or
1500 mm
1500 mm
Page 198 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Rear bracket
100 mm
100 mm
150 mm
150 mm
extension
fitted with
fitted with
fitted with
fitted with
internal
internal
internal
internal
plastic plug
plastic plug
plastic plug
plastic plug
Luminaire
10 kg and
10 kg and
15 kg and
15 kg and
loadings
0.6 metres
0.6 metres
1.5 metres
1.5 metres
squared
squared
squared
squared
Bracket fixing
8 grub
8 grub
8 grub
8 grub
screws in
screws in
screws in
screws in
two rows of
two rows of
two rows of
two rows of
four
four
four
four
Column root
Root and
Root and
Root and
Root and
protection
300mm
300mm
300mm
300mm
above
above
above
above
ground
ground
ground
ground
Glass Flake
Glass Flake
Glass Flake
Glass Flake
Reinforced
Reinforced
Reinforced
Reinforced
Epoxy
Epoxy
Epoxy
Epoxy
system
system
system
system
Excavation, Backfill and Reinstatement
1.16 Where instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall excavate trial holes to
determine the size, nature and extent of any below ground obstructions. The
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for the Employer to be
present on site prior to the commencement of the excavation and shall not
backfill any such excavations without the express consent of the Employer.
1.17 During excavations, the Contractor shall take every care to avoid damage to
underground services, the public highway, street furniture and all other property
whether private or public. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to Appendix
1/16 of the Specification.
1.18 The Contractor shall carefully lift and set aside for re-use turf, stone flags,
concrete slabs, blocks or any special paving material for re-use, unless
instructed otherwise by the Employer.
1.19 Where columns to be removed support signs, time plates, name plates, litter
bins, etc. they shall be carefully taken down and set aside for re-use, unless
otherwise instructed by the Employer.
1.20 Each hole for columns shall be dug by hand for a planting depth as shown on
standard manufacturer’s details Excavations shall be made to the appropriate
unit planting depth and shall be of a minimum width of 150mm clear all round
the base of the unit. The disturbance of the surrounding soil shall be reduced
to the minimum possible.
1.21 Where loose soil, sand, compacted ground or other ground conditions which
the Contractor considers to be unsuitable are encountered, advice shall be
Page 199 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
sought forthwith from the Employer.
1.22 Where redundant units are removed or where it is found necessary to abandon
a prepared position for a new unit, the excavation so formed shall be backfilled
immediately with approved material and well consolidated. All surfaces shall be
reinstated to match existing and left clean and tidy and all surplus material
removed.
1.23 After concrete placement, all excavations shall be backfilled with ST5 concrete
and well compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm. The finished level
following backfilling and reinstatement shall be substantially the same as that
of the surrounding ground. All surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing.
1.24 Columns shall be erected so that the door(s) is on the opposite side to on-
coming traffic. The columns shall be erected truly vertical.
1.25 All surplus excavated material and pavings shall be removed from site.
1.26 Luminaires and brackets (if required) shall not be attached to the column until
the concrete has set.
1.27 The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary reinstatement where
permanent reinstatement is not carried out immediately. Permanent
reinstatement must always be completed within 28 days.
1.28 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate signing to warn
members of the public of wet paint. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
damage caused by dripping paint on objects and people etc. touching the wet
paint.
Replumb Lighting Columns or Traffic Sign Posts
1.29 Columns and traffic sign posts shall be re-plumbed where instructed by the
Employer. All works shall comply with Clause 1320AR.
Page 200 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 13/11: SUMMARY OF ROAD LIGHTING UNITS INCLUDED IN
SCHEDULE OF RATES
Column Reference
Column
Brackets or
Luminaire
Adapter
Standard Road
Lighting Units
Type 6/1S, Standard,
6 metre nominal height
Black post top
6m Unit
galvanized steel
mounted Urbis Axia 24
(plascoat) road lighting
LED luminaire
column
Type 6/2S, Standard,
6 metre nominal height
Black post top
6m Unit
galvanized steel
mounted Urbis Axia 32
(plascoat) road lighting
LED luminaire
column
Type 6/3S, Standard,
6 metre nominal height
Black post top
6m Unit
galvanized steel
mounted Urbis Axia 40
(plascoat) road lighting
LED luminaire
column
Type 6/4S, Standard,
6 metre nominal height
Black post top
6m Unit
galvanized steel
mounted Urbis Axia 48
(plascoat) road lighting
LED luminaire
column
Type 6/5S, Standard,
6 metre nominal height
Black TRT Aspect 2 49
6m Unit
galvanized steel
to 66w LED luminaire
(plascoat) road lighting
(power setting to be
column
agreed by Employer)
Type 8/1S, Standard,
8 metre nominal height
Post top adapter
Black post top
8m Unit
galvanized steel
(plascoat)
mounted Urbis Axia
(plascoat) road lighting
Gen 2.2 luminaire
column with
Type 8/2S, Standard,
, 8 metre nominal height Single bracket arm
Black TRT Aspect 3 86
8m Unit
galvanized steel
(plascoat)
to 105w LED luminaire
(plascoat) road lighting
(power setting to be
column
agreed by Employer)
Type 10/1S,
10 metre nominal height Post top adapter
Black post top
Standard, 10m Unit
galvanized steel
(plascoat)
mounted Urbis Axia
(plascoat) road lighting
Gen 2.2 luminaire
column
Type 10/2S,
10 metre nominal height Single bracket arm
Black TRT Aspect 3 86
Standard, 10m Unit
galvanized steel
(plascoat)
to 105w LED
luminaire (power
Page 201 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(plascoat) road lighting
setting to be agreed by
column
Employer)
Heritage Road
Lighting Units
Type 4/1H, Heritage
4 metre nominal height, Purpose made swan
Top entry Urbis small
Unit
refurbished cast iron
neck uplift bracket
Albany 48 LED. The
column (from Paul
suitable for top entry
finished colour of the
bracket shall match
Cleghorn), finished in
mounted luminaire
the column shaft and
black polyester powder
(as supplied by Mark luminaire canopy (RAL
coating protection
Bailey Associates),
9005).
system (approved by
finished in black
the Employer) or
polyester powder
painted in accordance
coating protection
with Appendix 19/6
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in
accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Type 4/2H, Heritage
4 metre nominal height,
Purpose made swan
Luminaire to be a top
Unit
refurbished cast iron
neck uplift bracket
entry small Birkdale
column (from Paul
suitable for top entry
LED from Robert
Cleghorn), finished in
mounted luminaire
Bennett Associates.
black polyester powder
(as supplied by Mark The finished colour of
coating protection
Bailey Associates),
the bracket shall
system (approved by
finished in black
match the column
the Employer) or
polyester powder
shaft and luminaire
painted in accordance
coating protection
canopy (RAL 9005).
with Appendix 19/6
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in
accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Type 5/1H, Heritage
5.5metre nominal
Swan neck bracket
Top entry mounted
Unit
height, galvanised steel
from Lighting Design
small Birkdale finished
lighting column, finished Solutions, finished in
in polyester powder
in black polyester
black polyester
coated Black, fitted
powder coating
powder coating
with a Chatsworth
protection system
protection system
style embellishment kit
(approved by the
(approved by the
from Mark Bailey
Employer) or painted in
Employer) or painted associates
accordance with
in accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Type 6/1H, Heritage
6 metres nominal
Castlenau
Small Birkdale
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
luminaire with LED
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
4000K colour
temperature, finished
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
in polyester powder
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
coated Black
Page 202 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Flake) root protection
0.75m single bracket Polycarbonate
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Teardrop Protector,
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Suspension for 1¼
inch BSP
black polyester powder
powder coating
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Type 6/2H, Heritage
6 metres nominal
Castlenau
Small Albany luminaire
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
with LED 4000K colour
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
temperature, finished
in polyester powder
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
coated Black
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
Polycarbonate
Flake) root protection
0.75m single bracket Teardrop Protector,
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Suspension for 1¼
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
inch BSP
black polyester powder
powder coating
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Type 8/1H, Heritage
8 metres nominal
Castlenau
Large Birkdale
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
luminaire with LED
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.0m single bracket
coated Black
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Polycarbonate
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Teardrop Protector,
black polyester powder
powder coating
Suspension for 1¼
coating protection
protection system
inch BSP
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Type 8/2H, Heritage
8 metres nominal
Castlenau
Large Albany luminaire
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
with LED 4000K colour
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
temperature, finished
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
in polyester powder
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
coated Black
Flake) root protection
1.0m single bracket
Polycarbonate
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Teardrop Protector,
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Suspension for 1¼
black polyester powder
powder coating
inch BSP
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
Page 203 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Type 8/3H, Heritage
8 metres nominal
Castlenau
Two number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Albany luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.0m double bracket
coated Black
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Polycarbonate
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Teardrop Protector,
black polyester powder
powder coating
Suspension for 1¼
coating protection
protection system
inch BSP
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
8 metres nominal
Castlenau
Type 8/4H, Heritage
Two number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Birkdale luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.0m double bracket
coated Black
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Polycarbonate
Teardrop Protector,
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Suspension for 1¼
black polyester powder
powder coating
inch BSP
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
Type 10/1H, Heritage
Large Albany luminaire
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
with LED 4000K colour
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
temperature, finished
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
in polyester powder
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
coated Black
Flake) root protection
1.16m single bracket Polycarbonate
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Teardrop Protector,
Suspension for 1¼
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
inch BSP
black polyester powder
powder coating
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
Type 10/2H, Heritage
Large Birkdale
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
luminaire with LED
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.16m single bracket coated Black
from Lighting Design
with scroll, finished
Polycarbonate
Teardrop Protector,
Page 204 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
Suspension for 1¼
black polyester powder
powder coating
inch BSP
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
Type 10/3H, Heritage
Two number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Albany luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.16m double
coated Black
from Lighting Design
bracket with scroll,
Polycarbonate
Teardrop Protector,
Solutions, finished in
finished in black
Suspension for 1¼
black polyester powder
polyester powder
inch BSP
coating protection
coating protection
system (approved by
system (approved by
the Employer) or
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
painted in
with Appendix 19/6
accordance with
Appendix 19/6
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
Type 10/4H, Heritage
Two number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Birkdale luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.16m double
coated Black
from Lighting Design
bracket with scroll,
Polycarbonate
Teardrop Protector,
Solutions, finished in
finished in black
Suspension for 1¼
black polyester powder
polyester powder
inch BSP
coating protection
coating protection
system (approved by
system (approved by
the Employer) or
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
painted in
with Appendix 19/6
accordance with
Appendix 19/6
10 metres nominal
Chatsworth
Type 10/5H, Heritage
Large Albany luminaire
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
with LED 4000K colour
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
temperature, finished
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
in polyester powder
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
coated Black
Flake) root protection
1.16m single bracket Polycarbonate
from Lighting Design
with hoop, finished
Teardrop Protector,
Suspension for 1¼
Solutions, finished in
in black polyester
inch BSP
black polyester powder
powder coating
coating protection
protection system
system (approved by
(approved by the
the Employer) or
Employer) or painted
painted in accordance
in accordance with
with Appendix 19/6
Appendix 19/6
Page 205 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Type 10/6H, Heritage
10 metres nominal
Chatsworth
large Birkdale
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
luminaire with LED
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature, finished
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
in polyester powder
Flake) root protection
1.16 metre single
coated Black
from Lighting Design
bracket with hoop,
Polycarbonate
Solutions, finished in
finished in black
Teardrop Protector,
black polyester powder
polyester powder
Suspension for 1¼
coating protection
coating protection
inch BSP
system (approved by
system (approved by
the Employer) or
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
painted in
with Appendix 19/6
accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Type 10/7H, Heritage
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
One number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Albany luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature mounted
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
at 10 metres and a
Flake) root protection
1.16m single bracket small Albany led
from Lighting Design
with Scroll at 10
luminaire mounted at 6
Solutions, finished in
metres and a twin
metres, both finished
black polyester powder
staggered bracket at
in polyester powder
coating protection
6 metres, finished in
coated Black,
system (approved by
black polyester
Polycarbonate
the Employer) or
powder coating
Teardrop Protector,
painted in accordance
protection system
Suspension for 1¼
with Appendix 19/6
(approved by the
inch BSP
Employer) or painted
in accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Type 10/8H, Heritage
10 metres nominal
Castlenau
One number large
Unit
height, heavy duty hot
decorative
Birkdale luminaire with
dipped galvanised steel
embellishment kit for
LED 4000K colour
lighting column
(base, neck, ring,
temperature mounted
complete with (glass
horn & spike) and
at 10 metres and a
Flake) root protection
1.16 metre single
small Birkdale led
from Lighting Design
bracket with Scroll at luminaire mounted at 6
Solutions, finished in
10 metres and a twin metres both finished in
black polyester powder
staggered bracket at
polyester powder
coating protection
6 metres, finished in
coated Black,
system (approved by
black polyester
Polycarbonate
the Employer) or
powder coating
Teardrop Protector,
painted in accordance
protection system
Suspension for 1¼
with Appendix 19/6
(approved by the
inch BSP
Employer) or painted
in accordance with
Appendix 19/6
Type 10/9H, Heritage
Heavy Duty 10mtr
Cascade Style
Large Birkdale
Unit
Decorative Column c/w
Bracket, finished in
luminaire with LED
Cast with Muswell Hill
black polyester
4000K colour
Page 206 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Embellishments,
powder coating
temperature, finished
finished in black
protection system
in polyester powder
polyester powder
(approved by the
coated Black
coating protection
Employer) or painted Polycarbonate
system (approved by
in accordance with
Teardrop Protector,
the Employer) or
Appendix 19/6, from
Suspension for 1¼
painted in accordance
Mark Bailey
inch BSP
with Appendix 19/6,
Associates
from Mark Bailey
Associates
New Number
Heavy Duty 10mtr
Double / Twin
2 no. large Birkdale
Decorative Column c/w
Cascade Style
luminaires with LED
Cast with Muswell Hill
Bracket, finished in
4000K colour
Embellishments,
black polyester
temperature, finished
finished in black
powder coating
in polyester powder
polyester powder
protection system
coated Black
coating protection
(approved by the
Polycarbonate
system (approved by
Employer) or painted Teardrop Protector,
the Employer) or
in accordance with
Suspension for 1¼
painted in accordance
Appendix 19/6, from
inch BSP
with Appendix 19/6,
Mark Bailey
from Mark Bailey
Associates
Associates
Type 10/10H,
10 metres nominal
Single aluminium
Side entry Urbis Furyo
Heritage Unit
height, Aluminum
outreach bracket,
140w CPO-T luminaire
column, from Mark
from Mark Bailey
Bailey Associates
Associates
Raise and Lower
Road Lighting Units Type 5/1L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top entry
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Muirfield LED
base hinged spring
luminaire by Robert
operated raise and
Bennett Associates
lowering galvanised
steel column with glass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6 with
Chatsworth decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck ring)
Type 5/2L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top entry
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Small
Page 207 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
base hinged spring
Abbey 48 LED
operated raise and
luminaire.
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Castlenau
decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck ring)
Type 5/3L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Swan neck bracket,
Black top entry
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
finished in black
mounted Small
base hinged spring
polyester powder
Birkdale LED
operated raise and
coating protection
luminaire.
lowering galvanised
system (approved by
steel column with grass
the Employer) or
flake root protection,
painted in
finished in black
accordance with
polyester powder
Appendix 19/6
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Chatsworth
decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck, ring, horn
& spike) .
Type 5/4L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Swan neck bracket,
Black top entry
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
finished in black
mounted Urbis Small
base hinged spring
polyester powder
Albany 48 LED
operated raise and
coating protection
luminaire.
lowering galvanised
system (approved by
steel column with grass
the Employer) or
flake root protection,
painted in
finished in black
accordance with
polyester powder
Appendix 19/6
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Castlenau
decorative
embellishment kit for
Page 208 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(base, neck, ring, horn
& spike)
Type 5/5L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted TRT aspect 1
base hinged spring
narrow beam LED
operated raise and
luminaire (power
lowering galvanised
setting to be agreed
steel column with grass
with Employer)
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/6L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Axia
base hinged spring
Gen 2.1 16 LED
operated raise and
luminaire
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/7L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black, post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Kio
base hinged spring
LED luminaire
operated raise and
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/8L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Axia 16
base hinged spring
LED luminaire
operated raise and
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
Page 209 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/9L, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Axia 24
base hinged spring
LED luminaire
operated raise and
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/10L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
and Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Urbis Axia 32
base hinged spring
LED luminaire
operated raise and
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/11L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top entry
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite
mounted Urbis Small
Plascoat base hinged
Abbey 48 LED
spring operated raise
luminaire
and lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Chatsworth
decorative
Page 210 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
embellishment kit for
(base, neck ring)
Type 5/12L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top entry
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite
mounted Muirfield LED
Plascoat base hinged
luminaire by Robert
spring operated raise
Bennett Associates
and lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Castlenau
decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck ring)
Type 5/13L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Swan neck bracket,
Black top entry
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite
finished in black
mounted Urbis Small
Plascoat base hinged
polyester powder
Albany 48 LED
spring operated raise
coating protection
luminaire.
and lowering galvanised system (approved by
steel column with grass
the Employer) or
flake root protection,
painted in
finished in black
accordance with
polyester powder
Appendix 19/6
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6,
with Chatsworth
decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck, ring, horn
& spike)
Type 5/14L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Swan neck bracket,
Black top entry
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite
finished in black
mounted Small
Plascoat base hinged
polyester powder
Birkdale LED luminaire
spring operated raise
coating protection
and lowering galvanised system (approved by
steel column with grass
the Employer) or
flake root protection,
painted in
finished in black
accordance with
polyester powder
Appendix 19/6
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
Page 211 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
with Appendix 19/6,
with Castlenau
decorative
embellishment kit for
(base, neck, ring, horn
& spike)
Type 5/15L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite
mounted TRT Aspect
Plascoat base hinged
1 narrow beam LED
raise and lowering
luminaire (power
galvanised steel
setting to be agreed
column, finished in
with Employer)
black polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/16L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite base
mounted Urbis Axia
hinged raise and
Gen 2.1 16 LED
lowering galvanised
luminaire
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/17L, Raise
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
and Lower Unit
height, Mallatite base
mounted Urbis Kio
hinged raise and
LED luminaire
lowering galvanised
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/xx, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Mallatite base
mounted Turnberry
hinged raise and
LED luminaire from
lowering galvanised
Robert Bennets
steel column with grass
Associates
flake root protection,
finished in black
Page 212 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Type 5/xx, Raise and
5.5 metres nominal
Black post top
Lower Unit
height, Abacus Lighting
mounted Turnberry
base hinged spring
LED luminaire from
operated raise and
Robert Bennets
lowering galvanised
Associates
steel column with grass
flake root protection,
finished in black
polyester powder
coating protection
system (approved by
the Employer) or
painted in accordance
with Appendix 19/6
Page 213 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/1 – SITE RECORDS
1. The Contractor shall, following completion of any works, provide as-built drawings
in accordance with the requirements of Clause 1402. These shall be of a number
and in a format to be agreed with the Employer and within a time-scale to be agreed
by the Contractor with the Employer (but not more than eight weeks after
completion of the works).
2. The as-built information provided by the Contractor shall include but not be limited
to the following:
a) All relevant Maintenance and Operating Manuals for the installed equipment.
b) Lighting Layout Drawings clearly showing the type and location of all road
lighting units and lit sign units (including illuminated bollards), feeder pillars, cable
runs, duct chambers, ducted road crossings, earth electrode chambers, etc. Road
names and/or numbers and house numbers shall be shown on the drawings for
easy reference, plus a clear northing indication. The drawings shall also clearly
indicate tree positions and overhead power lines and any other services and/or
obstructions, etc which are likely to have a bearing on the lighting installation.
c) Lighting Design Calculations demonstrating compliance with the Design
Specification of the Employer (e.g. to BS 5489 and BS EN 13201). Lighting
Designs Calculations shall be clearly titled and annotated so as to describe
precisely the section of carriageway to which they refer and the lighting parameters
which they satisfy. Similarly for any area lighting calculations.
d) Lighting Column Bracket Arm and Luminaire Schedules detailing, for example,
asset identification number column material (e.g. galvanised steel), column type
(e.g. tapered tubular, etc), fixing method (e.g. planted cranked root, flange-
mounted, etc), column set-back and road chainage, bracket arm outreach and
inclination, and luminaire lamp and optic details together with supply type and
details (e.g. direct DNO supply or supplied from feeder pillar No XYZ on circuit ref
ABC, etc).
e) Where applicable (e.g. for private cable networks), Schematic Wiring Diagrams
identifying the supply feeder pillar and the road lighting units, lit signs and
illuminated bollards it supplies, together with circuit designations, cable
construction and conductor sizes indicated and all isolation devices, protective
device types, and ratings shown.
f) Where applicable (e.g. for private cable networks), Electrical Design Calculations
to demonstrate compliance with BS 7671 and BS 7430, how cable types and
conductor sizes have been determined, and all fuse ratings necessary to
demonstrate correct electrical discrimination. Where computer electrical design
programs have been employed, the design process shall be transparent in order
that any defaults and/or assumptions are clearly presented (e.g. conductor
operating and limiting temperature assumptions, multiplying factors for conductor
resistance coefficients, whether conductor impedances are assumed to be purely
resistive, or include considerations for reactance, etc).
Page 214 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
g) Test Certificates in accordance with BS 7671 with clear and unambiguous
referencing to the apparatus identified on the as-built drawing information.
h) Where applicable (e.g. for private cable networks), either on the Lighting Layout
Drawings or on separate site layout plans (as agreed with the Employer), details
of cable runs, cable joints, depths of cables and cable ducts with cable offsets
taken at 20m intervals where cables maintain a steady line from kerbs, building
lines or other permanent features, and at 5m intervals where the line of the cable
varies. This information to include details of any abandoned and/or redundant
cables left in the ground.
3. The Contractor shall provide the Employer, on a weekly basis, a schedule of work
carried out during that week. The weekly records shall describe the following,
referred to by drawing number and asset identification number:
a) Lighting columns and sign posts erected;
b) Luminaires (including lit sign units) installed;
c) Lighting columns, sign posts, illuminated guard posts and illuminated bollards
connected;
d) Reinstatements completed;
e) Electricity supplies connected; and
f) Lighting columns, sign posts and illuminated guard posts/illuminated bollards
removed.
Page 215 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/2 – LOCATION OF LIGHTING UNITS AND FEEDER PILLARS
1. The locations on site of Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars shall be indicated in
information provided in relation to specific Works ordered under the Contract or
agreed with the Employer before the commencement of any associated
groundworks on site. The term “Lighting Unit” applies to both Road Lighting Units
and Lit Sign Units (which include illuminated bollards).
2. The final locations of all Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars shall be accurately
recorded by the Contractor within the as-built information as required in Appendix
14/1.
3. The requirements for Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars shall generally be as
prescribed in the SHW including Appendix 14/4 and 14/5.
4. No supply connections – whether a Distribution Network Operator (DNO) supply or
a private network supply – shall be made to any Lighting Unit or Feeder Pillar
without the Contractor confirming compliance of the equipment to BS 7671
Requirements for Electrical Installations.
5. The Contractor shall not permit any work to be undertaken on any Lighting Unit or
Feeder Pillar unless the person to undertake that work has been deemed
competent as prescribed by the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. For further
information, see the HSE Memorandum of Guidance on the Electricity at Work
Regulations 1989.
6. Whilst Lighting Units and Feeder Pillars under a Task Order instruction will
generally have a means of secondary isolation, so avoiding the need to access any
DNO equipment in order to isolate, where for whatever reason this is not the case,
the Contractor shall liaise with the DNO and inform the Employer to secure a
resolution.
Page 216 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/4: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR LIGHTING UNITS
1. General
1.1 Further to Clause 1441AR and prior to the commencement of any works, the
Contractor shall provide the Employer with details of the proposed electrical
equipment.
1.2 The Contractor shall ensure the suitability, correctness and compatibility of all
equipment to be installed.
2. Luminaires
2.1 Luminaires shall be compatible with the columns and brackets offered in
Appendix 13/10.
2.2 Unless otherwise agreed with the Employer, luminaires shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 60598 “Luminaires”.
2.3 For luminaires that are capable of being inclined at design altitidue (i.e. tilt 5
degrees), the Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire is orientated correctly to
maintain the resultant luminaire inclination specified in the lighting design and
recorded in Appendix 13/1.
2.4 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, the luminous intensity class of
luminaires shall be G4 to G6, as described in Annex A of BS EN 13201-2 “Road
Lighting”.
2.5 The luminaire lamp enclosure shall have a minimum Ingress Protection rating of
IP 65.
2.6 The luminaire control gear enclosure shall have a minimum Ingress Protection
rating of IP 54.
2.7 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, luminaire control gear shall be of
the electronic high frequency type and capable of dimming and remote
monitoring.
2.8 Luminaires shall be individually fused in the column base compartment cut-out
with fuse ratings as recommended by the ILP’s “Code of Practice for Electrical
Safety in Highway Electrical Operations”.
2.9 The luminaire details the Contractor shall provide shall include as a minimum,
but not be restricted to the following:
a) Luminaire manufacturer;
b) Model type/reference;
c) Housing material;
d) Fixing type (e.g. post-top or side-entry);
e) Fixing angle of inclination;
Page 217 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
f) Optic type;
g) Optic setting/matrix reference;
h) Lamp setting/position;
i) Diffuser type (e.g. full cut-off flat glass polycarbonate bowl);
j) Control gear type (e.g. electronic);
k) Control gear housing (e.g. integral or remote);
l) Control gear compartment IP (Ingress Protection) rating;
m)Lamp compartment IP (Ingress Protection) rating;
n) Luminaire weight;
o) Luminaire windage area; and
p) Lighting control fitting (e.g. photo cell NEMA socket mini-photo cell CMS
node).
2.10 Vandal-resistant type luminaires shall be as agreed with the Employer and may
include requirements under BS EN 62262 “Degrees of Protection Provided by
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment against External Mechanical Impacts (IK
code)”.
2.11 Luminaires for use in underbridge underpass and subway applications shall be
as agreed with the Employer and may include particular requirements for
construction, installation, glazing and fixings.
2.12 The Contractor shall ensure compliance with all relevant regulations and codes
of best/safe practice for luminaries, such as the requirements of the WEEE
Directive.
2.13 Luminaires supported by catenary shall only be permitted by the Employer in
exceptional circumstances where it can be demonstrated by the Contractor that
it is the only practical solution.
3. Lamps
3.1 Lamps shall be compatible with the luminaires identified in Section 2 above.
3.2 The lamp details the Contractor shall provide shall include as a minimum, but not
be restricted to the following:
a) Lamp manufacturer;
b) Lamp type/reference;
c) Lamp envelope type (e.g. tubular, oval);
d) Cap base (e.g. GES);
e) Burning position (e.g. any);
f) Nominal lamp wattage (e.g. 250W);
g) Rated lamp circuit watts (e.g. 286W);
h) Dimming capability (i.e. yes/no);
i) Lamp lumen maintenance factor;
j) Lamp survival factor;
k) Lamp luminous flux (i.e. lumen output);
l) Efficacy (lm/watt);
m)Colour rendering index (e.g. Ra = 85); and
Page 218 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
n) Correlated colour temperature.
3.3 The Contractor shall be mindful of, and act in accordance with, legislation
intended to prevent the use of inefficient lamp types. For further information and
guidance see, for example, the Institution of Lighting Professional’s “Guidance
on Current and Forthcoming Legislation Within the Lighting Sector”.
3.4 The Contractor shall be mindful of, and act to assist the Employer in its
responsibilities under, the Carbon Reduction Commitment Energy Efficiency
Scheme.
3.5 The Contractor shall be mindful of, and act to assist the Employer in, all other
initiatives intended to promote sustainability and environmentally friendly
policies, such as Green Public Procurement.
3.6 For lamps (e.g. for disposal), the Contractor shall ensure compliance with all
relevant regulations and codes of best/safe practice, such as the requirements
of the WEEE Directive.
4. LEDs
4.1 LEDs, LED modules and LED light engines shall be compatible with the
luminaires identified in Section 2 above.
4.2 The LED details the Contractor is to provide shall include as a minimum, but not
be restricted to, the following:
a) LED manufacturer;
b) LED type/reference;
c) Number of LEDs in each LED module, LED light engine or LED luminaire;
d) Description of auxiliary equipment (e.g. driver);
e) Drive current (e.g. 350mA);
f) Drive voltage;
g) Circuit watts for complete LED module/LED light engine unit (i.e. including any
and all associated control devices, etc);
h) Electrical over-stress protection (e.g. TVS – transient voltage suppression);
i) Operating temperature range (e.g. -40oC to 60oC);
j) Dimming capability (i.e. yes/no);
k) Lumen depreciation of system (i.e. to include driver, etc) at stated temperature
(board temperature and/or ambient temperature) (e.g. hours to 70% of initial
luminous flux – L70);
l) LED survival factor;
m) LED luminous flux (i.e. lumen output);
n) Efficacy (lm/watt);
o) Colour rendering index (e.g. Ra = 85);
p) Colour temperature;
q) Light distribution (e.g. multiple spot or multiple layer); and
r) Future proofing.
Page 219 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
4.3 For further guidance on the specification of LEDs see, for example, the Institution
of Lighting Employer’s “Guidelines for Specification of LED Lighting Products”.
4.4 For LEDs (e.g. for disposal), the Contractor shall ensure compliance with all
relevant regulations and codes of best/safe practice, such as the requirements
of the WEEE Directive.
5. Photo-electric Control Units (PECUs)
5.1 Photo-electric control units shall comply with BS 5972 “Specification for
Photoelectric Control Units for Road Lighting”.
5.2 Photo-electric control units shall have a switch on level and switching differential
as agreed with the Employer (for example a switch on level of 35 lux with a
switching differential of 1:0.5 for road lighting and 5 lux for lit traffic signs).
5.3 Photo-electric control units shall be NEMA socket or miniature and comply with
the following:
a) Zero drift from the calibrated light level over the guaranteed lifetime;
b) Pre-set at the time of manufacture and not capable of being re-set on site;
c) Failure mode in the “on” position which results in the associated lamp
remaining in light (albeit day burning);
d) Fully electronic;
e) Mounted in NEMA type sockets generally on road lighting units only (see
section 5.4 below);
f) Installation date marking facility:
g) Non-insurance based minimum guarantee period of not less than twelve
years;
h) Switch settings sensitive within the temperature range of -20°C to +80°C; and
i) Capable of switching a 10A inductive load operating between 200V to 260V
AC at 50/60Hz.
5.4 Lighting units may use two-part photo electronic control units and/or miniature
photo-cell type or power sense units, as agreed by the Employer.
5.5 It should be noted that photo-electric control units are live when the associated
lamp is extinguished. In the case of NEMA socket type devices, for example, the
circuit should be isolated before any cleaning operations, etc.
6. Time Switches
6.1 Other types of control are normally preferred but, where this is not practicable,
the use of time switches shall be as agreed with the Employer.
7. Central Management Systems (CMS)
7.1 The Specifications for any Central Management Systems (CMS) to be introduced
or employed shall be as agreed with the Employer.
Page 220 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
7.2 In order to realise energy savings, the type of CMS employed will be approved
under the Elexon/UMSUG arrangement.
8. Ignitors for Discharge Lamps
8.1 Ignitors shall be compatible with the manufacture and type of lamp and control
gear specified and shall be a separate component and not form an integral part
of any other component.
8.2 The Contractor shall consider the use of superimposed ignitors with timed
automatic cut-outs to prevent continuous striking of failed lamps (e.g. after a
period of no more than 30 seconds).8.3 Ignitor circuits produce high voltage short
duration pulses even with a defective lamp or with no lamp in the circuit. Care
must therefore be taken when testing to use suitable equipment capable of
operation with such high voltages present.
9. Capacitors
9.1 Capacitors shall comply with BS EN 61048 “Auxiliaries for Lamps, Capacitors,
etc” and BS EN 61049 “Capacitors for Use in Tubular Fluorescent and Other
Discharge Lamp Circuits”, etc.
9.2 It is possible that some capacitors (e.g. manufactured before 1976) might contain
a dielectric comprising polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which is a hazardous,
carcinogenic substance. Contact should therefore be avoided and disposal shall
be through an authorised specialist waste disposal organisation.
9.3 Capacitors shall be fitted with a discharge resistor, but care must still be taken
when handling as it may be possible for the device to still hold a charge.
10. Cut-Outs, Fuse Holders, Fuses and Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
10.1 The arrangement to connect the Distribution Network Operator (DNO)’s mains
supply to the Authority’s lighting load shall be in accordance with BS 7671
“Requirements for Electrical Installations”, the Institution of Lighting
Professional (ILP)’s “Code of Practice for Electrical Safety in Highway Electrical
Operations” and any local discretionary agreements that apply.
10.2 The Contractor shall supply and install wiring from the luminaire to the cut-out.
The connection cable between the luminaire and secondary fuse isolator will 3
core 1.5mm2 3183Y H05VV-F flexible cable with the outer sheath coloured
black and the internal cores brown, blue, green & yellow. The minimum size of
conductor cross-section shall be 1.5mm2 and of copper. Adequate measures
shall be taken to protect the cables from heat within the luminaire by the use of
protective sleeving. All cables shall be neatly bunched together and secured
with plastic ties and clips. The Contractor shall give consideration to introducing
additional support for supply cabling in columns of higher mounting heights.
10.3 The Contractor shall supply and fit an insulated and shrouded double pole
isolator with a lockable cover which complies with BS 7654 “Specification for
Page 221 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Single-phase Street Lighting Isolator Assemblies for Low-voltage Public
Electricity Distribution Systems, etc” and with an overcurrent protection device
(e.g. cartridge fuse or MCB) as agreed with the Employer.
10.4 The double pole fuse base shall be fitted with a wire tail for connection to the
DNO service cut-out by a competent person. The competency shall be as
described in the Energy Networks Association’s Employering Recommendation
G39/1 and required under the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989.
10.5 For all lighting units, each luminaire shall be separately wired to its own fused
way in the isolator. There shall be no wiring between luminaires.
10.6 External wiring shall only be permitted by prior agreement with the Employer.
10.7 Fused links shall be HBC (high breaking capacity) and shall comply with BS HD
60269 “Low Voltage Fuses”.
10.8 Isolators shall be suitable for the intended conductor terminations.
10.9 Gland plates shall be an integral part of the isolators and be capable of
terminating a maximum of 3No 25 mm² 3-core cables.
10.10 Fuse ratings within cut-outs and isolators shall be in accordance with the
luminaire manufacturer’s requirements and the ILP’s “Code of Practice for
Electrical Safety in Highway Electrical Operations” unless otherwise directed by
the Employer.
10.11 Isolators shall have an ingress protection rating as agreed with the Employer.
10.12 As required by the Employer, isolators for sub-circuits should be twin fuse or
twin fuse spur type (e.g. to a lit sign or festive decoration, etc).
10.13 The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the correct rating of all
fuses and protection devices to ensure proper electrical discrimination.
10.14 To minimise the risk of injury in the event of accident damage or during the
course of maintenance, electrical supplies into road lighting units and lit sign
units (including illuminated bollards) shall be at no more than 230V.
11. Base Compartment Fixing Arrangements
11.1 Electrical equipment installed within the base compartment of lighting columns
or sign posts shall be positioned as agreed with the Employer.
11.2 Special provisions for the positioning of equipment may be required for the base
compartments of raise-and-lower lighting columns.
Page 222 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
12. Feeder Pillars
12.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the design, installation, inspection and testing
of feeder pillars is in accordance with BS 7671 “Requirements for Electrical
Installations”, the Institution of Lighting Professional (ILP)’s “Code of Practice
for Electrical Safety in Highway Electrical Operations” and other industry
recognised codes of safe and best practice.
12.2 Feeder pillars shall be of one of the following types unless otherwise agreed
with the Employer:
Type 1: Powder coated, stainless steel, height 700mm, width 250mm, depth
170mm, single door
Type 2: Powder coated, stainless steel, height 800mm, width 450mm, depth
250mm, single door
Type 3: Powder coated, stainless steel, height 1100mm, width 850mm, depth
350mm, single door
Type 4: Powder coated, stainless steel, height 1500mm, width 1500mm, depth
450mm, single door.
12.3 Feeder pillars shall be suitably sized so as to house the proposed electrical
equipment and the Contractor shall contemplate the possibility of any future
requirements and so consider the provision of a spare area on the backboard
to accommodate any additional equipment as discussed and agreed with the
Employer.
12.4 The feeder pillar shall be fixed to a suitable base to include any required cable
ducting and be designed and supplied by the Contractor and in agreement with
the Employer.
12.5 The feeder pillar doors shall be provided with suitable and sufficient
hardstanding to facilitate access, as agreed with the Employer, and where
applicable this may also include maintenance vehicle parking.
12.6 Where agreed with the Employer, the Contractor may be required to supply and
install adequate access facilities – e.g. steps and hand-rails.
12.7 Provision shall be made in the feeder pillar base for the termination of the
incoming supply cable (for example, where this is provided by the Distribution
Network Operator (DNO)), in which case the Contractor shall provide a suitable
number of cable tails of sufficient length to allow for connection in to the DNO
service cut-out.
12.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the suitability of all equipment
and the appropriate rating of all isolators and protection devices and for
ensuring their correct installation. This shall include correct electrical
discrimination.
12.9 Electrical equipment within the feeder pillar shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 60947 “Low-voltage Switchgear and Control Gear”.
Page 223 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
12.10 Feeder pillars shall be properly earthed and bonded.
12.11 Where required by the Employer, the feeder pillar shall be provided with the
following:
a) An internally switched light of suitable wattage;
b) An RCD protected 13A socket outlet; and
c) A thermostatically controlled anti-condensation heater of sufficient capacity
(e.g. 60W).
12.12 Each outgoing fuse carrier and circuit breaker, and their respective cable
termination point, shall be clearly labelled so as to identify the circuit it supplies.
Labelling shall also be provided to enable clear identification of all switching
apparatus, protective and isolating devices with appropriate warning notices
regarding isolation procedures. Voltage warning labels shall also be attached
as appropriate.
12.13 Where applicable, a copy of the completed as-built layout, shall be represented
by schematic wiring diagrams and encapsulated so as to be waterproof (e.g. in
a clear laminate) and suitably fixed inside the feeder pillar (e.g. in a
compartment inside the feeder pillar door).
12.14 Door locks shall be tamper resistant and non-corroding with keys to suit made
available to the Employer.
12.15 Special requirements (e.g. override facilities on group-switched feeder pillars)
shall be as agreed with the Employer.
13. Wiring
13.1 All wiring and installation of components within road lighting units and lit sign
units (including illuminated bollards) shall be in accordance with Appendix 14/6.
13.2 Any special requirements for wiring will be detailed in the Employer’s Task
Order.
13.3 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, wiring conductors shall be of
copper.
13.4 Wiring identification colours shall be in accordance with the European
harmonised system and as required by BS 7671 “Requirements for Electrical
Installations” (and in particular BS 7671:2001 Amendment No 2).
14. Earthing
14.1 The whole of the installation shall be earthed in accordance with the
requirements of BS 7671 “Requirements for Electrical Installations”, BS 7430
“Code of Practice for Earthing”, the ILP’s “Code of Practice for Electrical Safety
in Highway Electrical Operations”, industry recognised codes of best and safe
Page 224 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
practice and, where applicable, to the complete satisfaction of the Distribution
Network Operator.
14.2 A PVC or XLPE covered green/yellow copper earth wire of minimum
crosssection 10mm2 shall be used to connect the DNO’s earth termination to
the main earth terminal. The copper earth continuity conductor connecting the
luminaire items of control gear and the earthing stud in the column base shall
be not less than 2.5mm2 cross-section, insulated, and coloured green/yellow.
All earthing conductors shall be collected at the main earthing terminal rather
than to loop. A sound mechanical and electrical connection shall be made
between the earth continuity conductor and each item of exposed metal. The
earth continuity conductor shall be connected to all earthing terminals (provided
for all metal parts of each lighting unit) using an eye type terminal end. All such
connections and joints shall be crimped with the appropriate size terminal and
shall be mechanically sound, electrically continuous, and protected where
necessary against corrosion. Where substantial copper or other non-ferrous
clamping terminals are not provided in the equipment, it is the responsibility of
the Contractor to supply and fit them.
14.3 All nut and bolt earth connections shall be made with crimp lugs between two
brass washers.
14.4 When indicated by the Employer, or when instructed in the Task Order, an earth
electrode shall be installed as directed by the Employer.
14.5 Unless otherwise agreed with the Employer, the maximum resistance for an
earth electrode shall be 20 ohms. The Contractor may therefore have to drive
in longer earth electrode rods or consider using an earth mesh or mat together
with suitable backfilling material (e.g. Bentonite or Marconite, etc) to reduce the
resistance to earth to this required value.
15. Underground and Ducted Cable
15.1 Cable trenches shall be excavated to the lines agreed with the Employer.
15.2 Cable covers for the protection of underground cables shall be installed as
agreed with the Employer. When cable covers are installed, underground
marker tapes shall also be required, as agreed and instructed by the Employer.
15.3 Guidance for the positioning and location of underground cables for street
lighting may be found in the National Joint Utilities Group (NJUG)’s “Guidelines
on the Positioning and Colour Coding of Underground Utilities’ Apparatus”.
15.4 Underground cables shall comply with BS 5467 “Electric Cables -
Thermosetting Insulated Armoured Cables for Voltages of 600/1000V and
1900/3300V”. Unless otherwise agreed with the Employer, all conductors shall
be copper.
15.5 Although PVC is a suitable insulating and sheathing material for cables when
exposed to fire, it may produce harmful smoke and fumes. The Contractor shall
Page 225 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
therefore consider the use of alternative insulating and sheathing materials (e.g.
LS0H) where this can be justified with no or minimal cost consequences.
Underground cable construction shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC.
15.6 Cables to be permanently sealed shall be terminated as agreed with the
Employer.
15.7 Cables to be temporarily sealed shall be made electrically safe using PVC or
XLPE insulating tape and amalgam tape. The Contractor shall display
appropriate warning notices and area protection.
15.8 Cables shall be BASEC (British Approvals Service for Cables) accepted.
15.9 Before installing any underground cable, the Contractor shall advise and agree
with the Employer the cable manufacturer, cable construction, cable materials,
cable type and reference.
15.10 Any additional support for cables (e.g. cables crossing through draw pits) shall
be provided by the Contractor as agreed with the Employer.
15.11 New cable shall generally be steel wire armoured (SWA) installed in orange
UPVC ducts and as agreed with the Employer.
15.12 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, cables shall not be backfilled until
inspected and approved by the Employer.
16. Cable Joints
16.1 Unscheduled cable joints shall not be permitted unless otherwise agreed with
the Employer.
16.2 Before installing any cable joint, the Contractor shall advise and agree with the
Employer the cable joint manufacturer, cable joint construction, cable joint
materials, cable joint type, and reference.
16.3 The Contractor shall provide for cable joint markers over every cable joint
marked on the as-built drawings and to a Specification as agreed with the
Employer.
16.4 Prior to any cable laying, the Contractor shall provide evidence to the Employer
of the Jointer’s competence. Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, the
Contractor shall ensure that a record is maintained of cable joints in order that
the Jointer responsible for each joint may be identified checked as satisfactory
may also be identified.
16.5 Jointing shall only be carried under the protection of a specialist jointing tent to
ensure that the jointing materials are not contaminated by moisture, etc.
16.6 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, cable joints and jointing shall
comply with BS 7933 “Electric Cables - Accessories – Material
Page 226 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Characterisation” and BS EN 50393 “Test Methods and Requirements for
Accessories for Use on Distribution Cables of Rated Voltage 0.6/1.0 (1.2) kV”.
16.7 Cable joints shall be adequately supported at all times.
16.8 Cable joints shall not be backfilled until the joint is fully completed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions, including the proper curing time.
16.9 The Contractor shall not permit the cable joint to be backfilled until the Employer
has been given the opportunity to inspect and approve the cable joint, or unless
otherwise instructed by the Employer.
17. Armoured Cable Terminations
17.1 Cables shall be individually terminated and existing cables re-terminated and
secured at switches, cut-outs and other electrical apparatus by means of an
armour securing clamp or an aluminium compression type gland complying with
BS EN 50262 “Cable Glands for Electrical Installations”.
17.2 Before installing any armoured cable termination, the Contractor shall advise
and agree with the Employer the armoured cable termination manufacturer, the
termination and gland construction and materials, and the termination type and
reference.
17.3 The termination construction shall be of such a design that during installation
no torque is imparted to the cable sheath or armour. The termination shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in order to ensure
that the cable armour is clamped securely but so that over tightening is avoided.
17.4 All glands shall be shrouded overall with PVC sleeves or with a similar material
as agreed with the Employer.
17.5 Each armoured cable termination shall be labelled and/or identified in a manner
as agreed with the Employer.
17.6 All exposed metal casings shall be directly earthed. Reliance on the earthing of
security clips will not be acceptable.
Security of Access Doors to Electrical Installations
18.1 The Contractor shall securely attach all access doors to road lighting units,
traffic sign units, lit traffic bollards, pedestrian refuge and/or crossing globes,
feeder pillars and any other electrical installations on the highway before leaving
the site. Where the door or door lock is damaged, the Contractor shall carry out
a repair before leaving the site. Where the Contractor is unable to carry out a
permanent repair, a temporary 12mm stainless steel tape or plastic/nylon cable
tie wrap (minimum 12mm width) shall be used to secure the door. The
Contractor shall affect a permanent repair within 28 days. Alternatively, a
temporary door may be fitted to the column, post or enclosure by means of
12mm stainless steel tapes or plastic/nylon cable tie wraps (minimum 12mm
Page 227 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
width). Such doors are considered a temporary repair and the Contractor shall
affect a permanent repair within 28 days.
Cable Repairs
18.2 After location of the cable fault the cable should be repaired using 2 No straight
cable joints and no more than 2.0 metres of cable, this should also include for
excavation and reinstatement in all materials, except roadway. No joints will be
allowed in the road. The location of the cable joints should be marked with a
maker tile (optional). If the fault is within 2.0 metres of a lighting unit then one
joint should be used and the cable re-terminate in the lighting unit.
Page 228 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/5 – ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR TRAFFIC SIGNS
1. General
1.1 Further to Clause 1441AR and prior to the commencement of any works, the
Contractor shall provide the Employer with details of the proposed electrical
equipment.
1.2 The Contractor shall ensure the suitability, correctness and compatibility of all
equipment to be installed.
1.3 The requirements for electrical equipment for lit traffic signs shall be as stipulated
in Appendix 4/4.
Page 229 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/6: CABLES AND WIRING
1. General
1.1 All works undertaken and materials used as part of the Contract shall comply
with Lighting Unit Wiring Details (Standard Details 1400-1 to 1400-7 inclusive),
the latest version of the Institution of Electrical Employers' Wiring Regulations for
Electrical installations, relevant British, European and International Standards
and Codes of Practice, etc.
1.2 Earth continuity conductors shall be of copper having a nominal cross-sectional
area of not less than 2.5 sq. mm. All other electrical conductors shall be suitable
for the maximum ratings of the lamp, circuit, etc., as set out in the I.E.T. Wiring
Regulations, but in any event, the nominal cross-sectional area of any other
conductor shall be not less than 1.5 sq. mm.
1.3 All wiring and installation of components within the unit shall be carried out by a
competent electrical craftsperson.
1.4 The electrical supply to street lighting columns, traffic signs, bollards, etc. shall
be provided by the DNO and/or the Contractor, as specified, and shall terminate
in an isolator unit, in the base of the column or post. All intermediate connections
to individual units shall be looped connections. Where the supply for a street
lighting column, sign, etc. is provided by the dno and terminates in a fused cut-
out, the Contractor shall supply and fit an additional isolator with fuses to provide
a means of local isolation of the lighting equipment and for each separate circuit.
For double arm road lighting columns (twin fuse) shall be supplied and installed.
1.5 Where an electricity supply is provided by a DNO to a street lighting column the
sub-circuit to the lit traffic sign shall be from a twin fuse spur type isolator
positioned adjacent to the DNO cut out. One fuse for the lighting circuit and the
second fuse for the outgoing sub-circuit to the lit traffic sign. The connection from
the cut-out to the isolator shall be single core PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cable
of a size determined by load.
1.6 The outgoing supply cable from the terminal block and isolator unit shall be a 3
core PVC insulated PVC sheathed and armoured cable buried direct in the
ground or housed in ducts, complying with the Department of Transport's Notes
for Guidance on the Specification for Highways Works Part 2 series NG 500
Clause NG 501 relating to the specification of service ducts. The cable shall
terminate into an isolator unit in the column, lit sign unit, feeder pillar etc. Any
further looped supplies to be taken away from these termination points shall be
carried out in a similar manner. The size of cable shall be related to the
supply/load rating.
1.7 The ends of the armoured cable shall terminate at a compression gland with an
armoured clamp and earth tag, and be supported by a suitable bracket. The earth
tag shall be connected to the earth terminal provided in the unit by a 2.5 sq. mm.
single core, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cable. The insulated cores
Page 230 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
between the cable gland and any terminals shall be kept as short as possible
and be protected with PVC sleeving.
1.8 All cables between separate lighting columns, traffic signs, centre island
columns, etc., installed by the Contractor, shall have a non-corrodible metal or
plastic label securely attached to each end indicating the location of the other
end.
1.9 The Contractor shall take all due care to avoid damaging the outer sheath of any
cable. Should the sheath become damaged at any point, for any reason, the
Contractor shall remove the entire length of cable in which the damage is situated
and replaced it with a complete length of new, undamaged cable. The Contractor
is deemed responsible for bearing all costs and charges incurred as a result of
such operations.
1.10 Should the Contractor discover, during the normal course of the Works, a cable
or cables that were damaged previously by a person or person’s unknown, then
the Employer shall be notified forthwith. The Contractor shall, upon receipt of a
relevant instruction from the Employer, remove the entire length of cable in which
the damage lies and replace it with a complete length of new cable. All costs and
charges incurred as a result of such operations will be met by the Employer,
however, in the event of a dispute concerning whether the cable was damaged
previously or by the Contractor during the course of the Works, the Employer's
decision shall be final, absolute and binding. If such a decision concludes that
the damage was caused by the Contractor, then reference shall be made to
Clause 1.9 above.
1.11 The inside radius of any bends in a cable shall not be less than that given in the
appropriate table of the I.E.T. Wiring Regulations. At all bends, sets and
equipment, the cables shall be fixed and supported on each side of the bend or
set.
1.12 Straight through joints shall be kept to a minimum consistent with the use of
maximum drum lengths available from the cable manufacturers. These joints
shall be of the crimped type using purpose made sleeves.
1.13 Other joints shall be either of the crimped type using purpose made sleeves, or
approved mechanical type clamps using connecting clamps, bolts and lock nuts.
The connectors shall be rated to carry the maximum current of the service cable.
1.14 Crimped joints shall be made with a crimping tool recommended by the
manufacturers of the cable and fitted with dies specifically designed for crimping
each particular size of cable.
1.15 Wiring shall, wherever possible, be housed inside columns, wall brackets and
posts or stiffening members. Where it is external, it shall be as described in
Clauses 1.16 and 1.17 below. Connections between conduit and sign housings,
switch-boxes and other components shall be waterproof and be smooth
internally.
Page 231 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
1.16 To wall-mounted units, or other units where cables are to be affixed to walls, shall
be connected using galvanised, steel conduit, which shall be securely fixed to
the walls with galvanised steel saddle clips at centres that comply with I.E.T
Wiring Regulations. The Contractor is reminded of the need to comply fully with
the requirements of I.E.T. Wiring Regulations.
1.17 Unless otherwise specified, all cable and conduit fixings shall be effected with
the use of suitable wall fixings of a non corrosive type and approved by the
Employer. Where brickwork is encountered, all fixings shall enter the mortar
course only. The Contractor is deemed to be responsible in all respects for all
claims arising from injury or damage to persons or property occasioned by Works
executed under this Clause. Circuit protective and equipotential conductors shall
be insulated or sleeved in green/yellow PVC. Where bolted connections are
required, these conductors shall be terminated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions in correctly sized purpose made lugs. Such
connections shall be made with non-ferrous nuts, bolts and washers.
1.18 The circuit protective conductor shall be of equal cross sectional area to the
associated circuit conductor, except where it is contained within a composite
cable when its sectional area may be reduced to 1.5 sq. mm and 1 sq. mm for
circuit conductors 2.5 sq. mm and 1.5 sq. mm respectively.
1.19 A circuit protective conductor shall connect the earth terminal on each luminaire
or unit to the main earth terminal associated with the service cut-out unit.
1.20 A separate circuit protective conductor of not less than 2.5 sq. mm cross
sectional area shall connect all metal enclosures of all electrical components to
the main earth terminal.
1.21 All extraneous conductive parts shall be bonded to the main earth terminal using
an equipotential bonding conductor of 6 sq. mm cross sectional area, increased
if necessary to conform with the DNO’s requirements when the unit is directly
serviced by a Protective Multiple Earthing (PME) supply.
1.22 In installations served by an underground supply, by a conductor, complying with
Clause 1.1 above, of connection of every earth bonding conductor shall be
provided.
1.23 In any section of an installation served by an overhead wiring system, a
continuous earth wire shall be made available along the entire length of the
section, by a conductor complying with Clauses 1.1 and 1.2 above. If no
continuous earth wire is available, individual earthing to each column will be
specified by the Employer. Every installation shall, on completion and before
being energised, be inspected, tested and certificated by the Contractor in
accordance with the requirements of Part 6 of the I.E.T Regulations. Such
certificates shall be provided by the Employer.
1.24 The Contractor shall provide all instruments necessary for the testing of the
installation. The Employer reserves the right to call for evidence that any
Page 232 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
instrument offered for these tests has been calibrated and certified correct within
12 months prior to the date of the tests.
1.25 Not less than five working days' notice of the proposed tests shall be given to the
Employer in order that they may be witnessed if so desired. The tests shall be
executed sufficiently early in the Contract Period to allow for any remedial works
to be undertaken within that period.
Page 233 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/7: LIAISON WITH AND INSTRUCTION OF ELECTRICITY
SUPPLIERS
1. General
1.1 The Contractor shall at all times, as a minimum, comply with the Health and
Safety at Work etc Act 1974, the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989, BS 7671
“Requirements for Electrical Installations” and the Energy Networks
Association’s “Employering Recommendation G39/1”.
2. Emergency Attendance
2.1 The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer if the assistance of the
Electricity Authority, the Distribution Network Operator (DNO) or an Independent
Connection Provider (ICP) is required for making safe any part of Employer’s
electrical installation.
2.2 The Contractor, when directed by the Employer, shall liaise with the Electricity
Authority/DNO/ICP regarding the making safe disconnection and reconnection
of the Employer’s power supplies.
3. Power Supplies
3.1 The DNO throughout the Employer’s Network is UK Power Networks.
3.2 Unless otherwise instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall ensure that
the Employer’s electrical equipment can be isolated without having to either
access or interfere with the Electricity Authority/DNO’s supply (i.e. by means of
a double pole secondary isolation unit).
3.3 The Contractor shall liaise with the Electricity Authority/DNO/ICP in programming
of works for disconnection and reconnection of new and existing power supplies.
3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for completing all relevant documentation for
the provision of the disconnection and reconnection of new and existing power
supplies.
3.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining quotations from the Electricity
Authority/DNO/ICP, as and when necessary, and shall inform the Employer by
copy.
3.6 The Contractor shall notify the Electricity Authority/DNO of all supply faults within
24 hours of discovery and shall be responsible for all liaison with that
Authority/DNO regarding supply fault management.
3.7 The Contractor shall, under no circumstances, interfere with DNO equipment
without their prior agreement. Only duly authorised, and certificated (G39) by
DNO as competent, personnel shall connect new or modified installations to an
unmetered supply point or have access to the DNO’s equipment. This
Page 234 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
certification must be to the requirements of the DNO. Such certification shall be
available for inspection by the Employer or the DNO's representatives at all
times.
4. Payment for Electricity Authority Services
4.1 All costs and charges in connection with DNO works and services undertaken as
part of this Contract will be met by the Employer. However, unless otherwise
instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall pay for the services of the DNO
or ICP, where directed in any Works Order. Payment may be required before the
works are programmed by the DNO/ICP, so must be made promptly on receipt
of the relevant quotation, as directed by the Employer. For clarity, where the
Contractor has paid the DNO/ICP for services under this clause he will be
reimbursed for the payment made to together the percentage on-cost provided
in the Schedule of Rates.
Page 235 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/8: SUMMARY OF ROAD LIGHTING AND ILLUMUMINATED SIGN
INVENTORY
1. The Employer’s CONFIRM system holds the entire inventory of street lighting and
illuminated assets information, which the Contractor shall maintain and update.
The following summarises the inventory:-
Public Lighting
LED
Cosmo
CDO
Sodium
Tube
Unknown
GLA
Totals
Columns - 12m
0
0
10
1
0
0
0
11
Columns - 10m
396
300
1357
722
0
9
0
2784
Columns - 8m
77
102
209
198
0
0
0
586
Columns - 6m
2906
777
5850
597
0
4
0
10134
Columns - 5m/5.5m
741
62
1708
1272
0
5
0
3788
Columns - 3/4m (mostly wall
fix)
35
2
268
100
0
0
0
405
Others/Unknown
59
10
50
5
0
90
0
214
Totals
4214
1253
9452
2895
0
108
0
17922
Lit Signs
1961
0
0
0
0
0
0
1961
Lit Traffic Bollards
65
0
0
0
793
0
0
858
Reflective Traffic Bollards
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
46
Belisha Beacons
12
0
0
0
0
0
227
239
Vehicle Activated
47
0
0
0
0
0
0
47
Decorative/Festive Units
200
0
0
0
0
0
0
200
School Zone Alerting Units
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
15
2. The Contractor will be provided with access to the full CONFIRM inventory during
the mobilisation period.
3. The Inventory only holds asset attributes that are sufficient to support defect
repairs, replacement/improvement programmes and energy charge calculations.
Page 236 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 14/9: EMPLOYER’S LIGHTING UNIT ASSET MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM AND CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The lighting inventory is contained within the CONFIRM system and subdivided
into the various lighting types, such as lighting columns and wall mounted units,
lit signs, illuminated traffic bollards, pedestrian crossing beacons etc as per
appendix 14/8. Each unit has the following general attributes which may be
supplemented according to unit type. Only the minimum number of attribute
types necessary to maintain a viable inventory is held.
• Lighting type
• Unique ID in Confirm and asset tag where appropriate
• Location – street/site/postal area/ward/xy geocodes
• Owner for costing purposes
• Energy supply – either unmetered, metered or private
• Luminaire type, lamp type, wattage, control gear, switch and switch
regime
• Unmetered Supply charge codes and elements
2. Following completion of any emergency attendance, reactive fault repair,
cleaning & cyclic maintenance or cyclic inspection and testing, the contractor
shall update any change to the asset’s attribute values within three working
days of actual completion as recorded by the contractor on the relevant job
screen in Confirm. So, for example, a luminaire type would require a change
but a like-for-like lamp change would not.
3. We would expect the contractor to advise us of any errors in asset attributes
like location, site, missing tag numbers, lantern type and make corrections to
the asset inventory.
4. Follow completion of any scheme works Job or one-off minor task orders that
fundamentally change the inventory, such as column and/or lantern
replacement, the contractor shall update any change to the inventory within
three working days of actual completion of the scheme works Job as recorded
by the contractor on the relevant job screen in Confirm. This will include the
creation of any new inventory items with all associated attributes and locating
each item using Confirm’s mapping functionality to generate xy coordinates and
an updated map layer. Any defunct inventory items resulting from the scheme
works or minor task order will be end-dated in the inventory and deleted from
Confirm’s lighting map layer.
Page 237 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 19/6: CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTION AND
PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT
Painting work shall be carried out as per the "Specification for High Works" published
by the Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract
documents for Highway Works, (Latest edition shall apply), as modified and extended
by the following:-
1. Requirements for painting metal work :
All metallic highway equipment including fencing, railings, gates, lighting columns,
traffic signs, street name plates and posts etc., shall be painted as follows, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings:
i)
Environment:
Inland
ii)
Accessibility:
Ready Access
iii)
Required Durability: No maintenance up to 8 years
Minor maintenance from 8 years
Major maintenance after 15 years
2. Surface preparation and protective systems.
i)
The specified paint system, i.e. primer, undercoat, and 2 No. Top coats shall
be applied, (on the T-washed galvanised metal-work), on site, unless
instructed otherwise.
ii)
Surface preparation of all components shall be carried out as per the
Specification for Highway works, and for the steel components to be
galvanised, the surface preparation shall be as per the BS EN IS0 1461 -
1999. Prior to galvanising, all weld splatters shall be removed; sharp and
burred edges shall be ground smooth.
iii)
All components shall be galvanised to BS EN IS0 1461-1999. Galvanised
items shall be free from nodules, blisters, (i.e. raised areas without solid
metal beneath), roughness, sharp points and uncoated areas.
iv)
The Contractor's rates for painting work shall include for paintwork to be
carried out off-site, or on-site, as per Employer's requirements. If the
Contractor is required to carry out painting work off-site, then the Contractor
shall be required to make good any scratches or damage resulting from
transportation, erection, handling, etc.
The repair of damaged painted surfaces shall be carried out at no extra
cost to the Employer.
The damaged paint surfaces shall be fully rectified to the Specification
requirements and shall require Employer's Approval.
v)
If painting is required to be carried out off-site, then the Contractor may
propose to apply topcoats on site, at no extra cost to the Employer. The
Page 238 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Contractor
shall
require
Employer's
written
approval
prior
to
commencement of any site painting work.
vi)
The Contractor's rate for painting shall be fully inclusive, whether the paint
is applied offsite or, on-site, if approved by Employer.
vii)
Polyester Powder Coating
Polyester Powder coating systems shall be Plascoat or other system
complying with BS EN 13438:2013 and be approved by the Employer for
use in the Contract. The Polyester Powder coated system shall be fully
protected during transportation, site handling and installation process.
viii)
Materials and workmanship
All paint shall be lead free, comply with the specified grade and quality and
if possible is obtained, from same manufacturer.
The paint shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest British
Standard/Specification and shall be of "Exterior" quality unless specified
otherwise.
All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions unless otherwise specified.
ix)
Existing Paint Finish - Railings
Existing metalwork shall be cleaned before painting to remove all dust,
grease, existing paint, rust, etc. down to bright metal.
x)
Preparing Galvanised and Exposed Metal Surfaces
Degrease where necessary with an abrasive sponge (Scotch-Brit) or
equivalent approved using warm water with the addition of ammonia and a
conventional detergent without wax (for 10 litres of water, half litre 25%
ammonia solution and a measured quantity of detergent). Leave the
developing foam for ten minutes, carry on scraping until the foam turns grey
and rinse thoroughly with clear water removing foam completely.
Degrease to give a fine profile.
Alternatively, the Contractor may utilise the following products for T-
Washing of the galvanised surfaces:
a) Cleaner & Degreaser
b) Mordant Solution
The colour change of the galvanised surface shall be the visual proof that
the entire surface has been satisfactorily T-Washed.
Page 239 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
xi)
Primers
One coat of High Build Alkyd Zinc Phosphate Primer shall be applied as
supplied or recommended by the named manufacturers Mdft 50.
(Contractor may provide more than one coat to achieve the specified mdft;
the cost shall be fully inclusive for providing the required mdft).
xii)
Undercoat
One coat Alkyd High Build Undercoat, 35 microns thick. Paint coat to be
applied by Airless Spray or brush to give a film thickness of at least 35
microns in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (Contractor may
provide more than one coat to achieve the specified mdft; the cost shall be
fully inclusive for providing the required ma).
xiii)
Topcoat
Two coats of Alkyd High Build Gloss Enamel Paint. Two coats are to be
applied by airless spray or brush to give a film thickness of at least 35 Mdft
per coat. (The cost shall be fully inclusive for providing the specified mdft,
which may be achieved by more than two coats). All painting systems shall
be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions, (any
associated cost for compliance to the manufacturer's instructions shall be
fully inclusive in the Contractor's rates).
xiv)
Total Mdft
Total Minimum Dry Film Thickness of combined primer, undercoat and
topcoat shall be, (50+35 +35 +35), 155 microns. Contractor shall note that
LONDON BOROUGH OF HARINGEY shall carry out random tests with an
"MDFT Instrument", to verify the total specified Mdft.
xv)
Paint Colour
Finish coat colour for all street lighting columns and other street furniture
shall be black unless otherwise specified on Contract drawings or, as
advised by the Employer, during the Contract.
xvi)
Method of Paint Application
Brush Application
Brush application is to be carried out with soft brushes using short strokes.
Do not brush out material as with conventional paints.
Spray Application
Page 240 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Should paint be applied by spray, this operation shall be carried out off- site.
Any spray painting operation proposed by the Contractor to be carried out
on site, shall be carried out in an approved enclosed area suitable for spray
painting systems, and shall be subject to the Employer's approval.
Spray application: suitable airless equipment, must have a spray pressure
in the gun of at least 180 bar (2560 psi) and an output of 4-5 11rrQ nozzles
with a bore of 0.48-0.66mm (19-26 thou) and a spray angle of 65-80 degrees
are recommended. Sieves of the equipment should have a mesh width of at
least 250 microns.
Or Spray Equipment shall be as per paint manufacturer's recommendations.
xvii)
Drying Time
Between coats: As per manufacturer's instructions.
xviii)
Suggested Paint Suppliers
Johnstones Heavy Duty Coatings,
or approved equivalent
or
Kalon Decorative Products
or approved equivalent
or
Gold coloured or other specified coloured paint for railing top coat.
Hammerite Products Limited,
or approved equivalent.
Page 241 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 20/1: WATERPROOFING FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
General
1. New waterproofing systems permitted for use on highway structures shall generally
be a proprietary seamless liquid applied membrane system for concrete bridge
deck waterproofing complying with Series 2000 and satisfying the requirements of
DfT Standard BD47 “Waterproofing and Surfacing of Concrete Bridge Decks”.
2. Prior to the Employer approving the proposed system, the Contractor shall supply
to the Employer the technical information on the product from the manufacturer.
The product shall have BBA certification.
3. Additional requirements for the repair and replacement of existing bridge deck
waterproofing shall be as described in Clause 2008.
4. Additional requirements for non-destructive testing of waterproofing membranes
shall be as described in sub-Clauses 11 to 19 below.
5. Waterproofing shall only be applied when the ambient temperature is 4oC and
rising or above 4oC. The Contractor shall allow in his prices for the cost of providing
a temporary enclosure system to ensure the application of waterproofing
membrane is not affected by inclement weather.
Protection Layers to Waterproofing
6. Unless otherwise specified, all non-vertical areas treated with a spray applied
waterproofing system are to receive a 20mm thick red tinted sand asphalt
protection layer as described in Clause 2003, except that compliance shall be with
BS 3690 : Part 1 and BS 594 : Part 1 recipe type F wearing course mixture
designation 0/3 with 5% of filler content inorganic red oxide. Marshall stability shall
be 5.5kN +/- 2kN. Liquid spray membranes shall have a suitable tack coat applied
prior to the laying of the additional protective layer so that a good bond is achieved
between the additional protective layer and the waterproofing membrane.
7. Unless otherwise specified, all vertical areas treated with spray applied
waterproofing system shall receive a 15 – 20mm thick bituminised compressible
board protection layer.
8. The protective layer shall be applied immediately above bridge deck waterproofing
to those areas shown on scheme drawings in accordance with sub-Clauses 2005.4
and 2005.5.
9. The permission of the Employer shall be obtained before plant, equipment or traffic
is permitted onto the waterproofing system.
10. Where it is necessary for plant, equipment or traffic to stand or travel on the
waterproofing system, suitable temporary protection shall be provided to the
satisfaction of the Employer.
Page 242 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Testing Requirements for Spray Applied Waterproofing Systems
11. Following deck preparation and before application of the primer, tests shall be
carried out in accordance with BS EN 4626:2003, on random areas agreed with
the Designer, to assess the adhesive strength of the cured primer and membrane
to the deck. A minimum of 2 pull off tests shall be carried out on the waterproofing
system per structure per visit.
12. The Contractor shall provide with each batch of material delivered to the site, a
certificate showing that the material complies with the details given on the PWS
data sheet.
13. Two samples of size at least 20mm x 200mm x 2mm minimum thickness from
material sprayed on to open moulds shall be provided and tested or tensile strength
and elongation at break to BS 903 Part A2, and tear strength to BS 903 Part A3
method C. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with copies of the test results.
14. The coverage rate of material used shall be monitored continuously and the
Employer shall be provided with daily sheets showing the weight of material used
and the area covered for each period of spray operation.
15. The wet film thickness shall be monitored continuously using a comb type
thickness gauge or pin gauge, and the Employer shall be provided with daily sheets
showing the wet film thicknesses measured and their location. Where directed by
the Employer, pieces of the fully cured membrane of size not less than 50mm x
50mm shall be cut out, to establish the dry film thickness and given to the Employer
labelled with their location of origin.
16. The adhesion of the fully cured membrane to the deck shall be measured by two
tests for each 100m2 of finished membrane or part thereof, or one test per spraying
session if the sprayed area during the session is less than 50m2, at locations
chosen by the Employer. Tests shall be carried out by a method accepted by the
Employer and the apparatus used shall have a current certificate of calibration. The
Employer shall be provided with the test results labelled with the location of the test
site. Test values falling below 1.0N/mm2 shall require spraying operations to be
suspended while further investigation is undertaken. Areas deemed not to meet
this figure shall be removed and resprayed to the satisfaction of the Employer at
the Contractor’s cost.
17. The finished membrane shall be tested by the Contractor for pin holes and
discontinuities and any imperfections detected shall be rectified by overcoating the
membrane with brush or spray applied material compatible with the membrane for
a distance of 50mm on all sides of the defect to the satisfaction of the Employer by
the Contractor at his own expense.
18. Testing shall be carried out using a high voltage direct current detector. In addition
to the manufacturer's instructions for use, the following requirements and
conditions shall apply:
(i) The instrument is to be operated above 13.5kv.
Page 243 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
(ii) The earth lead is not to be more than 10m long.
(iii) Movement/expansion joints shall not be crossed when testing.
(iv) Earthing with screws set into substrate or exposed reinforcement shall be
used.
(v) When a leakage path has been found its position is to be marked with a
permanent marker pen on the membrane.
(vi) The instrument is not to be used on wet or damp surfaces.
(vii) The equipment is to have a current certificate of compliance / calibration.
19. All areas of membrane destroyed by testing shall be made good by a method
accepted by the Employer.
Page 244 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 24/1: BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND STONEWORK
General
1. The Contractor shall only use sulphate-resisting Portland cement for clay brick
masonry in retaining walls or in other structures.
2. Unless otherwise stated in the Works Order, the Contractor shall use mortar
designations either (i) and (ii), except for masonry which incorporates
reconstructed stone, concrete or calcium silicate bricks and blocks, where mortar
designation (iii) or Heritage Lime Mortar shall be used, where instructed by the
Employer.
Page 245 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 30/5: GRASS SEEDING AND TURFING
Season
1. Grass seeding and Turfing shall be undertaken between 1 March to 31 May or 1
September to 31 October unless otherwise agreed with the Employer.
Soil Preparation for Seeding or Turfing
2. The upper 50 mm of soil shall be reduced to a fine tilth where this has not already
been done in advance of sowing, seeding or turfing unless otherwise directed by
the Employer.
3. If instructed by the Employer, granular fertiliser with nutrient status N6: P9: K6 shall
be evenly incorporated into the upper 50 mm of soil during the final preparation
which shall be at a rate of 20 grams per square metre.
Seed
4. Two seed mixtures are as follows:-
Seed Type 1 – Close Mown / Parkway / Amenity Areas
Species % by weight
Agrostis tenuis 15%
Festuca rubra ssp. comutata 40%
Festuca rubra ssp. rubra 45%
Sow at a rate of 30 g/m2
Seed Type 2 – General Grass Areas
Species % by weight
Agrostic tenuis 20%
Festuca rubra ssp. rubra 15%
Festuca rubra ssp. litoralis 15%
Festuca longfolia 15%
Cynosorus cristatus 10%
Alopecurus pratensis 10%
Poa pratensis 13%
Lotus corniculatus 2%
Sow at a rate of 10 g/m2
Turf
5. Imported turf shall be used where instructed by the Employer. The Contractor shall
supply and lay either good quality meadow turf free from pernicious weeds and
Page 246 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
rank grass or amenity grade turf with a maximum annual meadow grass content of
5% as specified by the Employer. The turves shall be laid so as to break bond by
half a turf length, shall be neatly cut to edges and around obstructions, tightly butted
to each other and the surrounding grass and well firmed down. Immediately after
laying turf, the Contractor shall top dress with fine sifted soil or sandy loam, brush
well into the joints and lightly roll to a firm even surface.
6. Where gradients necessitate, the turves shall be secured by wooden pegs driven
through the turves into the bed.
7. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the turfed area is watered
sufficiently and frequently enough to ensure the proper establishment of the grass.
Establishment Cuts
8. The number of establishment cuts required is the responsibility of the Contractor
but shall be enough to cover one complete calendar year. This is the establishment
period for grass areas before they can be regarded as complete. Grass cutting
machinery shall be very sharp and in good condition to avoid pulling out young
seedlings. Arisings from the first cut shall be removed from site. When subsequent
cutting takes place without a box, all arisings shall be spread evenly to prevent
damage to the growing grass beneath. This applies particularly to grass cut during
periods of dull or wet weather.
Establishment Period
9. The establishment period for all areas of new grass seeding or turfing shall be 12
months and all necessary maintenance and watering required in establishing grass
is included in the item coverage for those items. The Employer reserves the right
to recover any monies paid if seeding / turfing should it fail to thrive during this
establishment period.
Page 247 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 30/10: MAINTENANCE OF ESTABLISHED TREES AND SHRUBS
Overall Requirements
1. Works may comprise pruning, crown lifting, crown reduction, crown thinning and
any other maintenance works required to established trees, shrubs and hedges.
2. All technical requirements in relation to works shall be as set out in Series 3000 of
the Specification.
3. All arisings shall be disposed of in a sustainable manner.
Page 248 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
APPENDIX 50/6: CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE PAINTING
OF EQUIPMENT
Painting work shall be carried out as per the "Specification for High Works" published
by the Stationery Office (formerly HMSO) as Volume 1 of the Manual of Contract
documents for Highway Works, (Latest edition shall apply), as modified and extended
by the following:-
1. Requirements for painting metal work :
All metallic highway equipment including fencing, railings, gates, lighting columns,
traffic signs, street name plates and posts etc., shall be painted as follows, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings:
i)
Environment:
Inland
ii)
Accessibility:
Ready Access
iii)
Required Durability: No maintenance up to 8 years
Minor maintenance from 8 years
Major maintenance after 15 years
2. Surface preparation and protective systems.
i)
The specified paint system, i.e. primer, undercoat, and 2 No. Top coats shall
be applied, (on the T-washed galvanised metal-work), on site, unless
instructed otherwise.
ii)
Surface preparation of all components shall be carried out as per the
Specification for Highway works, and for the steel components to be
galvanised, the surface preparation shall be as per the BS EN IS0 1461 -
1999. Prior to galvanising, all weld splatters shall be removed; sharp and
burred edges shall be ground smooth.
iii)
All components shall be galvanised to BS EN IS0 1461-1999. Galvanised
items shall be free from nodules, blisters, (i.e. raised areas without solid
metal beneath), roughness, sharp points and uncoated areas.
iv)
The Contractor's rates for painting work shall include for paintwork to be
carried out off-site, or on-site, as per Employer's requirements. If the
Contractor is required to carry out painting work off-site, then the Contractor
shall be required to make good any scratches or damage resulting from
transportation, erection, handling, etc.
The repair of damaged painted surfaces shall be carried out at no extra
cost to the Employer.
The damaged paint surfaces shall be fully rectified to the Specification
requirements and shall require Employer's Approval.
v)
If painting is required to be carried out off-site, then the Contractor may
propose to apply topcoats on site, at no extra cost to the Employer. The
Page 249 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
Contractor
shall
require
Employer's
written
approval
prior
to
commencement of any site painting work.
vi)
The Contractor's rate for painting shall be fully inclusive, whether the paint
is applied offsite or, on-site, if approved by Employer.
vii)
Polyester Powder Coating
Polyester Powder coating systems shall be Plascoat or other system
complying with BS EN 13438:2013 and be approved by the Employer for
use in the Contract. The Polyester Powder coated system shall be fully
protected during transportation, site handling and installation process.
viii)
Materials and workmanship
All paint shall be lead free, comply with the specified grade and quality and
if possible is obtained, from same manufacturer.
The paint shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest British
Standard/Specification and shall be of "Exterior" quality unless specified
otherwise.
All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions unless otherwise specified.
ix)
Existing Paint Finish - Railings
Existing metalwork shall be cleaned before painting to remove all dust,
grease, existing paint, rust, etc. down to bright metal.
x)
Preparing Galvanised and Exposed Metal Surfaces
Degrease where necessary with an abrasive sponge (Scotch-Brit) or
equivalent approved using warm water with the addition of ammonia and a
conventional detergent without wax (for 10 litres of water, half litre 25%
ammonia solution and a measured quantity of detergent). Leave the
developing foam for ten minutes, carry on scraping until the foam turns grey
and rinse thoroughly with clear water removing foam completely.
Degrease to give a fine profile.
Alternatively, the Contractor may utilise the following products for T-
Washing of the galvanised surfaces:
c) Cleaner & Degreaser
d) Mordant Solution
The colour change of the galvanised surface shall be the visual proof that
the entire surface has been satisfactorily T-Washed.
Page 250 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
xi)
Primers
One coat of High Build Alkyd Zinc Phosphate Primer shall be applied as
supplied or recommended by the named manufacturers Mdft 50.
(Contractor may provide more than one coat to achieve the specified mdft;
the cost shall be fully inclusive for providing the required mdft).
xii)
Undercoat
One coat Alkyd High Build Undercoat, 35 microns thick. Paint coat to be
applied by Airless Spray or brush to give a film thickness of at least 35
microns in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (Contractor may
provide more than one coat to achieve the specified mdft; the cost shall be
fully inclusive for providing the required ma).
xiii)
Topcoat
Two coats of Alkyd High Build Gloss Enamel Paint. Two coats are to be
applied by airless spray or brush to give a film thickness of at least 35 Mdft
per coat. (The cost shall be fully inclusive for providing the specified mdft,
which may be achieved by more than two coats). All painting systems shall
be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions, (any
associated cost for compliance to the manufacturer's instructions shall be
fully inclusive in the Contractor's rates).
xiv)
Total Mdft
Total Minimum Dry Film Thickness of combined primer, undercoat and
topcoat shall be, (50+35 +35 +35), 155 microns. Contractor shall note that
LONDON BOROUGH OF HARINGEY shall carry out random tests with an
"MDFT Instrument", to verify the total specified Mdft.
xv)
Paint Colour
Finish coat colour for all street lighting columns and other street furniture
shall be black unless otherwise specified on Contract drawings or, as
advised by the Employer, during the Contract.
xvi)
Method of Paint Application
Brush Application
Brush application is to be carried out with soft brushes using short strokes.
Do not brush out material as with conventional paints.
Spray Application
Should paint be applied by spray, this operation shall be carried out off- site.
Any spray painting operation proposed by the Contractor to be carried out
Page 251 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx
HIGHWAY AND STREETLIGHTING: 2019-2027
Term Contract
Specification
on site, shall be carried out in an approved enclosed area suitable for spray
painting systems, and shall be subject to the Employer's approval.
Spray application: suitable airless equipment, must have a spray pressure
in the gun of at least 180 bar (2560 psi) and an output of 4-5 11rrQ nozzles
with a bore of 0.48-0.66mm (19-26 thou) and a spray angle of 65-80 degrees
are recommended. Sieves of the equipment should have a mesh width of at
least 250 microns.
Or Spray Equipment shall be as per paint manufacturer's recommendations.
xvii)
Drying Time
Between coats: As per manufacturer's instructions.
xviii)
Suggested Paint Suppliers
Johnstones Heavy Duty Coatings,
or approved equivalent
or
Kalon Decorative Products
or approved equivalent
or
Gold coloured or other specified coloured paint for railing top coat.
Hammerite Products Limited,
or approved equivalent.
Page 252 of 252
Highway and Lighting Contract Specification_v0.9.docx